Skip to main content

Full text of "India and her people"

See other formats


B  1^  ^^J  B^i!^ 


AND  HER 


PEOPLE 


2 


SWAMI    AIUIKnAXANUA 


India 


AND 


Her  People 


BY 

SWAMI  ABHEI>ANANDA 

Antbor  of  "Self- Knowledge."  "How  to  be  a  Yogi,"  "Spiritual  Unfold* 
nent,"  "Divine  Heritage  of  Man,"  "Philosophy  of  Work" 

etc. 


THIRD  EDITION 


PUBLISHED   BY 

THE  VEDANTA  SOCIETY 

NEW   YORK 


■,L>L\/\ 


rtb      7 


COPYRIGHT,    1906,    BY    SWAMI    ABHkDANANDA 
SNTBRBD    AT   STATIONERS*    HALL.      ALL   RIGHTS    RKSSRVKO. 


'JDS 


CAMKLOT   PkBSS,    lS-30  OAK    STRKBT,   NKW   YORK 


TO    THE 

PEOPLE   OF  INDIA 

WITH    DEEP    FELLOW-FEELING 

AND 

EARNEST   PRAYERS   FOR    THE    RESTORATION 

OF   THEIR    ANCIENT    GLORY 

AND 

NATIONAL    FREEDOM 


INTRODUCTION. 


I  AM  very  glad  to  learn  that  the  course  of 
lectures,  recently  delivered  before  the  Brooklyn 
Institute  of  Arts  and  Sciences  by  Swami  Abhe- 
dananda,  is  to  be  published.  These  lectures 
constitute  an  exceedingly  valuable  description 
of  the  social,  political,  educational,  and  religious 
conditions  of  India.  They  contain  precisely 
what  the  American  wants  to  know  about  India. 
Dehvered,  as  they  were,  by  a  native  of  India, 
they  are  not  colored  by  foreign  prejudices.  I 
am  impressed,  by  what  I  heard  of  the  lectures, 
with  the  fact  that  in  the  hurry  and  bustle  o1 
our  Western  civihzation  we  have  a  great  deal 
to  leam  from  the  East. 

Franklin  W.  Hooper, 

Director  of  the  Brooklyn  Institute  of  Arts 
and  Sciences. 

Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  April  26,  1906. 

3 


/ 


PREFACE. 


The  first  six  lectures  contained  in  this  volume 
were  delivered  before  the  Brooklyn  Institute 
of  Arts  and  Sciences.  As  my  limited  time 
did  not  permit  me  to  describe  at  length  the 
status  of  Hindu  women,  I  have  added  a  separate 
lecture  on  "Woman's  Place  in  Hindu  ReUgion" 
to  complete  the  subject. 

My  main  object  has  been  to  give  an  impartial 
account  of  the  facts  from  the  standpoint  of  an 
unbiased  historian,  and  to  remove  all  misunder- 
standings which  prevail  among  the  Americans 
concerning  India  and  her  people.  I  have  cited 
Hindu,  American,  and  European  authorities  to 
support  my  statements,  and  I  beg  to  acknowledge 
my  indebtedness  to  those  writers  from  whom 
I  have  quoted,  especially  to  Mr.  R.  C.  Dutt,  C.I.E., 

for  numerous  valuable  facts  and  statistics  col- 

5 


PREFACE. 

lected  by  him  through  years  of  tireless  research 
in  England,  and  embodied  in  his  historical  works, 
*' Civihzation  in  Ancient  India,"  "Economic 
History  of  India,"  and  "  India  in  the  Victorian 
Age." 

The  Author. 

Nkw  York,  May  15,  1906. 

6 


CONTENTS. 


'  PAGB 

I.  The  Prevailing  Philosophy  of  To-day 9 

II.  The  Religion  of  India  To-day 48 

III.  The  Social  Status  of  the  Indian  People:    their 

System  of  Caste 87 

IV.  Political  Institutions  of  India 116 

V.  Education  in  India 170 

VI.  The  Influence  of  India  on  Western  Ci\'ilization, 

and  the  Influence  of  Western  Civilization  on 

India 216 

VII.  Woman's  Place  in  Hindu  Religion 251 

7 


INDIA    AND    HER    PEOPLE. 


I. 

THE  PREVAILING  PHILOSOPHY  OF  TO-DAY. 

Centuries  before  the  Christian  era,  nay,  long 
before  the  advent  of  the  prophet  and  founder 
of  Judaism,  when  the  forefathers  of  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  races  were  living  in  caves  and  forests, 
tattooing  their  bodies,  eating  raw  animal  flesh, 
wearing  animal  skins, — in  that  remote  antiquity, 
the  dawn  of  true  civilization  broke  upon  the 
iiorizon  of  India,  or  Bhdrata  Varsha,  as  it  is  called 
in  Sanskrit. 

The  ancient  Vedic  sages  had  already  perfected 

their  lofty  system  of  moral  philosophy,  and  their 

followers   were  well-established   in   the   practice 

of   tlie   ethical   and   spiritual   teachings   of   the 

9 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

Vedas  even  before  Moses*  had  reformed  the 
lawless  and  nomadic  tribes  of  Israel  by  giving 
them  the  ten  commandments  in  the  name  of 
Jahveh.  And  while  thinkers  among  the  Semitic 
tribes  were  still  trying  to  explain  the  origin  of 
the  human  race  and  of  the  universe  through 
the  mythological  stories  of  creation  collected 
from  the  Chaldeans,  Phoenicians,  Babylonians, 
and  Persians,  the  Aryan  philosophers  of  India 
had  already  discovered  the  evolution  of  the 
universe  out  of  one  eternal  Energy,  and  of  man 
from  the  lower  animals. 

Many  people  have  an  idea  that  India  is  in- 
habited by  idolatrous  heathens,  who  have  neither 
philosophy,  ethics,  science,  nor  religion,  and 
that  whatever  they  possess  they  have  acquired 
from  the  Christian  missionaries;  but,  since  the 
Parliament  of  Religions  at  the  World's  Fair  in 

*  According  to  the  best  authorities  of  the  present 
day,  Moses  hved  about  the  fourteenth  century  B.C.  Dr. 
Kucncn  says:  "The  exodus  is  accordingly  placed  by 
one  in  B.C.  1321,  by  another  in  b.c.  1320,  and  by  a  third 
in  1314  B.C.  Of  course,  perfect  accuracy  on  this  point 
is  unattainable.  With  this  reservation  I  accept  the 
year  1320  b.c.  as  the  most  probable." — Religion  of  Israel, 
Vol.  I,  p.  I  a  I.     . 

10 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY   OF   TO-DAY. 

Chicago  in  1893,  the  educated  men  and  women 
of  this  country  have  cast  aside  all  such  erroneous 
notions.  They  have  learned,  on  the  contrary, 
that  India  has  always  been  the  fountain-head 
of  everjT^  system  of  philosophy,  and  the  home 
of  all  the  religious  thought  of  the  world.  The 
majority  of  Oriental  scholars,  like  Professor 
Max  Muller  and  Professor  Paul  Deussen,  as  also 
advanced  students  in  America,  have  now  come 
to  realize  that  from  ancient  times  India  has 
produced  a  nation  of  philosophers,  and  that  all 
the  phases  of  philosophic  thought,  whether 
ancient  or  modern,  can  still  be  found  there 
to-day.  Victor  Cousin,  the  eminent  French  phi- 
losopher, whose  knowledge  of  the  history  of 
European  philosophy  was  unrivalled,  writes: 
"  When  we  read  the  poetical  and  philosophical 
monuments  of  the  East, — above  all,  those  of 
India,  which  are  beginning  to  spread  in  Europe, 
— we  discover  there  many  a  truth,  and  truths  so 
profound,  and  which  make  such  a  contrast  with 
the  meanness  of  the  results  at  which  the  Euro- 
pean  genius   has   sometimes   stopped,    that   we 

are   constrained   to   bend   the   knee   before   the 

11 


INDIA   AND  HER   PEOPLE. 

philosophy  of  the  East,  and  to  see  in  this  cradle 
of  the  human  race  the  native  land  of  the  highest 
philosophy."  *  And  elsewhere  he  declares  that 
"  India  contains  the  whole  history  of  philosophy 
in  a  nutshell." 

You  will  find  no  other  country  in  the  world 
where,  from  prehistoric  times  down  to  the  present 
day,  philosophy  and  religion  have  played  so 
important  a  part  in  forming  the  character  of 
the  nation  as  they  have  done  in  India.  India 
is  the  only  country  where,  at  least  two  thousand 
years  before  the  Christian  era,  public  assemblies, 
philosophic  conventions,  and  religious  congresses 
were  held  under  the  auspices  of  the  reigning 
monarchs;  and  in  these  active  part  was  taken, 
not  only  by  priests,  philosophers,  and  scientists, 
but  by  kings,  military  commanders,  soldiers, 
merchants,  peasants,  and  educated  women  of 
the  higher  classes.  As  early  as  the  Vedic  period, 
which  dates  from  5000  to  2000  B.C.,  the  ancient 
Seers  of  Truth  asked  the  most  vital  questions, 
and  discussed  problems  that  have  troubled  the 


*  Works.  Vol.  I,  p.  33. 
12 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY   OF   TO-DAY. 

minds  of  the  great  philosophers  of  all  ages. 
In  those  questions  we  can  discern  the  develop- 
ment of  their  intellectual  powers,  and  their 
insight  into  the  true  nature  of  things.  They 
inquired:  "  When  death  swallows  the  whole 
world,  who  is  the  deity  which  shall  swallow 
death?  What  part  of  man  exists  after  death? 
What  becomes  of  the  vital  forces  when  a  man 
dies?  What  is  the  nature  of  the  soul?  Where 
is  the  foundation  and  support  of  this  universe? 
What  is  the  essence  of  being?  What  is  there 
that  governs  all  things  and  yet  is  separate  from 
everything?"  In  trying  to  answer  these  and 
other  problems  of  similar  nature,  the  ancient 
thinkers  discovered  the  laws  of  thought  and 
traced  the  causes  of  phenomena,  applying  the 
rules  of  logic  and  reason  at  every  step. 

This  was  the  beginning  of  philosophy  in  India. 
The  minds  of  those  truth-seekers  were  abso- 
lutely free  from  all  limitations  of  doctrines, 
dogmas,  and  creeds.  They  never  asked  what 
their  belief  was,  or  whether  they  had  faith  in  a 
personal    God;    but    the    burning   questions    for 

them  were,  how  to  acquire  true  knowledge  of  the 

13 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

universe,  of  its  origin  and  cause,  how  to  know 
the  real  nature  of  their  souls,  and  how  to  solve 
the  problems  of  life  and  death.  At  that  time 
philosophic  and  religious  thought  began  to  fer- 
ment as  actively  and  universally  in  the  atmos- 
phere of  India  as  we  find  to-day  in  Western 
countries.  Some  of  the  answers  given  to  these 
questions  by  the  unbiassed  thinkers  of  those 
days  are  truly  astounding;  it  seems  as  though 
the  ancient  Seers  of  Truth  had  anticipated  the 
conclusions  of  Plato,  Spinoza,  Berkeley,  Hume, 
Hegel,  Schopenhauer,  Herbert  Spencer,  Haeckel, 
even  centuries  before  their  existence. 

During  the  pre-Buddhistic  period,  or  before 
the  sixth  century  B.C.,  India  gave  rise  to  a 
great  variety  of  philosophical  systems,  some  of 
which  were  atheistic,  agnostic,  nihilistic,  mate- 
rialistic, while  others  were  pluralistic,  dualistic, 
or  monotheistic,  qualified  non-dualistic,  idealis- 
tic, spiritualistic,  monistic  systems  of  thought, 
such  as  are  common  in  Europe  and  America 
at  the  present  time.  In  fact,  the  natural  ten- 
dency of  the  Hindu  mind  from  the  very  beginning 

was   to  search  after  the   unchangeable   Reality 

u 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY   OF   TO-DAY. 

of  the  universe,  to  trace  the  source  of  all  phe- 
nomena, to  understand  the  purpose  of  earthly- 
existence,  and,  above  all,  to  know  what  relation 
the  individual  soul  bears  to  the  Universal  Being. 
Animated  by  an  intense  longing  and  guided  by 
unswerving  love  tor  Truth,  the  ancient  thinkers 
discovered  many  of  the  natural  laws,  and  ration- 
ally explained  them,  without  fearing  contradic- 
tion or  persecution;  for  freedom  of  thought  has 
always  prevailed  among  all  classes  of  people  in 
India. 

These  sages  understood  the  process  of  cosmic 
evolution  from  a  homogeneous  mass  into  the 
variety  of  phenomena,  and  rejected  the  theory 
of  special  creation  out  of  nothing.  In  one  of 
the  Upanishads  we  read  that  a  sage,  after  ex- 
plaining the  mystery  of  Creation  to  his  son, 
said:  "My  dear  child,  some  people  think  that 
this  world  has  come  out  of  nothing,  but  how  can 
something  come  out  of  nothing?"  Thus  we  see 
that,  unlike  the  Hebrews,  the  Hindu  thinkers 
did  not  believe  in  special  creation,  but  from 
ancient  times  maintained  the  theory  of  gradual 

evolution.     It  has  often  been  remarked  that  the 

15 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

doctrine  of  evolution  is  the  marvel  of  modem 
times,  and  that  it  was  unknown  in  the  past  ages, 
but  the  students  of  Oriental  literature  are  well 
aware  that  it  was  well  known  to  the  Hindus  of 
the  Vedic  ages.  Professor  Huxley  admits  this 
when  he  says:  "To  say  nothing  of  Indian  sages, 
to  whom  evolution  was  a  familiar  notion  ages 
before  Paul  of  Tarsus  was  born."  *  And  Sir 
Monier  Monier  Williams,  in  his  "  Br^hminism 
and  Hinduism,"  declares:  "  Indeed,  if  I  may 
be  allowed  the  anachronism,  the  Hindus  were 
Spinozites  more  than  two  thousand  years  before 
the  existence  of  Spinoza;  and  Darwinians  many 
centuries  before  Darwin;  and  evolutionists  many 
centuries  before  the  doctrine  of  evolution  had 
been  accepted  by  the  scientists  of  our  time,  and 
before  any  word  like  *  evolution '  existed  in  any 
language  of  the  world."  This  statement  is 
absolutely  correct.  If  we  study  the  philosophical 
systems  of  the  great  thinkers  and  Seers  of  Truth 
of  ancient  India,  we  shall  find  the  most  wonder- 
ful discoveries  that  have  ever  been  recorded  in 
the  whole  history  of  philosophy. 

*  Science  and  Hebrew  Tradition,  p.  150. 
16 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY   OF   TODAY. 

In  their  attempts  to  solve  the  mysteries  of 
the  phenomenal  world,  Hindu  Seers  of  Truth 
developed  six  principal  systems  of  philosophy, 
each  having  numerous  branches  of  its  own. 
One  school  traces  the  origin  of  the  vmiverse  to  the 
combination  of  atoms  and  molecules.  It  is 
known  as  the  Vaisheshika  philosophy  of  Kanada. 
The  system  of  Kanada  divides  the  phenomenal 
universe  into  six  Padarthas,  or  categories,  which 
embrace  the  whole  realm  of  knowledge.  They 
are  these:  (i)  Dravya,  or  substance;  (2)  Guna, 
or  quaUty;  (3)  Karma,  or  action;  (4)  Samanya, 
or  that  which  constitutes  a  genus;  (5)  Vishesha, 
or  that  which  constitutes  the  individuality  or 
separateness  of  an  object;  and  (6)  Samavaya, 
coherence  or  inseparability.  According  to  some, 
Abh^va,  or  non-existence,  is  the  seventh  sub- 
stance. 

Each  of  these,  again,  is  subdivided  into  vari- 
ous classes.  There  are,  for  instance,  nine  sub- 
stances: (i)  earth;  (2)  water;  (3)  light;  (4)  air; 
(5)  ether;  (6)  time  (Kala);  (7)  space  (Dish); 
(8)  self  (Atman);   and  (9)  mind  (Manas).     These 

substances,  again,  cannot  exist  without  qualities, 

17 


INDIA  AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

of  which  there  are  seventeen:  color,  taste,  smell, 
touch,  number  (that  by  which  we  perceive  one 
or  many),  extension  or  quantity,  individual- 
ity, conjunction,  priority,  posteriority,  thought, 
pleasure,  pain,  desire,  aversion,  and  will.  The 
substances  are  affected  by  five  kinds  of  action: 
(i)  upward  motion,  (2)  downward  motion, 
(3)  contraction,  (4)  expansion,  (5)  movement 
from  one  spot  to  another.  All  the  objects  of 
knowledge  must  be  either  substance,  quality, 
or  motion. 

According  to  Kanada,  the  first  four  substances 
are  non-eternal  as  aggregates,  but  are  made  up 
of  minute  invisible  atoms  (anus)  which  are 
eternal.  They  exist  as  inorganic  and  organic 
matter,  or  as  instruments  of  sense-perceptions. 
Kandda  describes  atoms  (anus)  as  indivisible 
particles  of  matter  which  possess  no  visible  di- 
mensions. On  this  point  he  agrees  more  with 
modem  European  scientists  than  with  Greek 
philosophers,  who  gave  visible  dimensions  to 
atoms.  The  first  aggregate  of  these  atoms  is 
of  two  (anus).     It  is  called  Dyanu,  or  molecule, 

which  is  still  invisible.     The  aggregate  of  three 

18 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY    OF    TO-DAY. 

molecules  or  double  atoms  forms  a  Trasarenu, 
which  has  visible  dimension.  These  aggregates 
of  composite  atoms  are  destructible,  while  single 
atoms  are  indestructible  by  nature.  How  re- 
markable it  is  to  see  that  the  conception  of 
atoms  and  molecules  arose  in  India  centuries 
before  the  time  of  Empedocles  and  Democritus! 
And  the  latest  atomic  theory  of  European  science 
has  not  in  any  way  surpassed  that  of  ancient 
India. 

Furthermore,  the  Vaisheshika  system  main- 
tains that  these  atoms  are  not  created  by  God, 
but  are  co-eternal  with  Him.  The  power, 
however,  which  combines  two  atoms  and  makes 
aggregates  of  atoms,  comes  from  God,  who  is 
personal,  who  possesses  knowledge,  desire,  and 
will,  and  who  is  the  one  Lord  and  Governor  of 
all  phenomena.  According  to  this  system,  ether, 
time,  space,  Atman  or  Self,  and  mind  or  Manas, 
are  eternal  substances  of  nature.  Mind  or 
Manas  is  described  as  infinitely  small,  like  an 
atom  (anus);  but  it  is  distinct  from  Atman  or 
Self, which  is  vast  (Vibhu).     Although  mind  and 

Atman  or  Self  are  eternal,  still  they  are  innumer- 

19 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

able.  The  Self  or  Atman  is  distinct  from  the 
senses,  and  possesses  nine  qualities,  such  as 
knowledge,  will,  desire,  happiness,  etc.  The 
aim  of  the  Vaisheshika  philosophy  (which 
derives  its  name  from  Vishesha,  the  fifth  sub- 
stance) is  the  attainment  of  perfection  and 
absolute  freedom  of  the  soul  through  the  riglit 
knowledge  of  the  causes  of  the  phenomenal 
universe. 

Next  to  the  Vaisheshika  is  the  Ny&ya  philos- 
ophy   of    Gautama.     Although    it    is    generally 
called  a  system  of  logic,  still  it  is  both  logic  and 
philosophy.     Its   object    is    the   same   as   other 
Hindu  systems,  namely,  the  true  knowledge  of 
nature,   soul   and   God,   and   the   attainment   of 
ultimate  freedom.     This  system,  although  based 
upon  the  atomic  theory  of  Kandda,  begins  with 
the  enumeration  of  sixteen  Pad&rthas,  or  subjects 
for  discussion:    (i)   Pramana,  proof  or  means  of 
knowledge;    (2)  Prameya,  or  objects  of  knowl- 
edge;    (3)   Sansaya,  or  doubt;     (4)   Prayojana, 
motive  or  purpose;     (5)  Drist^nta,  example  or 
instance;     (6)   SiddhTmta,  or  determined   truth; 

(7)  Avayava,  syllogism  or  premisses;    (8)  Tarka, 

20 


THE   PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY   OF   TODAY. 

reasoning  or  confutation;  {9)  Nirnaya,  or  con- 
clusion; (10)  Vada,  or  argumentation;  (11) 
Jalpa,  or  sophistry;  (12)  Vitanda,  objection;  {13) 
Hetv^bhasa,  or  fallacies;  (14)  Chhala,  quibble 
or  perversion;  (15)  J^ti,  or  false  analogies;  and, 
(16)  Nigrahasthana,  or  unfitness  for  arguing. 
The  correct  knowledge  of  each  of  these  is  the  aim 
of  this  school.  According  to  Gautama,  the  means 
of  knowledge  are  four:  (i)  sensuous  perception; 
(2)  inference;  (3)  analogy;  (4)  Shabda,  or  verbal 
testimony. 

The  objects  of  knowledge  are  twelve  in  num- 
ber: Self  or  Atman,  body,  organs  of  senses, 
objective  perception,  intellect  (Buddhi),  mind 
(Manas),  will,  fault,  state  after  death,  retribution, 
pain,  and  final  emancipation.  These  objects, 
as  well  as  the  means  of  knowledge,  which  are 
described  singly  and  elaborately,  form  the 
fundamental  principles  of  the  philosophy  of 
Ny^ya,  while  the  rest  of  the  Padarthas  belong 
to  the  system  of  logic  which  it  expounds.  There- 
fore it  is  both  logic  and  philosophy.  Gautama 
is   called   the  Aristotle   of  India.     He  was   the 

founder   of   Hindu   logic,  which   has   gradually 

21 


INDIA   AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

developed  into  a  perfect  logical  system,  and  to 
which  have  been  added  voluminous  works  by 
the  best  Hindu  logicians  of  later  date.  The 
principal  aim  of  Gautama's  system  was  to  estab- 
lish right  methods  of  reasoning,  and  to  develop 
correct  inference  by  the  construction  of  true 
syllogisms.  The  Hindu  syllogism  consists  of 
five  parts:  (i)  proposition,  (2)  reason,  (3)  in- 
stance, (4)  application  of  the  reason,  and  (5)  con- 
clusion. By  omitting  two  parts  of  this,  we  can 
make  it  a  perfect  syllogism  of  Aristotle.  The 
connection  in  the  major  premiss  of  Ar  stotle's 
syllogism  is  called  in  Hindu  logic  Vydpti,  or 
invariable  concomitance.  Speaking  of  Hindu 
logic,  Mr.  Davies  says:  "The  right  methods  of 
reasoning  have  been  discussed  with  as  much 
subtlety  as  by  any  of  the  Western  logicians.'* 
Many  European  scholars,  after  finding  a  close 
resemblance  jDetween  the  logic  of  Aristotle  and 
that  of  Gautama,  have  arrived  at  the  conclusion 
that  perhaps  the  Greeks  borrowed  the  first  ele- 
ments of  their  logic  and  philosophy  from  the 
Hindus.      Mr.    Dutt   says:     "Comparing    dates, 

we  are  disposed  to  say  of  this  as  of  many  other 

22 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY    OF    TODAY. 

sciences,  The  Hindus  invented  logic,  the  Greeks 
perfected  it."  *  We  must  not  forget  the  historical 
fact  that  there  was  a  close  intercourse  between  the 
Greeks  and  the  Hindus  from  the  time  of  Pythag- 
oras, who,  it  is  said,  went  to  India  to  gather 
the  wisdom  of  the  Hindus.  Alexander  himself 
was  so  deeply  impressed,  when  he  heard  about 
the  Hindu  philosophers,  that  he  desired  to  make 
their  acquaintance.  It  is  also  said  that  he 
brought  many  Hindu  philosophers  back  to 
Greece  with  him.  These  two  schools  of  phi- 
losophy, the  Vaisheshika  and  the  Nyaya,  sup- 
plement each  other,  and  have  at  present  many 
followers  in  some  parts  of  India,  especially  in 
Bengal  and  among  the  Jains, 

Then  comes  the  S&nkhya  system  of  Kapila. 
Kapila  lived  about  700  B.C.  He  is  called  the 
father  of  the  evolution  theory  in  India.  His 
system  is  more  like  the  philosophy  of  Herbert 
Spencer.  He  rejected  the  atomic  theory  by 
tracing  the  origin  of  atoms  to  one  eternal  cos- 
mic energy,  which  he  called  Prakriti  (Latin, 
Procreatrix,    the    creative    energy).     He    main- 

*  Civilization  in  Ancient  India,  Vol.  I,  p.  292. 

23 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

tained  that  the  whole  phenomenal  universe  has 
evolved  out  of  one  cosmic  energy  which  is  eternal. 
Kapila  defined  atoms  as  force  centers,  which 
correspond  to  the  Ions  and  Electrons  of  modern 
science.  It  was  Kapila  who  for  the  first  time 
explained  creation  as  the  result  of  attraction 
and  repulsion,  which  literally  means  love  and 
hatred  of  atoms,  as  Empedocles  puts  it. 

The  Scinkya  philosophy  of  Kapila,  in  short,  is 
devoted  entirely  to  the  systematic,  logical,  and 
scientific  explanation  of  the  process  of  cosmic 
evolution  from  that  primordial  Prakriti,  or  eternal 
Energy.  There  is  no  ancient  philosophy  in  the 
world  which  was  not  indebted  to  the  S^Jikhya 
system  of  Kapila.  The  idea  of  evolution  which 
the  ancient  Greeks  and  neo-Platonists  had  can 
be  traced  back  to  the  influence  of  tjjjs  SSukhya 
school  of  thought.  Professor  E.  W.  Hopkins 
says:  "Plato  is  full  of  Sdnkhyan  thought,  worked 
out  by  him,  but  taken  from  Pythagoras.  Before 
the  sixth  century  B.C.  all  the  religious-philosophi- 
cal ideas  of  Pythagoras  are  current  in  India 
(L.  Schroeder,  Pythagoras).     If  there  were  but 

one  or  two  of  these  cases,   they  might  be  set 

24 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY    OF   TO-DAY. 

aside  as  accidental  coincidences,  but  such  coin- 
cidences are  too  numerous  to  be  the  result  of 
chance."  And  again  he  writes:  "Neo-Pla- 
tonism  and  Christian  Gnosticism  owe  much  to 
India.  The  Gnostic  ideas  in  regard  to  a  plurality 
of  heavens  and  spiritual  worlds  go  back  directly 
to  Hindu  sources.  Soul  and  light  are  one  in 
the  Sankhya  system,  before  they  became  so  in 
Greece,  and  when  they  appear  united  in  Greece 
it  is  by  means  of  the  thought  which  is  borrowed 
from  India.  The  famous  three  qualities  of  the 
S^khya  reappear  as  the  Gnostic  'three  classes.'"* 
In  his  "Hindu  Philosophy,"  John  Davies 
speaks  of  Kapila's  system  as  the  first  recorded 
system  of  philosophy  in  the  world,  and  calls  it 
* '  the  earliest  attempt  on  record  to  give  an 
answer,  from  reason  alone,  to  the  mysterious 
questions  which  arise  in  every  thoughtful  mind 
about  the  origin  of  the  world,  the  nature  and 
relations  of  man  and  his  future  destiny."  Fur- 
thermore, Mr.  Davies  says,  in  reference  to  the 
German  philosophy  of  Schopenhauer  and  of 
Hartmann,  that   it   is    "a   reproduction  of   the 

*  Religions  of  India,  pp.  559,  560. 
25 


INDIA  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

philosophic  system  of  Kapila  in  its  materiaHstic 
part,  presented  in  a  more  elaborate  form,  but 
on  the  same  fundamental  lines.  In  this  respect 
the  human  intellect  has  gone  over  the  same 
ground  that  it  occupied  more  than  two  thousand 
years  ago;  but  on  a  more  important  question 
it  has  taken  a  step  in  retreat.  Kapila  recog- 
nized fully  the  existence  of  a  soul  in  man,  form- 
ing indeed  his  proper  nature, — the  absolute  of 
Fichte, — distinct  from  matter  and  immortal; 
but  our  latest  philosophy,  both  here  and  in  Ger- 
many, can  see  in  man  only  a  highly  developed 
organization."  * 

It  is  most  startling  to  find  that  the  ulti- 
mate conclusions  of  this  S^khya  system  har- 
monize and  coincide  with  those  of  modem  science. 
It  says:  (i)  Something  cannot  come  out  of  noth- 
ing; (2)  The  effect  lies  in  the  cause,  that  is, 
the  effect  is  the  cause  reproduced;  (3)  Destruc- 
tion means  the  reversion  of  an  effect  to  its 
causal  state;  (4)  The  laws  of  nature  are  uni- 
form and  regular  throughout;  (5)  The  building 
up  of  the  cosmos  is  the  result  of  the  evolution 

*  Preface  to  flindu  Philusophy. 
26 


THE   PREVAILING   PHILOSOPHY   OF   TO-DAY. 

of  the  cosmic  energy.  These  are  some  of  the 
conclusions  which  Kapila  arrived  at  through 
observation  and  experiment,  and  by  following 
strictly  the  rules  of  inductive  logic. 

Kapila  denied  the  existence  of  a  Creator;  but 
still  his  philosophy  is  not  considered  atheistic, 
because  he  admitted  the  existence  of  the  indi- 
vidual soul,  Purusha,  as  an  eternal  and  immortal 
entity.  The  different  schools  of  Buddhistic  phi- 
losophy are  based  upon  the  Sankhya  system 
of  Kapila.  The  agnosticism  of  the  Jain  phi- 
losophy, which  has  now  a  large  number  of  fol- 
lowers in  India,  is  also  based  upon  the  truths 
of  this  system;  while  the  main  principles  of  the 
Sankhya  teachings  have  played  a  most  important 
part  in  the  popular  forms  of  the  symbol-worship 
of  modern  India. 

Next  in  order  comes  the  Yoga  philosophy  of 
Patanjali.  Patanjali  accepts  the  theory  of  evo- 
lution as  explained  by  Kapila,  and  maintains 
that  the  whole  phenomenal  universe  is  the 
result  of  the  evolution  of  Prakriti,  the  eternal 
Energy.     Like  Kapila,  Patanjali  believes  in  the 

existence   of   countless  Purushas,  or   individual 

27 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

souls,  each  of  which  is  by  nature  eternal,  infinite, 
and  immortal.  But  this  system  differs  from 
Sankhya  by  admitting  the  existence  of  a  cosmic 
Purusha  (personal  God),  who  is  formless,  infi- 
nite, omniscient,  and  untouched  by  affliction, 
activity,  deserts,  and  desires.  Patanjali  takes  up 
the  psychology  of  Sankhya,  and  explains  most 
elaborately  the  various  functions  of  the  Chitta, 
or  mind-substance.  Both  Kapila  and  Patanjali 
maintain  that  mind-substance  is  material, — that 
it  is  the  product  of  the  insentient  Prakriti.  On 
this  point  they  anticipated  the  conclusions  of 
the  materialistic  philosophers  of  modem  Europe; 
but  they  admitted  that  mind-substance,  or 
Chitta,  is  distinct  from  Purusha,  or  true  Self, 
which  is  the  source  of  consciousness  and  intel- 
ligence. 

The  Yoga  system  devotes  itself  to  the  higher 
psychology  of  the  human  mind.  It  divides  Chitta 
into  five  classes  of  Vrittis,  or  modifications:  Right 
knowledge,  indiscrimination,  verbal  delusion, 
sleep,  memory.*  Right  knowledge  proceeds  from 
direct  sensuous  perception,  inference,  and  com- 

♦  Vide  '  RAja  Yoga,"  by  SwAmi  Vivtkananda,  p.  J09. 

28 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY    OF   TO-DAY. 

petent  evidence.  These  and  various  other  mental 
functions  are  minutely  described  by  Patanjali. 
After  explaining  all  the  modifications  of  the 
Chitta,  Patanjali  shows  the  method  by  which 
absolute  control  over  mind  {Manas),  intellect 
{Buddht),  Chitta,  and  egotism  (Ahankdra)  can 
be  attained.  For  the  highest  aim  of  his  phi- 
losophy is  to  separate  the  Purusha  from  Prakriti, 
with  which  it  is  at  present  closely  related;  and 
to  make  it  reach  Kaivalya,  or  final  emancipation 
from  the  bondage  of  nature  and  its  qualities. 

Patanjali  also  explains  the  science  of  concen- 
tration and  meditation,  the  science  of  breath, 
clairaudience,  telepathy,  and  various  other 
psychic  powers,  and  shows  the  way  by  which 
one  can  attain  to  God-consciousness  in  this  life. 
There  is  no  system  of  psychological  philosophy 
in  the  world  so  complete  as  the  psychology  of 
Patanjali.  The  modem  psychology  of  Europe, 
strictly  speaking,  is  not  true  psychology,  because 
it  does  not  admit  the  existence  of  Psyche,  the  soul; 
as  Schopenhauer  says:  "The  study  of  psychology 
is  vain,   for  there  is  no   Psyche."     It  may  be 

called  physiological  psychology,  or  somatology,  as 

29 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

my  friend,  Professor  Hiram  Corson,  of  Cornell 
University,  calls  it.  True  psychology  you  will 
find  to-day  in  the  Yoga  system  of  Patanjali. 
This  philosophy  has  still  many  followers  in 
different  parts  of  India. 

There  is  yet  another  school  of  philosophy, 
called  the  Purva  Mimdnsa  of  Jaimini.  The 
word  "Mimansa"  means  investigation,  and 
"Purva"  means  former  or  prior.  This  system 
examines  the  various  injunctions  of  the  ritualistic 
portion  of  the  Vedas  (Karma  Kanda),  and  points 
out  that  the  highest  duty  of  man  is  to  follow 
those  injunctions  as  strictly  as  possible,  for  they 
are  the  direct  revelation  of  the  Supreme  Being. 
According  to  Jaimini,  the  words  of  the  Vedas  are 
eternal,  and  the  relation  of  these  words  to  their 
meaning  is  also  eternal;  so  the  Vedas  had  no 
human  origin.  This  system  of  philosophy  ex- 
plains the  authoritative  sources  of  knowledge, 
the  relation  between  word  and  thought,  and 
how  this  world  is  the  manifestation  of  the  word. 
We  see  a  cow  because  there  is  in  the  Vedas 
such  a  word  as  "cow"  (in  the  Sanskrit  Gan). 
If   the   word   cow   did   not   exist,    the   material 

30 


THE   PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY   OF   TO-DAY. 

object  as  cow  would  be  non-existent.  We  may 
laugh  at  such  conclusions  at  present,  but  when 
we  go  deep  into  the  subject  and  try  to  under- 
stand the  relation  which  lies  between  thought 
and  word,  we  shall  realize  the  truth  of  such 
statements.  The  sun  exists  because  there  is 
the  word  "sun"  in  the  Vedas;  that  is,  the  sun 
is  nothing  but  a  part  of  the  manifestation  of 
that  Logos  or  eternal  thought  form  which  exists 
in  the  cosmic  mind. 

Purva  Mimansa  may  also  be  called  the  phi- 
losophy of  work.  It  describes  the  true  nature 
of  duty  and  of  daily  works,  sacrificial,  ritualistic, 
and  devotional.  Through  it  we  can  understand 
which  is  right  work  and  in  what  way  it  should 
be  performed  to  produce  certain  results.  For 
instance,  if  we  wish  to  go  to  heaven  we  shall 
have  to  perform  certain  acts  and  those  acts  will 
create  a  certain  unknown  or  imperceptible  re- 
sult, which  will  be  rewarded  or  manifested  in 
the  form  of  our  going  to  heaven.  Now,  how 
do  these  things  happen?  What  is  the  law? 
And  if  we  perform  that  very  act  in  some  other 
way,   what   defects  would  be  produced  in   the 

31 


INDIA    AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

result?  All  these  minute  points  are  discussed. 
You  may  throw  them  away  as  speculation,  but 
those  who  believe  in  the  efficacy  of  prayers,  in 
the  law  of  action  and  reaction,  of  cause  and 
sequence,  cannot  reject  them  as  mere  specula- 
tion, because  there  is  some  truth  in  them.  We 
cannot  deny  it.  Every  thought  that  we  think 
or  every  movement  of  the  body  that  we  make, 
must  produce  some  result  somewhere  in  some 
form.  What  are  those  results?  How  will  they 
affect  our  being?  We  are  too  busy  to  think  of 
these  subtle  problems  now,  but  there  are  thinkers 
who  can  explain  a  great  deal  on  these  higher  and 
finer  lines  of  nature.  Referring  to  the  logic  of  this 
system,  Professor  Colebrook  says:  "Each  case 
is  examined  and  determined  upon  general  prm- 
ciples,  and  from  the  cases  decided  the  principles 
may  be  collected.  A  well-ordered  arrangement 
of  them  would  constitute  the  philosophy  of  law; 
and  this  is,  in  truth,  what  has  been  attempted 
in  the  Mimansa."  This  being  an  orthodox  phi- 
losophy, it  appeals  to  the  students  of  the  Vedas, 
and  especially  to  the  Brahmin  priests. 

Lastly   comes    the    Uttara   Mimdnsa,  or    the 

32 


THE   PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY   OF  TO-DAY. 

system  of  Vedanta.  This  is  the  most  popular 
philosophy  of  India  to-day.  Since  the  decline 
of  Buddhistic  philosophy  in  India,  Vedanta  has 
become  most  prominent  and  most  powerful, 
having  a  large  following  among  all  classes  of 
people,  from  the  priests  down  to  the  pariahs. 
Among  the  six  schools,  the  Vedanta  philosophy 
has  reached  the  highest  pinnacle  of  philosophic 
thought  which  the  human  mind  can  possibly 
attain.  A  careful  study  of  these  different 
systems  shows  that  they  contain  all  the  highest 
truths  which  were  known  to  the  ancient  Greek 
philosophers  of  the  Pythagorean  and  Eleatic 
schools.  Professor  E.  W.  Hopkins  says:  "Both 
Thales  and  Parmenides  were  indeed  anticipated 
by  Hindu  sages,  and  the  Eleatic  school  seems 
to  be  but  a  reflection  of  the  Upanishads.  The 
doctrines  of  Anaxamander  and  Heraclitus  were 
perhaps  not  known  first  in  Greece."  *  Frederic 
Schlegel  writes:  "The  divine  origin  of  man,  as 
taught  by  the  Vedanta,  is  continually  inculcated, 
to  stimulate  his  efforts  to  return,  to  animate 
him  in  the  struggle,  and  incite  him  to  consider  a 

*  Religions  of  India. 
33 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

reunion  and  reincorporation  with  Divinity  as  the 
one  primary  object  of  every  action  and  reaction. 
Even  the  loftiest  philosophy  of  the  Europeans, 
the  idealism  of  reason  as  it  is  set  forth  by  the 
Greek  philosophers,  appears  in  comparison  with 
the  abundant  light  and  vigor  of  Oriental  idealism 
like  a  feeble  Promethean  spark  in  the  full  flood 
of  heavenly  glory  of  the  noonday  sun,  faltering 
and  feeble  and  ever  ready  to  be  extinguished."  * 
The  ultimate  reality  of  the  universe,  according 
to  Vedanta,  is  the  one  Absolute  Substance  which 
is  beyond  subject  and  object,  which  is  the  infinite 
source  of  intelligence  or  knowledge,  of  conscious- 
ness and  blissfulness,  which  is  one  and  not  many. 
It  is  called  in  Sanskrit  Brahman.  It  is  the  same 
as  the  Good  of  Plato,  the  "Ding-an-sich"  or  the 
transcendental  Thing-in-itself  of  Kant,  the  Will 
of  Schopenhauer,  the  Substantia  of  Spinoza,  the 
Over-Soul  of  Emerson,  the  Unknowable  of  Her- 
bert Spencer,  the  Divine  Essence  of  the  Heaven- 
ly Father  of  the  Christians,  and  of  Allah  of  the 
Mahometans.  It  is  also  the  true  nature  of 
Buddha   and   of   Christ.     It    pervades   the   uni- 

♦  Indian  Language,  Literature,  and  Philosophy,  p.  471. 

31 


THE   PREVAILING   PHILOSOPHY   OF   TO-DAY. 

verse.  It  is  one  and  universal.  No  one  can 
divide  it:  it  is  indivisible.  This  is  the  reality 
of  the  universe,  says  Vedanta. 

The  system  of  Vedanta  is  more  critical  than 
the  Kantian  system,  because  it  shows  the  phe- 
nomenal nature  of  the  Kantian  ego,  of  his  forms 
of  intuition,  and  his  categories  of  thought.  It 
is  also  more  sublime  than  the  philosophy  of  Kant, 
because  it  recognizes  and  proves  the  identity  of 
the  objective  reality  of  the  universe  with  the 
subjective  reality  of  the  ego.  Kant  did  not 
realize  that  the  Thing-in-itself  ("Ding-an-sich") 
of  the  objective  world  and  the  '* Ding-an-sich" 
of  the  subjective  world  are  one.  In  no  other 
system  of  philosophy  has  this  oneness  been  so 
clearly  explained  and  so  strongly  emphasized  as 
it  is  in  Vedanta.  Professor  Max  Miiller  says: 
"This  constitutes  the  unique  character  of  Vedanta, 
unique  compared  with  every  other  philosophy 
of  the  world  which  has  not  been  influenced  by 
it,  directly  or  indirectly."  *  There  have  been 
many  European  philosophies  which  have  denied 
the  existence  of  the  external  world,  but  not  one 

*  The  Six  Systems  of  Indian  Philosophy,  p.  333. 

35 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

of  them  has  ventured  to  deny  the  apparent 
reahty  of  the  ego,  of  the  senses,  of  the  mind,  and 
of  their  inherent  forms.  In  this  respect  Vedanta 
holds  a  most  unique  position  among  the  phi- 
losophies of  the  world.  After  lifting  the  Self  or 
the  true  nature  of  the  ego,  Vedanta  unites  it 
with  the  essence  of  Divinity,  which  is  absolutely 
pure,  perfect,  immortal,  unchangeable,  and  one. 
No  philosopher,  not  even  Plato,  Spinoza,  Kant, 
Hegel,  or  Schopenhauer,  has  reached  that  height 
of  philosophic  thought.  Professor  Max  Muller 
declares:  "None  of  our  philosophers,  ne-t  except- 
ing Heraclitus,  Plato,  Kant,  or  Hegel,  has 
ventured  to  erect  such  a  spire,  never  frightened 
by  storms  or  lightnings.  Stone  follows  on  stone, 
in  regular  succession  after  once  the  first  step 
has  been  made,  after  once  it  has  been  clearly 
seen  that  in  the  beginning  there  can  have  been 
but  One,  as  there  will  be  but  One  in  the  end, 
whether  we  call  it  Atman  or  Brahman."  * 

Altliough  Vedanta  has  united  heaven  and 
earth,  God  and  man,  Brahman  and  Atman,  still 
it    has    destroyed    nothing    in    the    phenomenal 

•  The  Six  Systems  of  Indian  Philosophy,  p.  239. 

36 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY    01    TO-DAY. 

world.     It  accepts  all  the  ultimate  conclusions 

of  modem  science;  but  at  the  same  time  it  says 

that  Truth  is  one  and  not  many,  yet  there  can 

be  many  expressions  and  various  manifestations 

of   the    one    Tnith.     Furthermore,  it  maintains 

that  the  aim  of  the  higher  philosophy  is  not  merely 

to  ascertain  the  established  conjunctions  of  events 

which  constitute  the  order  of  the  universe,  or  to 

record  the  phenomena  which  it  exhibits  to  our 

observation  and  refer  them  to  the  general  laws, 

but    also    to   lead   the    human   mind    from    the 

realm  of  the  knowable  to  that  which  is  beyond 

the  knowable.     We  are  now  living  in  the  reahn 

of  the  knowable;   but  that  which  teaches  simply 

the  laws  which  govern  the  knowable  phenomena 

is  not  the  highest  kind  of  philosophy.     We  must 

know  the  laws  of  the  knowable,  yet  at  the  same 

time  we  should  aspire  to  go  beyond  the  knowable 

and  plunge  into  the  realm  of  the  Infinite.     If 

any  philosophy  can  help  us  in  this  attempt,  then 

it  must  be  higher  than  the  ordinary  system  which 

keeps   us    within    the    limits    of   the   knowable. 

Vedanta  philosophy  guides  us  above  all  knowable 

objects    of   perception,    and    directs    our    souls 

37 


INDIA    AND    HZR   PEOPLE. 

toward  the  Eternal  Absolute  Being,  wherein  we 
find  the  solution  of  all  problems  and  the  answer 
to  all  questions.  Its  attempt  is  to  trace  the 
relation  between  the  soul  and  God,  not  by  an)' 
unscientific  method,  but  by  the  most  rigorous 
processes  of  logic  and  reason,  starting  from  the 
ultimate  generahzations  of  the  various  branches 
of  science. 

True  philosophy  must  construct  a  theory 
which  will  be  the  simplest  in  its  nature,  and  yet 
at  the  same  time  will  explain  all  the  vital  prob- 
lems which  the  science  of  the  phenomenal-Know- 
able  can  never  explain,  and  which  will  liarmonize 
with  the  highest  form  of  universal  religion, 
without  destroying  the  loftiest  aspirations  of 
the  human  soul.  True  philosophy  in  the  widest 
sense  must  perform  three  great  functions.  First, 
it  must  coordinate  the  ultimate  results  arrived 
at  by  special  branches  of  knowledge  which  we 
call  sciences,  and,  taking  up  those  conclusions, 
it  must  form  the  widest  generalizations  possible. 
WTien  it  does  this,  it  is  called  phenomenology. 
Herbert     Spencer's     philosophy    performs    this 

function  most  wonderfully,  but  it  leaves  out  the 

3S 


THE   PREVAILING   PHILOSOPHY   OF    TO-DAY. 

vital  problems  which  perplex  the  minds  of  the 
greatest    philosophers    as    unsolvable   mj'^steries. 
Herbert    Spencer    does    not    explain    all    these 
problems,  but  without  finding  their  true  solution 
our  lives  will  not  be  worth  living.     We  must 
find    an    explanation,    we    must    solve    all    the 
problems  which  disturb  the  peace  of  our  souls; 
and  if  any  system  will  help  us,  we  will  study  it, 
follow  its  teachings,  and  satisfy  our  questioning 
minds.     Secondly,  true  philosophy  must  investi- 
gate the  realm  of  knowledge  and  trace  its  source. 
You  know  that  you  are  sitting  here  and  listening: 
where    does    this    knowledge    come    from?     The 
minds  of  even  the  greatest  thinkers  have  become 
confused  in  trying  to  answer  this  question.     A 
philosophy  which  does  this  is  called  Epistomology. 
The    philosophy    of    Kant,   Hegel,   Fichte,    and 
others    has    performed    this    function.       In    his 
"Elements    of     General    Philosophy"    George 
Croom  Robertson  says:    "Epistomology  is  just 
philosophy,  because  it  deals  with   things,  deals 
with  being;    it  deals  with  things  going  beyond 
bare  experience,  but  it  treats  of  them  in  relation 

to  the  fact  of  knowing.     Thus  an  epistomologist 

39 


INDIA    AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

cannot   help   being   an   ontologist,    because   his 

theory  of  knowledge  must  treat  about  things  also 

as   being.     He   must   also   be   a  metaphysician, 

'because  he  is  concerned  with  the  whole  range 

of  things  beyond  the  physical;    he  must  be  a 

philosopher  in  being  other  and  more  than  a  man 

of  science,  or  concerned  with  things  in  a  way  in 

which  science  is  not."     Science,  with  its  various 

branches,  directs  us  up  to  a  certain  point,  and 

cannot  go  further;    but  where  science  ends,  there 

is  the  beginning  of  true  philosophy.     The  third 

function  which  true  philosophy  performs  is  that  of 

leading  our  minds  into  the  realm  of  the  Absolute, 

of  the  Unknown,  and  then  it  solves  the  problems 

of  life  and  death.     It  explains  the  origin  of  the 

universe   and   of  individual   existence,  and   the 

purpose  of  evolution.     On  the  plane  of  relativity 

the  perfect  solution  of  these  vital  problems  can 

never  be  found.     Furthermore,  when  this  phase 

of  true  philosophy  directs  our  minds  toward  the 

Infinite,  it  helps  us  in  becoming  free  from  all 

limitations  of  ignorance  and  selfishness.     These 

limitations  are  the  greatest  bondage  that  we  are 

now    suffering    from,   and,   by   performing   this 

40 


THE    PREVAILENG    PHILOSOPHY  OF   TO-DAY. 

function,  true  philosophy  lays  the  foundation  of 
the  highest  form  of  monistic  religion.  No  phi- 
losophy in  the  world  performs  these  three  func- 
tions so  satisfactorily  as  Vedanta.  Hence  we 
may  say  that  Vedanta  is  the  most  complete  of 
all  systems. 

Philosophy  and  religion  must  always  be  in  per- 
fect harmony.  Ernest  Haeckel,  in  his  "Riddle 
of  the  Universe,"  tries  to  give  a  foundation  to 
monistic  religion;  but  his  monism  is  one-sided, 
because  he  says  that  the  ultimate  substance  of 
the  universe  is  unintelligent.  His  insentient 
substance  may  be  compared  with  Kapila's 
Prakriti,  which  is  eternal  and  unintelligent. 
According  to  Vedanta,  however,  the  final  sub- 
stance of  the  universe  is  Brahman,  which  is  Sat 
or  absolute  existence.  Chit  or  absolute  intelli- 
gence, and  Ananda  or  absolute  bliss.  Vedanta 
teaches  that  that  which  is  the  substance  of  our 
souls  must  possess  intelligence,  consciousness, 
and  blissfulness.  Thus  Vedanta  lays  the  true 
foundation  of  a  universal  religion  which  is 
monistic  or  non-dualistic.  The  monistic  religion 
of  Vedanta  does  not  admit  the  S^khyan  theory 

41 


INDIA  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

of  the  plurality  of  Purushas,  or  individual  souls, 

which  are  eternal  and  infinite  by  nature,  but  on 

the  contrary,  by  following  the  strict  rules  of  logic, 

it  establishes  that  the  Infinite  must  be  one  and 

not   many.     From   one   many   have    come   into 

existence,  and   the  individual  souls  are  but  so 

many    images    or    reflections    of    the    Absolute 

Brahman.     It  teaches  that  the  true  nature  of 

the  soul  is  Divine.     From  the  Absolute  Brahman 

the  phenomenal  universe  rises,  and  in  the  end 

returns    into    the    Brahman.     The    religion    of 

Vedanta   admits    the   existence   of  Iswara,    the 

personal  God,  who  is  the  first-born  Lord  of  the 

universe,  who  starts  the  evolution  of  Prakriti,  who 

loves  all  living  creatures  and  can  be  loved  and 

worshipped  in  return.     In  Vedanta  the  Prakriti 

of  the  Sankhya  philosophy  is  called  M4yA,  which 

is  the  divine  energy  of  the  Absolute  Brahman. 

Mayd  does  not  mean  illusion,  as  some  scholars 

think;  but  it  is  that  power  which  produces  time, 

space,   and  causation,   as   also   the  phenomenal 

appearances  which  exist  on  the  relative  plane. 

Thus  we  see  that  the  system  of  Vedanta  is  both 

philosophy  and  religion.     Of  the  tree  of  knowl- 

42 


THE   PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY   OF   TO-DAY. 

edge,  philosophy  is  the  flower  and  rehgion  is 
the  fruit,  so  they  must  go  together.  Rehgion 
is  nothing  but  the  practical  side  of  philsophy, 
and  philosophy  is  the  theoretical  side  of  re- 
ligion. 

In  India  a  true  philosopher  is  not  a  mere  specu- 
lator but  a  spiritual  man.  He  does  not  believe 
in  certain  theories  which  cannot  be  carried  into 
practice  in  every-day  life;  what  he  believes  he 
lives,  and  therefore  practical  philosophy  is  still 
to  be  found  in  India.  For  example,  an  Indian 
philosopher  who  follows  Kanada,  and  believes  in 
the  existence  of  a  personal  God  as  the  essence  of 
his  soul,  does  not  merely  accept  this  theoretically, 
but  he  tries  to  realize  it  in  his  daily  life.  A 
Buddhist,  again,  will  explain  all  the  most  abstruse 
problems,  and  at  the  same  time  you  will  see  that  he 
IS  living  out  his  beliefs.  So  with  a  follower  of 
the  Sankhya  system,  or  of  Vedanta:  they  are 
not  mere  speculative  philosophers,  but  they  live 
spiritual  lives  and  strive  to  attain  God-conscious- 
ness. In  India,  if  any  one  writes  voluminous 
works  and  leads  a  worldly  life,  he  is  not  con- 
sidered a  true  philosopher;    but  in  the  West  a 

43 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

man  can  become  a  philosopher  by  simply  sitting 
in  his  library  and  writing  a  book,  although  his 
every-day  life  may  be  far  from  spiritual. 

A  friend  of  mine,  being  asked  whether  India 
had  produced  a  philosopher  like  Ralph  Waldo 
Emerson,  replied:  "America  has  produced  one 
Emerson,  but  in  India  you  will  find  an  Emerson 
every  five  miles."  This  is  not  a  great  exaggera- 
tion, and  the  reason,  as  I  have  already  said,  is 
that  the  Hindus  not  only  theorize  but  live 
philosophy.  Hindu  minds  are  extremely  logical. 
They  will  not  accept  any  theory  which  does  not 
harmonize  with  logic  and  reason.  Therefore 
you  will  scarcely  find  an  irrational  doctrine 
or  dogma  in  the  religion  of  \'edanta.  Freedom 
of  thouglit,  as  I  have  already  said,  has  always 
prevailed  in  India  since  the  Vedic  period.  For 
this  reason  Christian  missionaries  meet  witli 
the  greatest  opposition  when  they  preach  to 
the  Hindus  tlic  unscientific  and  illogical  doc- 
trines and  dogmas  of  their  faith.  When,  for 
instance,  they  try  to  teach  them  the  creation 
of  the  universe  in  six  days  as  given  in  Genesis, 

the  Hindus  smile  at  the  missionaries  and  reject 

44 


THE    PREVAILING    PHILOSOPHY    OF    TO-DAY. 

their  statements  as  unscientific  and  irrational. 
Similarly  the}^  will  not  listen  to  other  Christian 
dogmas,  like  infant  damnation,  eternal  perdition 
of  the  heathen,  etc. 

The  philosophy  and  religion  of  Vedanta 
embrace  all  the  sciences  and  philosophies  of 
the  world,  accepting  their  latest  conclusions,  and 
classify  them  according  to  their  order  of  merit. 
Consequently  the  universality  of  Vedanta  is 
unique  and  unparalleled.  In  this  system  the  peo- 
ple of  India  find  the  ultimate  truths  of  all  sci- 
ences, of  all  philosophies,  as  well  as  of  all  religions. 
It  is  so  popular  because  it  solves  the  problems 
concerning  the  origin  and  final  aim  of  earthly 
life,  fulfils  the  highest  aspiration  of  human 
souls,  and  inculcates  that  the  true  nature  of 
the  soul  is  immortal  by  its  birthright.  Vedanta 
mahi tains  that,  if  the  soul  were  mortal  by  nature, 
it  could  never  become  immortal,  for  that  which 
could  be  made  immortal  could  be  unmade. 
This  is  an  argument  which  cannot  be  refuted, 
and  it  has  taken  such  hold  of  the  logical  mind 
of  the  Hindus  that,  even  when  they  are  con- 
verted to  other  faiths,  they  cannot  beUeve  that 

46 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

the  soul,  which  is  by  nature  a  child  of  God,  can 
ever  be  made  immortal  by  Christ. 

Vedanta  has  the  largest  following,  and  is  the 
prevailing  philosophy  of  India  to-day.  Since  the 
eighth  century  a.d.,  when,  after  the  decline  of 
Buddhism,  it  was  revived  by  the  earnest  efforts 
of  its  commentator,  Sri  Sankardchirya,  who  is 
now  regarded  as  the  greatest  philosopher  of  the 
world,  the  \^edanta  philosophy  has  taken  firm 
root  in  the  remotest  corner  of  every  Hindu 
community,  from  the  highest  to  the  lowest,  and 
has  overshadowed  all  other  systems  of  philosophic 
thought.  Professor  Max  Miiller,  in  the  preface 
to  his  "Six  Systems  of  Philosophy,"  writes: 
' '  Other  philosophies  do  exist  and  have  some  fol- 
lowing, but  Vedanta  has  the  largest";  and  he 
also  affirms  that  Vedanta  is  both  a  philosophy 
and  a  religion  by  saying:  "For  all  practical 
purposes,  the  Vedantist  would  hold  that  the 
whole  phenomenal  world,  both  in  its  subjective 
and  objective  character,  should  be  accepted  as 
real.  It  is  as  real  as  anything  can  be  to  the 
ordinary  mind;  it  is  not  mere  emptiness,  as  the 
Buddhists    maintain.     And    thus    the    Vedanta 

46 


THE   PREVAILING   PHILOSOPHY   OF   TO-DAY. 

philosophy  leaves  to  every  man  a  wide  sphere 
of  real  usefulness,  and  places  him  under  a  law 
as  strict  and  binding  as  anything  can  be  in  this 
transitory  hfe;  it  leaves  him  a  Deity  to  wor- 
ship as  omnipotent  and  majestic  as  the  deities 
of  any  other  religion.  It  has  room  for  almost 
every  religion;    nay,  it  embraces  them  all."  * 

♦  Three  Lectures  on  Vedanta  Philosophy. 
47 


II. 

THE    RELIGION   OF    INDIA   TO-DAY. 

Few  people  realize  the  vastness  of  India. 
If  we  include  British  Burmah,  it  is  as  large  in 
area  as  the  whole  of  Europe  except  Russia, 
or  nearly  two-thirds  of  the  United  States,  with 
a  population  almost  three  and  a  half  times  as 
great.  It  is  a  country  with  a  vast  conglomera- 
tion of  nations  and  languages,  far  more  diverse 
than  in  America  or  in  any  other  country  of  the 
world.  Among  tliis  huge  mass  of  inhabitants 
we  find  the  followers  of  every  great  religion; 
there  are  Christians,  Mahometans,  Jews,  Parsees 
or  Zoroastrians,  Buddhists,  Jains,  Sikhs,  and 
Hindus.  According  to  the  census  of  1901  the 
adherents  of  the  different  faiths  in  India  num- 
ber as  follows: 

48 


THE    RELIGION   OF  INDIA   TO-DAY. 

Christians 2,923,241 

Mahometans 62,458,077 

Jews 18,228 

Parsees 94,190 

Buddhists  (chiefly  in  Burmah)  ....  9,476,759 

Jains 1,334,148 

Sikhs 2,195,339 

Hindus 207,147,026 

The  Jews  are  scattered  in  large  cities  like 
Bombay,  Poona,  and  Calcutta.  The  Parsees 
are  to  be  found  in  the  Bombay  Presidency;  but 
in  India  proper  there  are  very  few  Buddhists. 
Besides  these,  there  are  about  six  hundred 
thousand  Aboriginal  non-Aryans  who  are  ances- 
tor or  spirit- worshippers.  The  majority  of  the 
population  are  known  as  Hindus  and  their 
religion  is  called  Hinduism.  The  words  "Hindu" 
and  "  Hinduism,"  however,  are  entirely  of  for- 
eign origin.  In  ancient  times,  when  the  Persians 
and  Greeks  invaded  India,  they  came  across  a 
river  in  the  northwest  of  India  which  was  called 
in  Sanskrit  "  Sindhu "  (the  Indus  of  modern 
geography),  but,  in  Zend  and  in  Greek,  "Hindu." 
Consequently,  those   who   inhabited   the   banks 

49 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

of  the  **Sindhu"  or  Indus  were  named  by  the 
Greeks  and  Persians  "  Hindus  "  and  their  land 
"Hindustan."  If  we  remember  this  derivation 
we  shall  be  able  to  understand  why  these  words 
"Hindu"  and  "Hinduism"  do  not  mean  any- 
thing to  the  natives  of  India,  who  call  themselves, 
not  Hindus,  but  Aryas  or  Aryans.  The  inhab- 
itants of  India  to-day  are  the  descendants  of 
the  same  Aryan  family  from  which  the  Anglo- 
Saxons,  Germans,  and  Latin  races  have  descended. 
They  came  originally  from  Central  Asia, — some 
say  from  the  North  Pole  and  others  from  Europe; 
but  we  do  not  know  the  exact  spot  where  the 
ancient  forefathers  of  the  Aryans  lived. 

The  word  "Hindu,"  therefore,  refers  to  the 
descendants  of  the  Indo-Aryans  who  at  present 
inhabit  India  and  call  themselves  Aryas  or 
Aryans;  while  their  religion  is  known  among 
themselves  as  "Arya-Dharma "  (the  religion 
of  the  Aryans),  or  "Sanitana-Dharma,"  which 
means  "that  religion  which  lasts  throughout 
eternity,"  for,  according  to  the  Hindus,  this 
religion  is  eternal.     It  has  always  existed,  and 

will  continue  as  long  as  the  world  will  exist. 

50 


THE   RELIGION   OF    INDIA    TO-DAY. 

Some  people  may  think  that  it  is  a  natural 
religion;  but  if  we  trace  the  origin  of  all  so- 
called  supernatural  religions,  we  shall  find  that 
they  were  in  some  way  connected  with  India, 
the  home  of  all  the  religious  systems  of  the 
world,  and  that,  when  other  countries  and 
other  nations  had  no  religion  at  all,  the  eternal 
religion  of  the  Hindus  not  only  prevailed  but 
was  fully  developed. 

Under  the  name  of  Hinduism  there  still  exists 
in  India  to-day  a  system  of  religion  which  em- 
braces all  the  religious  thought  of  the  world. 
It  stands  like  a  huge  banyan-tree,  spreading 
its  far-reaching  branches  over  hundreds  of  sects, 
creeds,  and  denominations,  and  covering  with  its 
innumerable  leaves  all  forms  of  worship, — the 
dualistic,  qualified  non-dualistic,  and  monistic 
worship  of  the  One  Supreme  God,  the  worship  of 
the  Incarnation  of  God,  and  also  hero-worship, 
saint-worship,  s3nTibol-worship,  ancestor-worship, 
and  the  worship  of  departed  spirits.  It  is  based 
upon  the  grand  idea  of  universal  receptivity. 
It  receives  everything.     It  is  like  an  immense 

hospitable    mansion    which    welcomes    all    wor- 

51 


INDIA   AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

shippers,  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest,  all 
believers  in  the  existence  of  God,  and  which  has 
never  refused  admission  to  any  sincere  applicant 
for  spiritual  freedom.  The  prevailing  religion 
of  India  may  be  compared  to  a  vast  mosaic, 
inlaid  with  every  kind  of  religious  idea  and 
every  form  of  worship  which  the  human  mind  can 
possibly  conceive.  If  any  one  wishes  to  study 
the  history  of  the  gradual  evolution  of  the  worship 
of  the  One  Supreme  Being  step  by  step,  from 
its  lowest  to  its  highest  phase,  let  him  go  to 
India  and  study  the  living  history  of  religions. 
Let  him  simply  watch  the  lives  of  the  followers 
of  existing  sects,  for  Professor  Max  Miiller  says: 
"No  phase  of  religion,  from  the  coarsest  super- 
stition to  the  most  sublime  enlightenment,  is 
unrepresented  in  that  country." 

This  universal  rehgion,  strictly  speaking,  is 
neither  Hinduism  nor  Brahminism,  although  it 
has  been  called  both,  as  well  as  by  still  other 
names.  But  why  should  we  call  it  Brdhminism? 
The  term,  which  is  an  invention  of  the  Christian 
missionaries,    has    no    meaning    to    the    Hindus, 

because    no    Brdlimin    was    its    founder.     This 

52 


THE    RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

eternal  religion,  indeed,  is  nameless  and  it  had 
no  founder.  Zoroastrianism,  Judaism,  Christi- 
anity, Mahometanism,  had  their  founders  and 
were  built  around  the  personality  of  these 
founders;  but  the  rehgion  of  the  Hindus  is  not 
limited  by  any  book,  or  by  the  existence  or  non- 
existence of  any  particular  person.  If  we  study 
the  words  of  the  earliest-known  Rishi,  or  Vedic 
"  Seer  of  Truth,"  even  he  alludes  to  others  who 
had  seen  similar  truths  before  him.  It  is  for 
this  reason  that  the  religion  of  the  Indo-Aryans 
never  had  any  special  creed  or  dogma  or  theology 
as  its  guide.  Everything  that  harmonized  with 
the  eternal  laws  described  by  the  ancient  Seers 
of  Truth  was  recognized  and  accepted  by  them 
as  true. 

From  the  very  beginning  this  religion  has  been 
as  free  as  the  air  which  we  breathe.  As  air 
touches  all  flowers  and  carries  their  fragrance, 
along  with  it  wherever  it  blows,  so  the  SanMana 
religion  takes  in  all  that  is  true  and  beneficial 
to  mankind.  Like  the  sky  overhead,  it  embraces 
the  spiritual  atmosphere  around  aU  nations  and 

all  countries.     It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  this 

A3 


INDIA   AND  HER   PEOPLE. 

eternal  religion  of  the  Hindus  surpasses  Zoro- 
astrianism,  Judaism,  Christianity,  and  Mahome- 
tanism  in  its  antiquity,  grandeur,  sublimity,  and, 
above  all,  in  its  conception  of  God.  The  God 
of  the  Hindus  is  omnipresent,  omnipotent, 
omniscient,  all-merciful,  and  impersonally  per- 
sonal. He  is  not  like  the  extra-cosmic  Creator 
as  described  in  Genesis,  but  is  immanent  and 
resident  in  nature.  He  is  more  merciful,  more 
impartial,  more  just,  more  compassionate,  than 
Jahveh,  the  tribal  god  of  the  sons  of  Israel. 
The  God  of  the  Aryan  religion  is  more  benevolent 
and  more  unlimited  in  power  and  majesty  than 
the  Ahura  Mazda  of  the  Zoroastrians.  You  will 
find  monotheism  at  the  foundation  of  every 
religious  structure,  and  other  nations  do  not 
go  beyond  this;  but  the  Indian  people  are  not 
satisfied  to  stop  with  monotheism;  they  want 
something  higher. 

The  religion  of  the  Indo-Aryans  of  to-day 
can  be  classified  under  three  heads, — dualistic, 
qualified  non-dualistic,  and  monistic.  The  first 
two,  that  is,  the  dualistic  and  qualified  non-dual- 
istic phases,  have  given  foundation  to  the  various 

54 


THE    RELIGION    OF    INDIA    TO-DAY. 

sects  of  worshippers  who  are  known  as  Vaish- 

navas,  Shaivas,  Shaktas,  Ganapatyas,  Sauryas; 

of  these,  the  last  two  sects  have  become  almost 

extinct  at  the  present  time.     The  majority  of 

Hindus,  both  men  and  women,  are  either  Vaish- 

navas,  Shaivas,  or  Shaktas. 

The  Vaishnavas  are  those  who  worship  the 

Supreme  Being,  the  all-knowing,  all-loving,  and 

omnipotent   Lord,  Governor,    and  Protector   of 

the  universe,  under  the  name  of  Vishnu.     Vishnu 

is  the  name  of  the  second  person  of  the  Hindu 

Trinity,  the  literal  meaning  of  the  word  being 

"all-pervading,"  "omnipresent."     According  to 

the   Hindu  belief,  Vishnu,  or  the   Lord  of  the 

universe,  is  both  personal  and  impersonal.     In 

his  impersonal  aspect  he  pervades  the  universe, 

interpenetrates    the    atoms    and  molecules,  and 

fills  the  infinite  space  like  the  glorious  light  of 

the  self-effulgent  sun.      In  his  personal  aspect 

he  dwells  in  the  highest  heaven.     The  personal 

Lord  of  the  universe  also  incarnates  Himself  on 

this  earth  in  every  age  to  establish  the  eternal 

religion    and    to    help    mankind.     "Whenever 

true    religion    declines    and    irreligion    prevails, 

65 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

says  the  Lord,   I   manifest  myself  to  establish 
true  religion  and  to  destroy  evil."  * 

Some  people  think  that  this  idea  of  the  incar- 
nation of  God  was  borrowed  from  the  Christians; 
but  it  can  be  proved,  on  the  contrary,  that  it 
existed  in  India  centuries  before  Christ  was  born. 
In  fact,  India  is  the  home  of  this  belief,  which 
was  afterwards  adopted  by  other  religions. 
The  Hindus  maintain  that  since  the  beginning  of 
the  world  God  has  incarnated  many  times,  and 
will  come  again  and  again.  They  have  recog- 
nized many  incarnations  in  the  past,  and  believe 
that  there  will  be  many  in  the  future.  On  this 
point  they  differ  from  the  Christians,  who  believe 
that  there  was  only  one  incarnation,  and  that 
that  was  the  first  and  the  last.  According  to  the 
Hindu  faith,  God  can  manifest  in  any  place  at 
any  time,  because  His  powers  are  unlimited. 
If  we  limit  Him  by  saying  that  there  has  been 
only  one  incarnation,  then  we  make  Him  finite; 
but  as  He  is  Infinite  in  His  powers,  in  His  glory, 
and  in  His  manifestations,  He  ought  not  to  be 
limited  by  time,  space,  or  nationality.     His  love 

*  Bhagavad  Gita.  Ch.  IV,  v.  7. 
M 


THE    RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

for  all  nations  is  equal,  and  whenever  and  wherever 
His  manifestation  is  necessary,  there  He  naturally 
descends.  These  incarnations  are  called  in  Sans- 
krit Avataras,  which  means  the  descent  of  the 
Supreme  Being  for  the  good  of  humanity. 

Rama,  the  hero  of  the  great  epic  Ramayana, 
for  instance,  is  regarded  as  one  of  the  great  in- 
carnations of  ancient  India.  To-day,  in  various 
parts  of  the  country,  especially  in  the  north- 
western provinces  and  in  central  India,  there  are 
millions  and  millions  of  souls  who  worship 
RSma  as  the  Saviour  of  mankind,  who  look 
upon  him  as  the  ideal  son,  the  ideal  king,  the  ideal 
father,  and  the  ideal  husband;  who  repeat  his 
holy  name  with  the  deepest  feelings  of  love  and 
devotion;  who  chant  his  praises  in  the  morning, 
at  noon,  and  in  the  evening;  who  sing  songs 
describing  the  exploits  of  this  great  Avat5.ra; 
who  every  day  read  a  portion  of  the  RSmdyana 
in  Sanskrit  or  in  Hindustanee,  or  in  any  other 
vernacular;  and  who  in  their  daily  life  follow 
the  teachings  and  the  high  moral  and  ethical 
ideals  exemphfied  in  the  character  of  Sri  Rdma, 

the  embodiment  of  Truth  eternal.     For  the  sake 

57 


INDIA   AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

of  truthfulness,  Rama  abandoned  his  throne, 
went  into  the  forest,  and  lived  there  for  fourteen 
long  years,  practising  austerities  in  order  to  set 
an  example  of  perfect  truthfulness.  His  consort 
Sitd,  the  noblest,  purest,  and  most  perfect  ideal 
of  womanhood  that  India  has  produced,  is  now 
the  exalted  spiritual  ideal  of  every  Hindu  woman, 
old  or  young.  Those  who  have  read  the  Rama- 
yana  will  remember  the  unparalleled  character  of 
Sita,  the  ideal  wife  and  mother.  She  was  the 
most  wonderful  character  that  the  world  has 
ever  seen.  To  show  her  faithfulness  to  her  lord, 
she  sacrificed  everything;  she  was,  indeed,  like 
the  personification  of  loyalty  and  purity.  Hanu- 
man,  again,  who  is  erroneously  called  by  the 
Christian  missionaries  the  monkey  god,  represents 
the  ideal  devotee  and  the  perfect  embodiment 
of  faith  and  devotion;  and  whenever  a  worship- 
per of  Rama  thinks  of  these  qualities,  he  holds 
Hanum^  as  the  ideal  before  him.  Those  who 
worship  Rama  are  known  as  Ramat  Vaishnavas. 
They  regard  Rama  and  Vishnu  as  one. 

Then    there    are    many   millions   of    Vaishna- 
vas  all   over   India   who  worship   Krishna,   the 

58 


THE   RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

Hindu  Christ.  Krishna  is  regarded  as  the 
greatest  of  all  Avataras  or  Divine  Incarnations. 
He  lived  about  1400  B.C.  His  life,  which  is 
described  in  the  Mahabharata,  the  history  of 
ancient  India,  as  also  in  many  Puranas,  resembles 
that  of  Jesus  the  Christ,  not  only  in  His  miracu- 
lous birth,  but  in  all  the  principal  events  of  His 
earthly  career.  He  was,  for  example,  bom  in 
a  cave,  and  at  the  time  of  his  birth  an  Indian 
Herod,  Kamsa  by  name,  ordered  all  infants  to 
be  killed.  Krishna  also  resuscitated  the  dead, 
brought  animals  back  to  life,  and  performed 
many  other  miracles.  Those  who  have  read  the 
Bhagavad  Gita,  or  Song  Celestial,  as  Sir  Edwin 
Arnold  calls  it,  will  remember  how  vast  was  the 
divine  wisdom  of  the  sin-atoning  Krishna,  the 
Redeemer  of  the  world.  He  is  regarded  by  all 
Hindus  as  the  Saviour  of  mankind  in  the  same 
way  as  Christ  is  in  Christendom.  They  worship 
him,  repeat  his  holy  name,  and  chant  his  praises 
at  aU  hours  of  the  day,  as  a  devout  Roman 
Catholic  saint  would  do. 

Both  Krishna  and  R^ma  are  manifestations 

of  the  same  Vishnu,  the  Lord  of  the  universe. 

59 


INDIA  AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

This  is  a  difficult  thing  for  Western  minds  to 
grasp,  and  for  that  reason  they  think  the  Hindus 
polytheists.  But  they  are  not  polytheists.  They 
worship  One  God  under  different  names  and 
forms.  Rama  was  the  incarnation  of  Vishnu, 
and  so  was  Krishna.  In  their  spiritual  essence 
they  are  one  and  the  same,  but  in  their  mani- 
festations they  are  different.  Both  have  their 
statues  in  all  the  big  temples  of  India,  just  as 
we  see  the  images  of  Christ  and  Mary  in  the 
Cathedrals  of  Christendom.  The  Christian  mis- 
sionaries, however,  not  understanding  the  Hindu 
form  of  worship,  have  misrepresented  these 
statues  and  called  them  idols.  Here  let  me 
assure  you  that  there  is  no  such  thing  as  idol- 
worship,  in  your  sense  of  the  term,  in  any  part 
of  India,  not  even  among  the  most  illiterate 
classes.  I  have  seen  more  idolatry  in  Italy 
than  in  India.  The  Italian  peasants  even  beat 
the  Bambino  when  their  prayers  are  not  answered, 
but  in  India  you  will  not  find  such  spiritual  dark- 
ness anywhere.  There  the  people  worship  the 
Ideal,  not  the  idol.     Statues  and  figures  are  kept 

in  the  temples  as  reminders  of  the  deeds  of  the 

60 


THE   RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

great  Saviours.     It   is   the  memory,  the   spirit, 
of  Rdma  and  Krishna,  which  the  Hindus  worship; 
but  if  you  ask  a  Brahmin  priest  whom  he  wor- 
ships, or  where  is  Krishna,  he  will  tell  you  that 
Lord    Krishna    dwells    everywhere;     he    is    the 
Soul  of  our  souls,  the  Heart  of  our  hearts.     He 
is  not  confined  to  any  particular  form  made  of 
wood  or  stone.     Is  this  idolatry?     If  so,  what 
kind  of  idolatry  is  it?     It  is  very  easy  for  any 
one  to  say  that  it  is  the  worship  of  a  false  god, 
or  of  an  idol;  but  if  a  person  will  look  beneath 
the  surface  and   inquire   of   the    Hindus   them- 
selves, he   can  readily    discover    how    mistaken 
such   assertions  are.      If   the  Hindus   are  idol- 
worshippers  because  they  show  respect  to  their 
Spiritual  Masters,  like  Krishna  and  Rdma,  why 
should    not    the    Christians    be    called    idolaters 
when  they  show  respect  to  Christ,  kneeling  down 
before  his  statue  or  picture?     If  the   Hindu   is 
idolatrous  because  he  fixes  his    mind  on    some 
religious   sjmibol,   like   the   cross   or  triangle  or 
circle,  why  should  not  the  same  term  be  applied 
to  the  Christian  when  he  thinks  of  the  crucifix 

and  keeps  it  on  the  altar? 

61 


INDIA   AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

Images  and  symbols  are  also  used  in  Hindu 
temples  as  aids  to  the  practice  of  concentration 
and  meditation.  This  is  a  peculiar  mode  of 
worship  common  among  the  Hindus.  There 
may  be  no  outward  signs  of  worship.  A  man 
will  perhaps  sit  cross-legged  on  the  floor,  close 
his  eyes,  and  remain  as  motionless  as  a  statue: 
his  devotion  will  all  be  internal.  He  will  with- 
draw his  mind  from  the  external  world  and  fix 
it  upon  the  Supreme  Being;  but  the  starting- 
point  of  his  concentration  and  meditation  will 
be  these  s3nTibols  and  figures,  because  the  natu- 
ral tendency  of  the  mind  is  to  go  from  the  con- 
crete to  the  abstract  and  then  to  the  Absolute. 
So  there  may  be  many  symbols  in  the  temples; 
the  cross,  for  instance.  The  cross  was  a  religious 
symbol  in  India  long  before  Christ  was  bom. 
The  swastika  is  the  oldest  of  all  forms  of  the 
cross,  and  that  we  have  in  India  to-day.  Then 
there  is  the  triangle,  which  symbolizes  the 
Hindu  Trinity;  the  circle,  which  represents 
infinity;  and  there  are  many  other  symbols,  all 
of  which  are  considered  extremely  helpful  to 
beginners    in    concentration    and    meditation. 

62 


THE    RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

The  Hindus  regard  Krishna  as  the  ideal  incar- 
nation of  Divine  Love.  His  mission  was  to 
estabhsh  Divine  Love  on  this  earth,  and  show 
that  it  can  be  manifested  through  all  sanctified 
human  relations.  What  Krishna  has  done  in 
India,  and  how  he  has  impressed  the  minds  of 
the  people,  we  cannot  understand  here.  We 
must  go  to  India  to  see  that;  we  must  go  to 
Mathurd,  where  Krishna  was  born,  or  to  Vrin- 
davan,  where  he  played  as  a  shepherd-boy,  to 
find  how  the  Vaishnavas  revere  and  worship 
him.  The  worship  and  devotion  which  we  see 
to-day  in  India  cannot  be  found  in  any  other 
part  of  the  worid.  I  have  travelled  through 
many  countries  in  Europe,  and  almost  all  over 
the  United  States  and  Canada,  but  I  have  not 
seen  the  pathos,  the  spiritual  fire,  that  I  have 
found  among  the  Vaishnavas  in  India.  God 
can  be  worshipped  not  only  as  the  Master,  but 
also  as  a  friend,  as  a  child,  as  a  husband,— that 
is  what  they  teach.  They  bring  Him  closer 
and  closer,  and  make  Him  the  closest  and  near- 
est to  our  being.     Time  will  not  permit  me  to 

go  into  the  details  of  the  method  of  worship 

63 


INDIA    AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

which  these  Vaishnavas  practise,  but  I  can 
at  least  tell  you  that  there  are  thousands  and 
thousands  of  Hindu  women  who  look  upon 
Krishna,  the  Saviour  of  mankind,  as  their  own 
child.  They  do  not  care  for  a  human  child; 
they  want  God  as  their  child,  and  they  con- 
sider themselves  as  the  mother  of  Divinity. 
This  is  a  unique  thing.  The  mother  of  God! 
How  much  purity  is  required  to  make  a  woman 
think  of  herself  as  the  mother  of  Divinity  or  of 
a  Divine  Incarnation!  And  this  is  their  ideal. 
I  am  not  exaggerating;  I  have  seen  with  my 
eyes  such  wonderful  characters,  and  I  have 
seen  them  nowhere  else. 

These  Vaishnavas,  or  worshippers  of  Krishna, 
can  be  subdivided  into  seven  different, denomina- 
tions: The  followers  of  Sankar^charya,  the  great 
preacher  and  commentator  of  monistic  Vedanta; 
the  followers  of  RSjnanuja,  another  great  preacher 
and  commentator,  who  hved  in  the  southern  part 
of  India,  and  whose  followers  arc  known  as 
qualified  non-dualists;  the  followers  of  Madhv^- 
chdrya,    the    preacher    of    the    dualistic    school; 

and    the    followers    of    Chaitanya,    of    Ballav^- 

64 


THE   RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

charya,  of  Ramananda,  and  Nimbacharya.  Each 
of  these  was  an  ideal  prophet,  spiritual  leader,  and 
commentator  of  the  philosophy  of  Vedanta,  as 
also  the  founder  of  a  denomination  which  still 
has  millions  of  followers  all  over  the  country. 
They  differ  only  in  the  minor  peculiarities  of 
their  doctrines,  beliefs,  and  modes  of  worship; 
but  they  all  agree  on  one  point, — that  Krishna 
was  the  greatest  of  all  Divine  Incarnations,  that 
he  was  the  Saviour  of  mankind  and  the  Re- 
deemer of  the  world. 

The  worshippers  of  Krishna  and  of  Vishnu 
or  Rama  are  all  vegetarians;  they  do  not  touch 
meat,  because  non-killing  is  their  ideal.  They 
cannot  kill  any  animal  for  food.  They  never 
drink  any  intoxicating  liquor,  neither  the  men 
nor  the  women.  That  is  a  very  difficult  thing 
to  find  anywhere  else.  They  practise  non- 
resistance  of  evil,  which  was  taught  not  only 
by  Krishna,  but  by  Buddha  and  afterwards 
by  Christ.  Their  religion  makes  them  loving, 
not  only  to  human  beings,  but  to  all  living 
creatures,  and  pure  and  chaste  in  their  morals. 

They  practise  disinterested  love  for  humanity; 

65 


INDIA  AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

they  will  sacrifice  everything  for  the  good  of 
others,  because  their  Ideal,  their  Master,  was 
the  sin-atoning  Krishna,  who  sacrificed  every- 
thing for  the  good  of  the  world.  There  are  no 
caste  distinctions  among  the  Vaishnavas.  Ma- 
hometans and  Pariahs  have  often  become  fol- 
lowers of  this  faith.  Krishna  has  indeed  given 
to  earnest  and  sincere  souls  among  the  Hindus 
what  Jesus  the  Christ  has  given  to  Christendom, 
and  there  is  a  great  similarity  in  the  belief  and 
mode  of  worship  of  the  Vaishnavas  and  those 
of  the  most  devout  followers  of  Jesus. 

As  the  Vaishnavas  regard  Krishna  and  Rdma 
as  their  Ideals,  so  there  are  Hindus  who  look 
upon  other  manifestations  as  their  Ideal.  The 
Shaivas,  for  example,  worship  Shiva,  the  third 
person  of  the  Hindu  Trinity.  Shiva  represents 
the  ideal  of  renunciation  and  absolute  freedom 
from  worldliness.  He  is  revered  by  tlie  Hindus 
as  the  embodiment  of  contemplativeness  and 
Yoga;  he  is  therefore  worshipped  by  the  Yogis, 
saints,  and  sages  of  all  sects.  They  repeat  the 
name  of  Shiva  with  tears  of  love  and  devotion 

streaming  from  their  eyes;  they  forget  everything 

66 


THE   RELIGION    OF    INDIA    TO-DAY. 

of  the  world  when  they  utter  his  sacred  name. 
Shiva  and  Vishnu,  again,  are  one  and  the  same 
in  their  spiritual  essence;  they  are  two  mani- 
festations of  the  One  Infinite  Being  who  is 
called  Brahma  a  in  the  Vedas.  A  Vaishnava 
can  worship  Shiva  in  the  same  spirit  as  he  worships 
his  own  Ideal  Vishnu,  and  a  Shaiva  can  worship 
Vishnu  in  the  same  spirit  as  he  worships  his  own 
Ideal,  Shiva;  because  they  know  that  He  who 
is  Vishnu  is  Shiva  and  He  who  is  Shiva  is  Vishnu, 
Shiva  represents,  as  I  have  already  said,  con- 
templativeness.  Yoga,  renunciation  and  absolute 
freedom  from  worldliness.  As  Vishnu  is  adorned 
by  the  Vaishnavas  with  all  blessed  qualities,  with 
aU  that  is  beautiful,  all  that  stands  for  wealth, 
prosperity,  and  success  in  life;  Shiva,  on  the 
contrary,  is  adorned  with  all  that  is  ugly,  horrible, 
and  awe-inspiring.  His  beatific  form  is  encircled 
by  venomous  snakes  of  evil,  misfortune,  and 
worldliness;  but  they  cannot  injure  Him.  Shiva 
dwells  in  the  Shmashdna,  where  horrors  of  death 
and  destruction  surround  Him,  but  they  cannot 
frighten  Him  or  disturb  His  blissful  Samddhi. 

He  is  the  ever-undaunted  conqueror  of  aU  dread, 

67 


INDIA   A^nD   HER   PEOPLE. 

danger,  passion,  and  distress.  He  is  attended 
by  ghosts  and  wicked  spirits,  but  they  cannot 
hurt  Him.  Shiva  renounces  the  world  for  the 
good  of  humanity.  Voluntarily  He  takes  upon 
Himself  the  burdens,  anxieties,  sufferings,  and 
pains  of  all  humanity,  and  swallows  the  deadliest 
poison  to  bestow  immortality  upon  His  earnest 
followers  and  true  devotees.  His  consort,  the 
Divine  Mother  of  the  universe,  is  His  only  com- 
panion in  austerities  and  penances.  He  lives 
where  nobody  cares  to  go,  and  He  accepts  the 
tiger-skin  and  the  ashes  from  crematories  as 
His  ornaments.  He  is  the  ideal  of  the  Yogis. 
If  any  one  wishes  to  see  and  understand  what 
renunciation  means,  let  him  go  to  India  and 
study  the  worship  of  Shiva.  He  has  many 
forms,  many  incarnations,  and  there  are  many 
symbols  connected  with  His  life.  The  Shaivas 
worship  the  snow-white  form  of  Shiva,  which 
symbolizes  purity  and  freedom  from  all  taint 
or  worldhncss,  the  form  of  Him  who  is  the 
Master  of  the  universe.  Shiva  can  be  worshipped 
under  all  circumstances.  If  a  follower  of  Shiva 
cannot  find  a  temple,  he  may  sit  under  a  tree; 

08 


THE   RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

he  does  not  need  any  form,  statue,  or  symbol; 

he  simply  closes  his  eyes  and  meditates  upon 

Shiva  as  the  Lord  of  the  universe,  beyond  good 

and  evil,  beyond  all  relativity,  the  embodiment 

of  the  Infinite  and  Absolute  Being. 

The  Vaishnavas  and  Shaivas,  as  we  have  just 

seen,  regard  the  Lord  of  the  universe  as  masculine 

and  give  Him  masculine  attributes;    but  there 

are  Hindus  who  give  to  God  feminine  attributes 

and  call  Him  the  Mother  of  the  universe.     India 

is  in  fact  the  only  place  in  the  world  where  God 

is  worshipped    as    the    Mother,    and   where   all 

women    are    considered    as    representatives    of 

ideal   Divine   Motherhood.     Some   people   think 

that  the  Hindus  deny  salvation  to  women,  but 

no    Hindu    ever    imagined    anything   so  crude; 

on  the  contrary,  womanhood  is  attributed  by 

him  to  the  Lord  of  the  universe.     He  knows 

that  the  soul  is  sexless,  and  that  it  manifests  on 

the  physical  plane  as  a  man  or  a  woman  only  to 

fulfil  a  certain  purpose  in  life.     The  Bhagavad 

Gita  says:    "All  men  and  women,  whether  they 

believe  in  God  or  not,  are  bound  sooner  or  later 

to  reach  perfection." 

69 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

Those  who  thus  worship  God  as  the  Mother  are 
known  as  Shaktas,  the  worshippers  of  Shakti, 
Divine  Energy,  the  Mother  of  all  phenomena. 
These  Shaktas  believe  that  the  Mother  of  the 
universe  manifests  Her  powers  from  time  to 
time  in  human  form  and  incarnates  as  a  woman. 
There  have  been  various  feminine  incarnations 
among  the  Hindus.  These  Divine  incarnations 
of  Shakti,  or  Divine  Energy,  are  in  different 
forms,  such  as  Kali,  Durga,  Tar^,  etc.  Foreigners 
cannot  understand  the  meaning  of  these  sym- 
bolic figures,  used  as  aids  to  concentration  and 
meditation  at  the  time  of  worship,  and  they 
think,  "How  hideous  these  forms  are!"  Of 
course  some  of  them  are  hideous  to  Western 
eyes,  but  to  the  Hindus  they  are  spiritual  sym- 
bols; for  the  people  of  India  are  not  merely 
optimistic,  they  recognize  both  sides.  They  are 
brave.  They  do  not  deny  the  evil  side  of  the 
world;  they  take  that  also,  and  adorn  the  Mother 
on  the  one  hand  with  evil,  murder,  plague,  and 
the  most  horrible  things,  while,  on  the  other 
hand,   they  represent    Her   as   overflowing  with 

blessings   and   all   that    is  good   and   beautiful. 

70 


THE   RELIGION    OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

Those  who  have  only  optimistic  ideas  shut  their 
eyes  to  evils  and  misfortunes  and  curse  either 
God  or  Satan  when  these  come  upon  them; 
but  among  the  worshippers  of  the  Divine  Mother 
you  will  find  both  men  and  women,  who  in  time 
of  distress  face  danger  bravely,  and  pray  to  Her 
with  unflinching  faith  and  whole-hearted  love, 
recognizing  Her  grandeur  and  Divine  power 
even  behind  misfortune  and  calamity. 

The  whole  truth  of  the  Sankhya  philosophy  * 
is  s3mibolized  in  the  Shakti-worship,  or  the 
worship  of  Divine  Mother.  You  will  remember 
that  the  Sankhya  believes  in  the  evolution  of 
the  world  and  of  the  whole  universe  out  of  one 
Eternal  Energy,  while  the  individual  soul  is 
known  as  Purusha,  the  Infinite  Spirit.  So  Shiva 
represents  Purusha,  the  formless  Infinite  Spirit, 
and  His  consort  or  Shakti  is  that  Eternal  Energy, 
which  is  called  in  Sanskrit  Prakriti.  The  union 
of  the  male  and  female  principles  of  Divinity  is 
the  beginning  of  cosmic  evolution.  Here  you 
will  notice  how  the  ultimate  conclusions  of 
science  have  been  sjnmbolized  by  the  Hindus  and 

*  Described  in  previous  lecture. 
71 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

made    into    objects    of   devotion    and    worship. 

Ask  how  the  evolution  of  the  world  began  and 

they  will  show  you  the  symbol  of  the  Purusha 

and   Prakriti.     The   religion   of  the   Hindus,   in 

fact,  embraces   science,    logic,  and  philsosophy. 

They  think  that  that  which  is  unscientific,  illogical, 

and  unphilosophical  cannot  be  called  religious, 

so  they  take  the  scientific  truths,  make  symbols 

out  of  them,  and,  relating  them  to  the  Eternal 

Being,  they  use  them  as  the  most  helpful  objects 

for  devotion  and  worship.     The  Hindu  mind  is 

very   inventive   along   spiritual   lines.     It   gives 

its   inventive   genius   full   play   in   the   spiritual 

field.     There  is  no  other  religion  in  the  world 

which  is  so  rich  in  mythology,  symbology,  rituals, 

and  ceremonials,  and  which  possesses  so  many 

phases    of   the    Divine    Ideal,   as   the  Sandtana 

Dharma,  or  the  Eternal  Religion  of  the  Hindus. 

Its  followers  are  freely  allowed  to  choose  their 

ideals    in    harmony    with    their    thoughts    and 

spiritual    tendencies.     They    believe    that    one 

particular  set  of  doctrines  and  dogmas  cannot 

satisfy  the  aspirations  of  all  human  souls.     As 

one  coat  cannot  fit  all  bodies,  so  one  particular 

72 


THE    RELIGION    OF    INDIA    TO- DAY. 

ideal  cannot  fit  all  minds,  cannot  suit  all  the 
spiritual  tendencies  of  all  nations  in  all  countries. 
Do  we  not  see  how  Christianity  has  failed  in 
that  respect  when  it  has  tried  to  make  the  whole 
world  adopt  one  ideal?  Do  we  not  see  to-day 
how,  among  the  followers  of  Christianity,  there 
is  a  constant  fight  and  struggle  for  lack  of  a 
better  understanding  of  their  religious  ideal? 
Human  minds  need  variety;  and  the  paths  which 
lead  to  the  supreme  goal  should  vary  according 
to  the  tendency,  capacity,  and  spiritual  develop- 
ment of  the  individual.  Therefore  the  eternal 
religion  of  the  Hindus  prescribes  no  set  path, 
but  offers  various  ones  to  suit  different  minds, 
— the  path  of  right  knowledge  and  right  dis- 
crimination (Jnana  Yoga);  of  concentration  and 
meditation  (Raja  Yoga);  of  work  for  work's 
sake  (Karma  Yoga);  and  of  devotion  and 
worship  (Bhakti  Yoga).  Each  one  of  these, 
again,  has  various  branches.  Thus  we  see  that 
the  Hindus  alone  have  succeeded  in  giving  to 
the  world  a  religion  which  fits  all  minds  and  all 
tendencies  under  all  conditions, — a  religion  which 

preaches  the  worship  of  one  God,  the  Infinite 

73 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

Being,  under  a  variety  of  names  and  ideals. 
Truth  is  one,  but  its  manifestations  are  many. 
This  noble  and  sublime  conception  has  made 
the  Hindus  extremely  tolerant  towards  other 
faiths  and  other  forms  of  worship  outside  their 
own;  for  they  consider  that  all  religions,  sects, 
and  creeds  are  like  so  many  paths  which  lead  to 
the  same  goal. 

Those  who  do  not  understand  the  Hindu 
mode  of  thought  have  called  it  Pantheism; 
but  it  is  the  worship  of  One  Universal  Spirit, 
which  is  infinite,  omnipotent,  all-merciful,  im- 
personal and  yet  personal.  If  you  call  it  Pan- 
theism, then  you  use  the  term  in  the  wrong 
sense.  Pantheism  never  means  that.  Wlien 
I  think  that  this  table  is  God,  or,  if  I  consider 
that  God  has  become  this  chair,  then  it  will  be 
Pantheism.  But  if  I  beheve  in  One  God,  who 
pervades  and  interpenetrates  the  atoms  and 
molecules  of  the  chair  and  the  table,  or  any 
other  object  of  the  world,  then  tliat  will  be 
the  worship  of  the  One  Supreme  Being,  who  is 
infinite  and  all-pervading. 

True  religion,  according  to  the  Hindus,  does 

74 


THE   RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

not  consist  in  belief  in  a  certain  creed  or  set 
of  dogmas,  but  in  the  attainment  of  God-con- 
sciousness through  spiritual  unfoldment.  It  is 
being  and  becoming  God.  It  is  the  subjuga- 
tion of  selfish  love  and  desire  for  self-aggrandize- 
ment, and  the  expression  of  Divine  love,  truth- 
fulness, and  kindness  to  all.  The  object  of  such 
a  religion  is  the  freedom  of  the  soul  from  the 
bondage  of  the  world.  A  Hindu  is  not  limited 
by  sectarian  doctrines  and  dogmas;  he  can  go 
anywhere,  worship  any  ideal  that  suits  him  and 
make  that  his  chosen  Ideal.  As  long  as  he 
believes  in  One  God,  there  is  no  danger,  he  will 
have  salvation;  and  this  salvation  can  be 
attained  in  this  life. 

Outside  of  the  Vaishnavas,  Shaivas,  and 
Sh&ktas,  we  find  Hindus  who  follow  other 
phases  of  religion.  In  the  Punjab,  the  north- 
western province  of  India,  for  instance,  there 
is  a  large  population  which  is  known  as  Sikhs. 
The  word  "Sikh"  is  derived  from  the  Sanskrit 
"Shishya,"  which  means  "a  disciple";  and  the 
Sikhs  are  so  called  because  they  are  disciples 
of  their  master.  Guru  Nanaka,  who  was  a  con- 

75 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE.  ; 

temporary    of    Luther.      Guru    Nanaka   was    a 

great  soul.     He  is  regarded  to-day  by  his  disciples 

and  followers  as  the  manifestation  of  Divinity, 

and  he  left  sayings  and  teachings.     These  are 

written  out  in  a  book,  and  this  book  the  Sikhs 

hold  in  the  same  light  as  the  Christians  their 

Bible,   the   Mahometans   their   Koran,    and   the 

orthodox   Hindus   their  Vedas.     It   is   to   them 

the  revealed  word  of  God.     They  put  it  upon 

an  altar,  burn  incense  before  it,  and  worship  it 

as   the  word   of   God.     They  cannot   bear   any 

other  form  or  symbol  or  image,  or  the  statue  of 

any   incarnation   or   manifestation   of   Divinity. 

They  are  as  fanatical  as  the  Protestant  Christians 

in    their    attitude    towards    forms    and    images. 

They  observe  no  caste  prejudice;   they  are  very 

broad   and  liberal-minded,  and  will  accept   the 

followers  of  any  faith  in  their  religion.     At  one 

time  they  converted  hundreds  of  Mahometans 

and  made  them  Sikhs.     Their  book  is  called  the 

"Grantha-Sahib,"  or   the  Great   Scripture,  and 

contains  the  most  sublime  moral  and  spiritual 

ideals,  which  harmonize  with   the  teachings  of 

the  Vedas.     They  believe  in  One  Supreme  God 

76 


THE   RELIGION    OF    INDIA    TO-DAY. 

who  is  formless.  As  the  Mahometans  beheve 
in  Allah,  the  One  Formless  Being,  who  can 
take  no  form,  so  these  Sikhs  believe  in  the 
same  way.  Perhaps  Sikhism  arose  in  India 
through  the  influence  of  Mahometanism.  It  is 
one  of  the  recent  sects. 

Besides  these  orthodox  Hindus,  there  are  Jains 
and  Buddhists.  The  Jains  have  their  own 
Scriptures  and  their  own  prophets,  Parswa  Nath, 
Adinath,  Mah^vira  Nath,  and  many  others,  who 
are  called  Tirthankaras  (perfected  souls).  These 
are  great  and  immortal  spiritual  leaders  who 
came  down  to  teach  mankind;  any  one  who  fol- 
lows their  teachings  will  reach  absolute  freedom 
from  this  world  of  imperfection.  Jainism  arose 
in  India  about  the  same  time  as  Buddhism. 
Buddha  Uved  about  557  B.C.  He  was  the  founder 
of  the  great  religion  which  has  civilized  the 
larger  portion  of  Asia,  which  predominates  in 
China  and  Japan,  which  has  made  the  Japanese 
a  great  nation,  and  which  prevails  to-day  in 
Tibet,  Siam,  Burmah,  Ceylon,  Sumatra,  Java, 
and    many    other    Asiatic    countries.     But    the 

orthodox  Hindus  regard  the  Jains  as  agnostics 

77 


INDIA    AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

and  the  Buddhists  as  atheists;  because  the  Jains 
neither  accept  nor  deny  soul  or  God;  while  the 
modern  Buddhists  in  India  do  not  believe  in  the 
existence  of  One  Supreme  Being,  or  in  the  ex- 
istence of  the  individual  soul  as  an  eternal  entity, 
neither  do  they  honor  the  revealed  word  of  the 
Vedas.  For  this  reason  they  are  classed  by  the 
orthodox  Hindus  as  atheists,  although  Buddha 
himself  is  recognized  as  one  of  the  incarnations 
of  Vishnu.  Every  Hindu  believes  that  Buddha 
came  to  help  mankind,  and  ranks  him  with  Rdma, 
Krishna,  and  other  Avataras. 

There  are  still  other  heterodox  Hindus  who  are 
known  as  Brahmos  and  Arya-Somajis,  and  who 
may  be  compared  to  the  Unitarians  in  this 
country.  They  reject  all  symbols  and  images, 
but  worship  One  God  who  is  personal  and  with- 
out form. 

Thus  I  have  given  you  a  brief  outline  of  the 
existing  phases  of  the  dualistic  and  qualified 
non-dualistic  branches  of  the  one  Religion.  But 
there  is  still  another  which  is  the  monistic  phase 
of    the    same    religion.     It    is    based   upon    the 

fundamental   principle  of  unity  in   variety.     It 

78 


THE    RELIGION    OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

teaches  that  there  is  one  existence,  one  reality, 
one  truth,  one  substance,  in  the  whole  universe.- 
All  the  distinctions  and  differentiations  which 
we  perceive  with  our  senses  are  phenomenal, 
therefore  transitory  and  unreal.  This  One  Sub- 
stance is  called  by  various  names.  In  the  Vedas 
we  find  the  first  mention  of  this  universal  and 
eternal  law  of  unity  in  variety.  In  the  Rig 
Veda,  which  is  the  oldest  Scripture  of  the  world, 
we  read:  "That  which  exists  is  One;  men  call 
it  by  various  names."  Men  worship  it  in 
different  forms,  under  different  names.  The 
same  Substance,  the  Absolute  Eternal  Being, 
manifests  itself  as  Brahma  the  Creator,  Vishnu 
the  Preserver,  Rudra  the  I^estroyer,  and  Shakti 
the  Divine  Mother.  The  same  Eternal  Being  is 
worshipped  as  Allah  by  the  Mahometans,  Father 
in  Heaven  and  Christ  by  the  Christians,  Buddha 
by  the  Buddhists,  Jina  by  the  Jains,  Ahura 
Mazda  by  the  Zoroastrians,  Ti-Tien  by  the 
Chinese,  and  Shiva,  Divine  Mother,  or  Brahman, 
by  the  Hindus.  The  substance  is  one,  although 
the   names   may   vary.     As   the   one   substance 

water  is  called  in  different  languages  by  different 

79 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

names,  such  as  aqua,  wasser,  eau,  agua,  p^i, 
v^ri,  jalam,  etc.,  so  the  One  Infinite  Absolute 
Being  is  worshipped  under  different  names  in 
different  countries.  This  phase  of  rehgion  uni- 
fies all  sects  and  creeds;  and,  putting  each  in  the 
place  where  it  belongs,  it  builds  up  the  universal 
religion,  which  is  not  confined  by  any  particular 
book  or  Scripture,  but  embraces  all  the  Scrip- 
tures of  the  world.  Its  principal  teaching  is 
that  the  individual  souls  are  not  born  in  sin 
and  iniquity,  nor  have  they  inherited  as  a  birth- 
right the  sins  of  some  fallen  man  who  was  tempted 
by  an  evil  spirit  called  Satan.  On  the  contrary, 
it  tells  us  that  all  men  and  women,  irrespective 
of  their  color,  creed,  or  religious  beliefs,  are  chil- 
dren of  Immortal  Bliss,  sons  of  immortality; 
that  each  individual  soul  is  immortal  by  its 
birthright,  will  attain  to  immortality,  and  con- 
tinue to  remain  immortal  forever.  For  if  the 
soul  were  not  immortal  by  nature,  it  could  not 
be  made  so  by  any  being,  however  powerful. 
Each  soul  is  a  storehouse  of  infinite  potentialities 
and  possesses  infinite  possibilities.     It  was  not 

created  out  of  nothing,  nor  by  the  will  of  some 

80 


THE    RELIGION   OF    INDIA    TO-DAY. 

creator;  but  it  is  eternal,  beginningless  and 
endless.  That  is  the  teaching;  and  it  declares 
that  we  are  not  helpless  victims  of  our  parents' 
sins,  but  that  o'.ir  present  condition  is  the  resultant 
of  our  past  deeds,  and  that  our  future  state  will 
be  the  result  of  our  present  actions.  Parents 
do  not  create  the  souls  of  their  children;  they 
are  but  the  channels,  the  instruments  through 
which  the  individual  souls  incarnate  or  manifest 
themselves  on  the  physical  plane.  This  is 
popularly  known  as  the  doctrine  of  Reincarna- 
tion, which  means  the  remanifestation  on  this 
earth  of  the  individual  soul,  or  the  germ  of  life, 
according  to  its  desires  and  tendencies,  which 
will  determine  the  conditions  of  its  existence. 
The  Hindus  accept  the  law  of  Karma  and  do 
rot  believe  that  God  creates  one  man  to  enjoy 
and  another  to  suffer,  nor  do  they  maintain 
that  He  punishes  the  wicked  and  rewards  the 
virtuous.  Punishment  and  reward  are  but  the 
reactions  of  our  ov/n  actions.  Each  individual 
soul  reaps  the  fruits  of  its  own  acts,  either  here 
or  in  some  other  existence. 

This    universal    rehgion    may    be    called    the 

81 


INDIA    AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

*'  Science  of  the  Soul."  As  modern  science  does 
not  deal  with  dogmas  and  does  not  insist  upon 
belief  in  the  authority  of  any  person  or  book, 
but  depends  entirely  upon  correct  observation 
and  experience  of  the  facts  of  nature  to  discover 
the  laws  which  govern  the  phenomena  of  the 
universe,  so  the  monistic  religion  does  not  deal 
with  dogmas  and  creeds,  but  exolains  through 
logic  and  reason  the  spiritual  nature  of  man 
or  the  true  nature  of  the  soul.  It  describes  the 
origin,  growth,  and  process  of  its  gradual  evolution 
from  the  minutest  germ  of  life  up  to  the  highest 
spiritual  man,  as  Christ  or  Buddha  or  Rdma- 
krishna;  for  it  claims  that  all  souls  will  become 
perfect  in  the  course  of  evolution.  Each  indi- 
vidual soul,  however  imperfect  it  may  be  at 
present,  is  bound  in  the  end  to  attain  perfection 
and  become  divine.  It  teaches  that  the  human 
soul  in  the  progress  of  spiritual  evolution  passes 
step  by  step  from  duahsm  or  monotheism  to 
qualified  non-dualism,  and  ultimately  reaches 
the  spiritual  height  of  absolute  non-dualism  or 
monism.  So  long  as  a  soul  is  on  the  plane  of 
duality,  or  of  monotheism,  it  believes  in  a  God 

82 


THE    RELIGION    OF    INDIA    TO-DAY. 

who  dwells  outside  of  nature,  who  is  extra- 
cosmic,  who,  as  the  Creator  of  the  universe, 
creates  something  out  of  nothing,  and  who  is 
far,  far  away  from  us.  We  cannot  reach  Him — 
He  is  too  high,  too  great,  too  distant.  He  is 
the  Master  and  we  are  His  servants;  we  must 
worship  Him  in  that  relation.  But  when  we 
approach  nearer  to  the  Infinite  Being,  we  gradu- 
ally begin  to  see  that  He  is  not  so  far  from  us, 
that  He  is  immanent  and  resident  in  nature. 
He  is  near  us;  why  should  we  consider  Him  as 
beyond,  far  out  of  our  reach?  Then  we  come 
to  that  phase  which  is  called  qualified  non- 
dualistic.  In  this  we  realize  that  God  is  one 
stupendous  whole  and  we  are  but  parts;  each 
individual  soul  is  a  part  of  the  Infinite  Being. 
But  when  the  soul  rises  still  higher,  it  transcends 
all  relativity  and  plunges  into  the  realm  of  the 
Absolute.  There,  forgetting  all  names  and  forms, 
it  reaches  absolute  oneness  with  Divinity,  and 
then  it  declares:  "I  and  my  Father  are  one." 
In  that  state  the  soul  becomes  perfected;  all 
the  divine  qualities  and  divine  powers  begin  to 

flow    through    it,    and    it    is    transfigured    into 

83 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

Divine  Glory.  Then  it  becomes  Chiist-like; 
it  reaches  that  state  which  is  represented  by 
the  word  "Christ." 

The  word  "Christ",  according  to  the  universal 
religion,  means  a  state  of  spiritual  perfection, 
of  spiritual  realization  or  attainment  of  oneness 
with  the  Supreme  Being.  Whosoever  reaches 
that  state  becomes  Christ.  And  this  universal 
rehgion  teaches  that  each  individual  soul  is 
a  potential  Christ,  is  potentially  divine,  and  that 
potentiality  will  become  actual  when  tlie  soul 
awakens  to  the  consciousness  of  its  divine  glory. 
When,  transcending  all  bondage,  all  laws  of 
the  relative,  phenomenal  world,  it  comes  face 
to  face  with  the  Absolute,  it  reaches  the  height 
of  monistic  religion,  then  it  will  be  Christ,  then 
it  will  be  Buddha,  "the  Enlightened  One" — or 
he  who  has  attained  to  spiritual  enlightenment. 
According  to  this  religion,  when  Jesus  attained 
to  that  state.  He  became  Christ;  when  Buddha 
attained  to  that  state.  He  was  held  by  the 
world  as  the  Saviour  of  mankind,  as  the  Re- 
deemer.    This    universal    religion    brings    great 

comfort  and  consolation  to  us,  because  it  assures 

84 


THE   RELIGION   OF   INDIA   TO-DAY. 

US  that  we  are  not  going  to  eternal  perdition; 
for  it  does  not  believe  in  hell-fire  or  eternal 
damnation.  It  teaches  that  men  commit  mis- 
takes, and  those  mistakes  will  bring  their  results 
through  the  law  of  cause  and  sequence,  of  action 
and  reaction,  but  they  will  not  last  throughout 
eternity.  Death,  therefore,  cannot  frighten  the 
followers  of  this  religion. 

Although  this  universal  religion  is  founded 
upon  the  teachings  of  the  Vedas  and  is  as  old  as 
the  Vedas,  yet  it  has  been  forgotten  again  and 
again,  and  again  and  again  it  has  been  revived 
and  preached  by  the  great  Saviours  and  spiritual 
leaders  who  have  flourished  in  India  from  time 
to  time.  Krishna  preached  it  1400  years  before 
Christ;  after  the  decline  of  Buddhism  it  was 
preached  again  by  Sankar&charya  in  the  eighth 
century  after  Christ;  and  lastly  it  was  preached 
by  Bhagavin  Sri  RSjnakrishna,  who  lived  in  the 
latter  part  of  the  nineteenth  century  and  who 
is  regarded  by  thousands  and  thousands  of 
educated  Hindus  as  the  latest  Incarnation  of 
Divinit\^  He  is  recognized  as  the  prime-mover 
in  the  great  religious  upheaval  which  has  begun 

85 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

in  India.  The  tidal  wave  of  this  universal 
religion,  rising  from  Ramakrishna  as  its  centre, 
has  inundated  the  whole  spiritual  field  of  India 
and  is  rapidly  spreading  all  over  the  world, 
creating  a  revolution  in  the  world's  religious 
thought,  which  will  surely  produce  wonderful 
results  in  time  to  come. 


in. 

THE  SOCIAL   STATUS  OF  THE   INDIAN 
PEOPLE:   THEIR   SYSTEM  OF  CASTE. 

In  the  last  lecture  we  saw  how  the  Indo- 
Aryans  hold  the  loftiest  ideal  of  absolute  freedom 
in  their  religious  belief.  From  time  immemorial 
they  have  shown  perfect  toleration  toward  the 
followers  of  every  faith,  and  no  religious  perse- 
cution has  been  recorded  in  the  whole  history 
of  India.  Even  atheists  and  agnostics  have 
been  allowed  to  live  unmolested.  Although  the 
Mahometans  and  the  Christians  hate  the  Hindus, 
still  the  Hindus  do  not  persecute  them,  but  live 
in  absolute  peace  and  harmony  with  them, 
India  is  indeed  the  home  of  universal  tolerance 
and  rebgious  freedom.     In  their  social  life,  on 

the   contrary,   the   Hindus   are  more   restricted 

87 


INDIA    AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

than  any  other  nation  of  the  world.  Their  so- 
ciety is  different  from  that  of  Europe  or  America; 
its  laws  are  more  rigid  and  binding.  They  will 
not  associate  or  intermarry  with  the  Mahometans 
or  Christians,  not  however  because  of  their 
religious  beliefs,  but  on  account  of  their  social 
ideals. 

The  Hindu  people  are  extremely  conservative 
in  their  manners  and  customs,  perhaps  more  so 
than  the  Chinese  or  Japanese;  and  this  con- 
servatism has  been  the  outcome  of  long-standing 
foreign  rule  and  of  continuous  inroads  and  in- 
vasions by  foreign  nations.  We  ought  not  to 
forget  that  India  was  first  invaded  by  the 
Greeks,  then  by  the  Scythians,  and  afterward 
by  Mongohans,  Tartars,  Mahometans,  and  lastly 
by  the  Portuguese,  the  Dutch,  and  other  Chris- 
tians, These  powerful  nations  fell  upon  India 
like  avalanches,  devastating  the  land  of  its 
wealth  and  prosperity  and  destroying  the  glori- 
ous monuments  of  the  Indo-Aryans.  They 
came  not  to  help  the  Hindus,  but  to  plunder 
their  country  and   rob   them   of  their  valuable 

possessions.     What  nation  could  withstand  such 

88 


THE   SOCIAL   STATUS   OF   THE   INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

successive  invasions  and  survive  such  repeated 
disasters  without  possessing  a  tremendous  power 
of  conservatism?  The  Egyptians,  Persians,  and 
other  nations  which  were  unable  to  conserve 
themselves  in  time  of  need  have  been  swept  out 
of  existence.  This  power  of  conservatism  which 
has  been  so  marvellously  displayed  by  the  Hindu 
people  is  indeed  a  great  lesson  to  the  civihzed 
world.  It  has  kept  the  nation  alive,  and  has 
protected  the  Aryan  blood  and  Aryan  literature 
by  creating  impregnable  social  barriers  which 
the  destructive  forces  of  successive  invaders 
have  never  been  able  to  break  through. 

No  foreign  power  can  demolish  the  social 
structure  of  the  Hindus.  It  has  stood  for  ages 
fim-i  like  the  gigantic  peaks  of  the  Himalayas, 
defying  the  strength  of  all  hostile  forces,  because 
its  foundation  was  laid — not  upon  the  quick- 
sand of  commercialism,  not  upon  the  quagmire 
of  greed  for  territorial  possessions,  but  upon 
the  solid  rock  of  the  moral  and  spiritual  laws 
which  eternally  govern  earthly  existence.  The 
ancient  founders  of  Hindu  society  were  not  like 

the  robber-barons  or  ambitious  political  leaders 

89 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

of  mediaeval  Europe;  but  they  were  sages  and 
Seers  of  Truth,  who  sacrificed  their  personal 
interest,  their  ambition  and  desire  for  power  and 
position  upon  the  altar  of  disinterested  love  for 
humanity. 

The  Hindus  of  modern  times  trace  their  descent 
from  these  great  sages,  saints,  and  Rishis  of  pre- 
historic ages,  and  consider  themselves  blessed  on 
account  of  such  exalted  lineage.  They  glory  in  the 
names  of  their  forefathers,  and  feel  an  uncon- 
querable pride  because  of  the  purity,  unselfish- 
ness, spirituality,  and  God-consciousness  of  their 
holy  ancestors.  This  noble  pride  has  prevented 
the  members  of  different  communities  from 
holding  free  intercourse  and  from  intermarrj^ng 
with  foreigners  and  invading  nations,  and  has 
thus  kept  the  Aryan  blood  pure  and  unadulterated. 
If  they  had  not  possessed  that  tremendous 
national  pride  and  had  mixed  freely  with  all 
people  by  whom  they  were  overrun,  we  should 
not  find  in  India  to-day  the  full-blooded  descend- 
ants of  the  pure  Aryan   family. 

Hindu  society  is  divided  into  hundreds  of 
communities;  each  community  consists  of  several 

90 


THE   SOCIAL   STATUS   OF   TEEE   ESTDIAN   PEOPLE. 

clans  and  each  clan  has  its  own  peculiar  customs 

and  rules.     These  clans,  again,  are  made  up  of 

numerous  families,   "Kula",   and  the  members 

of  these  families  are  the  individual  units.     The 

members   of   the   family   are   governed   by   the 

"Kula-Dharma"  or  family  customs,  the  families 

must   obey   the   clan    family  customs,   and   the 

clan  families  must  be  governed  by  the  rules  of 

the    community.     The   members   of   the    family 

enjoy   absolute   freedom   in   everything   that   is 

approved  of  by  the  other  families  of  the  same 

clan.     If  the  common  opinion  of   the  majority 

of  the  families  of  one  clan  be  against  any  act 

of  violation  of  its  long-standing  custom,  then  it 

should  not  be  performed.     If  any  one  dares  to 

violate    such   custom,    then   he    forfeits   all    the 

privileges  which  he  may  have  in  his  family  life 

in  the  community.     He  will  be  deprived  of  social 

intercourse  and  relationship  with  the  clan  family 

and  of  the  protection  of  the  community. 

This  clan  family  is  called  in  Sanskrit  "Gotra". 

There  is  no  English  word  by  which  I  can  translate 

this  term,  the  literal  meaning  of  "Gotra"  being 

*''lineage",  that  is,  the  descendants  of  common 

91 


INDIA  AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

ancestors.  Originally  there  were  about  twenty- 
four  Rishis  who  were  Gotra-makers  or  makers  of 
clans.  They  were  all  sages  and  Seers  of  Truth, 
who  lived  in  the  Vedic  period  and  were  inspired. 
The  hymns  of  the  Vedas  and  other  holy  Scrip- 
tures in  India  came  through  them,  and  they 
were  leaders  as  well  as  clan-makers.  We  all 
trace  our  descent  from  these  great  Rishis. 

Again,  the  community  of  many  clans  is  called 
in  Sanskrit  "J^ti",  Greek  "Genus",  Roman 
"Gens",  or  the  patriarchal  family  in  the  largest 
sense  of  the  term.  Each  community  consists 
of  many  clans,  which  live  together,  obe3dng  the 
laws  of  the  community.  The  rules  of  propriety 
and  impropriety,  marriage  ceremonies  and  funeral 
rites,  rituals  and  ceremonies,  amusements  and 
occupations,  professions  and  industries,  nay,  all 
the  details  of  social  life  must  be  in  perfect 
harmony  with  the  laws  and  customs  which  have 
been  handed  down  through  generations  to  the 
existing  communities.  These  social  laws  are 
called  "JAti-Dharma",  or  the  duties  of  a  J5.ti 
or  community.  Each  clan  family,  from  the 
lowest  Pariah  to  tlie  highest  Brdhmin,  is  guided 

92 


THE   SOCIAL    STATUS    OF    THE    INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

and  governed  by  the  Jati-Dharma.  No  position, 
profession,  or  industry  can  be  accepted  by  any 
member  of  a  community  if  the  community  as  a 
body  disapproves  of  it.  If  any  member  wishes 
to  fulfil  a  desire,  he  must  first  consider  whether 
it  is  in  perfect  harmony  with  the  customs  of  the 
family  (Kula-Dharma),  then  with  the  duties  of 
the  clan  family  (Gotra-Dharma),  and  lastly  with 
the  laws  of  the  community  (Jati-Dharma);  and, 
after  establishing  harmony  with  all  these,  he  can 
do  what  he  pleases.  In  case  of  difference  of 
opinion,  whatever  the  community  decides  for 
the  family  and  the  individual  they  must  im- 
plicitly obey.  The  leaders  of  the  community  are 
the  final  authorities.  The  individual  sacrifices 
his  freedom  for  the  sake  of  the  family,  the 
interest  of  the  family  is  merged  into  that  of  the 
clan,  and  the  clan  sacrifices  its  interest  for  the 
community. 

This  is  a  peculiar  system  of  government,  but 
it  has  existed  in  India  for  many  centuries.  A 
Hindu  from  the  time  of  his  birth  up  to  his  last 
moment  lives  a  life  which  may  be  called  a  life 

of  self-sacrifice.     Whether  a  man  or  a  woman, 

93 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

his  or  her  ideal  is  not  to  think  of  himself  or  her- 
self, not  to  seek  his  or  her  own  comfort,  not  to 
enjoy  selfish  pleasures,  but  to  live  for  the  good, 
first,  of  the  family,  then  of  the  clan,  then  of  the 
community.  Such  is  the  custom  in  India.  Of 
course  this  government  by  community  we  lind 
in  almost  every  country  in  some  form  and  to 
some  extent,  but  nowhere  is  it  so  strict  and  so 
perfectly  organized  as  in  India. 

The  communities,  again,  have  no  social  rank 
or  grade  among  themselves.  All  communities 
are  equally  great  and  all  clans  are  equally  good. 
Each  community  is  like  a  small  social  republic 
in  itself.  The  rules  and  customs  of  one  com- 
munity do  not  interfere  with  those  of  another, 
and  in  this  respect  every  community  enjoys 
absolute  freedom  as  a  body,  but  the  individuals 
in  it  cannot  enjoy  this  freedom.  They  must 
obey  the  laws  of  their  community;  and  if  they 
violate  any  existing  custom  they  must  go  tlirough 
certain  penances  and  austerities.  Otherwise  they 
will  be  excommunicated,  and  excommunication 
is  the  worst  punishment  that  can  be  given  to  a 
Hindu.     He  will  not  be  invited  by  other  mem- 

94 


THE    SOCIAL   STATUS   OF   THE  INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

bers  of  the  same  community,  neither  will  his 
invitation  be  accepted  by  them.  At  the  time 
of  birth,  death,  or  wedding  he  will  be  left  alone 
and  absolutely  friendless  in  the  world.  No 
other  community  will  take  him.  Nor  can  he 
join  another  clan,  because  his  birthright  prevents 
him.  Such  is  the  rigidity  and  power  of  the 
communal  form  of  social  government  among  the 
Hindus. 

Outsiders  and  foreigners  do  not  understand 
this  government,  because  they  do  not  belong  to 
any  community,  and  those  who  do  not  belong 
to  a  commimity  cannot  know  anything  of  it. 
These  are  unwritten  laws.  You  will  not  find 
them  in  books;  but  the  unwritten  laws  are  more 
binding  than  the  written  laws.  Strangers  who 
go  to  India  cannot  see  the  reason  why  the  mem- 
bers of  different  communities  under  the  name 
of  Brahmin,  Kshatriya,  or  any  other  caste  do  not 
intermarry  or  have  free  social  intercourse  with 
one  another.  There  are,  for  instance,  Brahmins 
all  over  India;  but  a  Brahmin  of  Bombay  will 
not  intermarry  with  the  Brahmins  of  Calcutta, 
or    Madras,    or    the    Punjab.     Why?     Because 

95 


INDIA    AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

although  they  are  all  Brahmins,  they  do  not 
belong  to  the  same  community.  Again,  all  the 
Brahmins  of  the  Province  of  Bengal  do  not 
intermarry  or  mix  freely  or  eat  together,  because 
they  are  members  of  different  communities.  The 
descendants  of  different  clans  (Gotra)  belonging 
to  the  same  community,  however,  will  inter- 
marry and  have  free  social  intercourse. 

The  tendency  of  each  community  is  to  preserve 
the  clan  family  intact  and  to  keep  the  Aryan 
blood  of  the  individuals  in  it  as  pure  as  possible, 
and  also  to  make  its  members  live  on  the  highest 
moral  and  spiritual  plane.  The  community 
approves  of  everything  that  is  truly  ethical  and 
uplifting  and  rejects  that  which  debases  the 
moral  and  spiritual  conduct  of  the  family  or 
individual.  Being  thus  protected  by  the  laws 
and  customs  of  the  community,  individual 
members  grow  up,  rear  their  children,  live  in 
joint  families,  fulfil  their  social  or  ratlier  com- 
munal duties,  enjoy  pleasures  and  amusements, 
and  serve  the  community  by  performing  such 
acts  as  will  help  other  families  and  members  of 

the  same  community.     If  there  be  a  millionaire, 

96 


THE    SOCIAL    STATUS   OF   THE    INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

for  example,  his  duty  is  to  help  first  his  own 
fainily,  then  all  the  families  of  his  own  clan,  then 
other  families  of  the  same  community.  He  can 
then  extend  his  charitable  and  philanthropic 
works  to  the  members  of  other  communities 
or  do  anything  for  the  good  of  the  public  in 
general.  Each  community  is  like  one  family 
and  tremendous  unity  exists  among  its  mem- 
bers. For  this  reason,  there  never  was  any 
need  in  India  of  such  philanthropic  organizations 
and  asylums  as  you  have  in  Europe  and  America. 
Orphanages,  poorhouses,  and  charitable  insti- 
tutions were  not  necessary,  because  the  com- 
munity took  care  of  its  own  poor  and  its  own 
orphans.  You  put  the  poorer  classes  in  asylums; 
but  we  take  them  into  our  homes,  feed  them,  and 
clothe  them.  That  is  our  duty,  because  they  are 
our  brothers.  No  grander  system  was  ever 
established  in  the  world. 

Hindu  leaders  of  society,  after  trying  various 
methods,  discovered  that  this  form  of  social 
government  was  the  best  suited  for  the  Hindu 
people.     Their  idea  was  that  if  all  the  existing 

communities  into  which  the  whole  Hindu  popu- 

97 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

lation  is  divided  enforced  these  moral  and  spiritual 
laws  among  the  members  of  the  different  families 
then  the  whole  nation  would  be  moral  and 
spiritual;  just  as  the  whole  street  will  be  clean 
if  every  one  keeps  the  front  of  his  house  clean. 
Thus  they  started  from  these  individual  units 
and  built  up  a  system  upon  natural  laws,  making 
one  family  of  the  whole  nation. 

But  these  communities  at  present  are  not 
perfect.  They  have  now  become  fixed  entities; 
their  laws,  rules,  and  ideals  have  lost  their  flex- 
ible nature  and  have  become  so  rigid  and  binding 
that  they  cannot  be  changed,  for  they  are 
considered  to  represent  the  highest  and  best 
ideals.  But  the  individual  living  within  the 
limits  of  the  community  may  change  his  ideas 
and  adopt  new  ones,  better  suited  to  immediate 
conditions,  which  will  put  him  at  variance  with 
the  communal  life  and  alienate  him  from  his 
clan  family.  Herein  lies  one  of  the  serious 
defects  of  the  present  system.  This  govern- 
ment by  community,  however,  is  more  effective 
and  beneficial  than  the  church  government  such 

as  we   find   in   this   country.     Why?       Because 

98 


THE   SOCIAL   STATUS   OF   THE    INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

social  questions  must  be  kept  separate  from 
religion;  otherwise  there  will  be  religious  dis- 
sension and  persecution.  And  this  is  the  secret 
of  religious  toleration  in  India.  Religion  is 
never  interfered  with  on  account  of  social  affairs. 
As  I  explained  in  my  last  lecture,  the  Hindus  are 
absolutely  free  to  choose  any  form  of  worship 
they  like,  but  that  has  nothing  to  do  with  their 
social  status.  The  government  by  community, 
however  imperfect  it  may  be,  has  at  least  this 
advantage, — that  it  gives  freedom  in  religion  and 
confers  upon  all  the  members  of  these  com- 
munities equal  rights,  equal  privileges,  and  equal 
opportunities.  Both  men  and  women  are  al- 
lowed the  same  right  to  discuss  and  vote  upon 
any  disputed  question. 

Each  community  has  its  aristocracy,  middle 
classes,  and  lower  classes.  The  lower  and  middle 
classes  aspire  to  rise  to  the  higher  ranks  of  the 
community  and  expect  favor,  help,  and  support 
from  the  superior  classes.  A  man  may  possess 
enormous  wealth  in  the  community,  but  he  can 
never   change   his   birthright.     Neither   will   he 

change  his  clan    (Gotra)   or  community   (J^ti). 

99 


INDIA  AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

No  other  clan  will  accept  him  as  a  member,  no 
other  community  will  give  him  better  privileges 
or  protection.  The  social  status  of  a  Hindu 
depends  upon  the  rights  which  he  or  she  has 
acquired  by  birth  in  the  family,  clan,  and  com- 
munity. There  was,  for  example,  a  conmiunity 
of  fishermen.  A  lady  in  that  community  in- 
herited a  large  estate.  In  India  the  women  hold 
property,  manage  their  own  estates,  and  in  such 
matters  have  great  freedom.  Now  this  lady 
had  unusual  power  and  ability  and  she  nanaged 
her  property  most  admirably.  She  built  temples, 
performed  other  charitable  and  philanthropic 
works,  and  did  incalculable  good  by  her  example 
to  all  the  members  of  the  families  and  clans  of 
the  same  community.  She  was  considered  to  be 
like  the  queen  of  that  community.  All  of  its 
members  honored  and  respected  her  as  the 
jewel  of  their  society,  as  did  the  communities  of 
Brahmins  and  other  castes;  but  she  never  thought 
of  changing  her  clan  or  of  rejecting  the  laws 
and  customs  of  her  own  community. 

These  communities,  again,  are  subdivisions  of 

larger  classes,  which  are  known  in  English  as 

100 


THE   SOCIAL   STATUS   OF   THE   INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

"castes."  The  word  "caste"  has  become  most 
mischievous  and  misleading,  and  the  less  we  use 
it  the  better  we  shall  be  able  to  understand  the 
social  conditions  of  the  people  of  ancient  and 
modem  India.  The  term  "caste"  is  the  angli- 
cized form  of  the  Portuguese  word  "casta", 
which  means  "breed"  or  "stock."  It  was  ftrst 
applied  by  the  rough  Portuguese  sailors  of  tlie 
sLxteenth  century  to  certain  divisions  of  the 
Hindu  society.  It  was  originally  used  in  the 
sense  of  pure,  unmixed  breed,  but  in  Sanskrit 
there  is  no  equivalent  of  such  a  word  as  caste. 
In  the  writings  of  the  Hindus,  from  the  Vedas 
down  to  the  Laws  of  Manu  and  the  Puranas, 
we  do  not  find  any  word  which  has  the  same 
meaning  as  is  conveyed  by  the  term  caste,  and 
in  India  to  ask  a  Hindu  what  is  meant  by  caste 
would  be  like  asking  an  American  what  caste 
means  in  America.  The  Sanskrit  word  which 
has  been  translated  (or  mistranslated)  by  caste 
is  "Vama"  (color),  which  imphed  some  eth- 
nological distinction  of  complexion  as  separat- 
ing   the    dominant    from    the    inferior    classes, 

the  Aryans  from  the  non-Aryan  aboriginal  tribes 

101 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

of  ancient  India.  Mr.  R.  C.  Dutt  says:  "The 
very  word  'Varna',  which  in  later  Sanskrit  in- 
dicates caste,  is  used  in  the  Rig  Veda  to  dis- 
tinguish the  Aryans  and  the  non-Aryans,  and 
nowhere  indicates  separate  sections  in  the  Aryan 
community."  *  This  distinction  of  color,  how- 
ever, gradually  gave  rise  to  separate  divisions 
in  the  Aryan  community  itself;  as  in  the  Bha- 
gavad  Gita  we  read:  "The  Lord  has  divided  the 
whole  human  race  into  four  classes,  according 
to  their  color,  qualifications,  quahties,  and 
works."  t  The  four  original  colors  of  different 
races  were  white,  red,  yellow,  and  black;  and  the 
intermixture  of  these  four  original  colors  has 
produced  all  the  various  race  divisions  of  the 
world.  Among  the  Aryans  those  who  were  white 
in  color  were  called  Brdlimins;  the  red,  Kshat- 
riyas;  the  yellow,  Vaishyas;  and  the  black, 
Sudras.  Again  the  different  qualities  and  works 
of  these  four  classes  are  thus  described:  "The 
duties  of  BrAhmins,  Kshatriyas,  Vaishyas,  as 
also  of  Sudras,  are  divided  in  accordance  with 

*  Civilization  in  Ancient  India,  Vol.  I,  p.  65. 
t  Chapter  IV,  verse   13. 
102 


THE   SOCIAL   STATUS   OF   THE    INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

their  nature-bom  qualities.  Peace,  self-restraint, 
austerities,  purity,  forgiveness,  and  uprightness, 
knowledge,  direct  intuition,  and  faith  in  God  are 
the  natural  qualities  of  the  Brahmin.  Of  the 
Kshatriyas,  bravery,  energy,  fortitude,  dexterity, 
fleeing  not  in  battle,  gift  and  lordhness  are  the 
nature-bom  qualities.  Agriculture,  protection 
of  cows,  merchandise,  and  various  industries  are 
the  nature-born  duties  of  the  Vaishyas.  Con- 
scientiousness in  menial  service  is  the  nature- 
bom  duty  of  the  Sudras.  A  man  attains  per- 
fection by  performing  those  duties  which  he  is 
able  to  do."  *  Here  you  see  a  man's  caste  was 
determined  not  only  by  his  color  but  also  by  his 
natural  qualifications.  That  was  the  original  idea 
behind  all  caste  distinctions  among  the  Hindus. 
It  is  quite  different  from  the  explanation  given 
by  foreigners  and  missionaries. 

The  Brahmins  were  naturally  qualified  to 
fulfil  certain  duties,  and  they  discharged  them 
faithfully  and  perfectly.  Propelled  by  a  nature- 
bom  tendency  they  devoted  themselves  to  the 
study  of  the  various  branches  of  science  and  phi- 

♦  Bhagavad  Gita,  Chapter  XVIII,  verses  41-45. 

103 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

losophy,  as  well  as  the  Vedic  Scriptures,  and 
performed  the  religious  rites  and  ceremonies  of 
all  classes  of  people  and  other  priestly  duties. 
The  Kshatriyas  were  those  who  became  warriors, 
soldiers,  commanders,  and  rulers  of  the  country. 
The  trades,  industries,  and  agriculture  were  man- 
aged by  the  Vaishyas;  while  the  Sudras  were 
those  who  were  qualified  to  do  only  the  menial 
and  domestic  service  in  the  household  life  of  the 
other  three  classes.  Thus  there  arose  a  complete 
system  of  division  of  labor.  To  every  man  his 
place,  work,  rank,  and  remuneration  were  as- 
signed. 

This  division  was  made  perhaps  during  the 
Vedic  period,  or  perhaps  earlier;  but  we  find  it 
given  in  the  Vedas.  When  the  Aryans  first  in- 
vaded India  from  Central  Asia  they  were  highly 
civilized.  They  knew  agriculture,  and  had  won- 
derful social  and  political  organizations.  And 
when  a  division  of  labor  became  necessary,  they 
divided  themselves  into  different  classes  in 
accordance  with  their  natural  tendencies.  But 
at  first  these  divisions  were  flexible  and  inter- 
changeable.    The    social    distinctions    were   not 

104 


THE    SOCIAL    STATUS    OF    THE    INDIAN    PEOPLE. 

iron-bound;  neither  were  the  occupations  and 
professions  hereditary.  We  read  in  the  Vedas 
and  other  ancient  writings  of  the  Hindus  that 
the  Brahmins  could  intermarry  with  the  Kshat- 
riyas,  Vaishyas,  and  Sudras.  They  could  also 
become  warriors  if  they  were  so  qualified;  while 
the  Kshatriyas  often  became  the  teachers  of  the 
Brahmins;  in  fact,  most  of  the  philosophical 
and  spiritual  ideals  which  we  have  to-day  were 
first  given  by  the  Kshatriyas,  and  not  by  the 
Brahmins.  The  members  of  these  classes  mixed 
freely,  and  whenever  any  one  had  the  qualifica- 
tions of  a  Brahmin  or  a  Kshatriya  he  was  called 
Brahmin  or  Kshatriya.  There  were  many  Kshat- 
riyas who  were  afterward  called  Brahmins  on 
account  of  their  spiritual  wisdom  and  greatness. 
You  will  notice  that  almost  all  the  incarnations 
of  Divinity  in  India  were  Kshatriyas,  and  very 
few  were  Brahmins.  Another  theory  about  the 
origin  of  caste  is  given  in  the  Mahabharata.  In 
the  Shanti  Parva  (chs.  188-189)  we  read: 
"A  sage  Bharadv^ja  asks  another  sage  Bhrigu: 
"If  color  is  the  principle  of  differentiation  of 
caste  in  the  fourfold  caste  system,  then  there 

105 


INDIA  AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

is  indeed  seen  the  confusion  of  color  among  all 
castes; 

"Desire,  anger,  fear,  avarice,-  grief,  anxiety, 
hunger,  and  weariness  sway  all  of  us,  how  then 
is  the  division  of  caste? 

"Innumerable  are  the  species  of  moving  and 
unmoving  beings;  of  these  various  classes,  whence 
the  determination  of  castes?' 

"Bhrigu  replied: 

"There  is  no  distinction  of  castes.  The  whole 
world  being  created  by  Brahma  in  the  beginning 
consisted  of  Brahmins  only.  By  actions  it 
underwent  (the  distinctions  of)  caste. 

"Those  twice-born  men  or  Brahmins,  who 
were  fond  of  the  enjoyment  of  desires,  fierce, 
passionate,  and  daring  in  (the  pursuit  of)  desired 
objects,  who  had  abandoned  their  own  duties, 
men  of  ruddy  complexion, — these  attained  the 
rank  of  Kshatriyas. 

'  'Those  twice-born  men  or  Br&hmins,  who  had 
taken  to  the  profession  of  tending  cattle,  who 
were  yellow  in  color,  lived  by  agriculture,  and 
abode  not  by  their  own  duties, — these  attained 
the  rank  of  Vaishyas. 

106 


THE    SOCIAL    STATUS    OF   THE    INDIAN    PEOPLE. 

"Those  tvvice-born  men  or  Brahmins,  who 
were  fond  of  kiUing  and  telHng  falsehoods,  covet- 
ous, who  hved  by  all  (kinds  of)  occupations, 
dark  in  color,  and  who  abandoned  all  cleanli- 
ness,— these  attained  the  rank  of  Sudras. 

"Separated  by  these  actions,  the  twice-boni 
have  undergone  differentiation  into  castes." 

These  four  main  divisions  of  the  Indo-Aryans 

of  the  Vedic  period,  according  to  their  Varna 

(color)    and    occupations    gradually    lost    their 

flexible  nature  and  became  a  system  of  hereditary 

caste  as  early  as   six    centuries   before    Christ, 

when  Buddha  arose  as  a  great  reformer  against 

the    separation    and    distinction    of   castes.     He 

gave  a  death-blow  to  priestly  power  and  equaUzed 

all  classes  of  people  by  breaking  down  the  barriers 

of  this  artificial  hereditary  caste  division.     Under 

this  system  if  a  Brahmin  was  a  priest,  his  son 

must  be  a  priest  also;   while  the  son  of  a  Kshat- 

riya   (soldier)  must  be  a  soldier.     This  was  of 

course  started  at  first  with  the  idea  of  perfecting 

the    different  lines    of    work,    and    the    ancient 

thinkers    and    social    leaders    understood    the 

laws  of  heredity  so  thoroughly  that  they  tried 

107 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

to  develop  the  best  qualities  through  hereditary 
transmission.  Buddha,  however,  strove  to  bring 
the  whole  social  system  into  its  original  simple 
form  and  make  it  as  flexible  as  it  was  at  the 
outset.  He  would  not  recognize  a  Brahmin 
because  he  was  born  a  Brahmin,  but  he  dis- 
tinguished all  people  according  to  their  merits 
and  qualifications.  Any  one  who  possessed  the 
beautiful  qualities  of  peace,  self-restraint,  self- 
control,  righteousness,  devotion,  love  for  human- 
ity, and  divine  wisdom,  was  called  by  him  a 
Brahmin;  *  and  during  the  period  of  nearly  a 
thousand  years,  while  Buddhism  reigned  over 
India,  people  of  different  classes  forgot  their 
hereditary  caste  distinctions  and  enjoyed  social 
and  political  freedom. 

About  600  A.D.,  however.  Buddhism  declined, 
corruptions  crept  in,  and  the  orthodox  Brdhmins, 
regaining  their  power,  reestablished  the  original 
social  organization  in  accordance  with  the  hered- 
itary system  of  class  divisions.  Then  later  the 
Mahometans  came,  and  for  six  hundred  years 
tried  in  vain  to  destroy  the  social  structure  of 

♦  Vide  Dhammapada,  Chapter  XXVI. 
108 


THE    SOCIAL    STATUS    OF    THE   INDIAN    PEOPLE. 

the  Hindus.  WTioever  favored  the  Mahometan 
ideals  was  ostracized  and  excommunicated  by 
the  Hindus.  Thus  Hindu  society  lost  many  of 
its  most  brilliant  men  and  women.  Those  who 
intermarried  or  associated  freely  with  the  Mahom- 
etans were  deprived  of  all  social  rights  in  their 
community,  and  under  no  circumstances  could 
be  taken  back  by  the  Hindus.  Such  was  the 
t5a'anny  and  abuse  of  power  exercised  by  the 
fanatical  descendants  of  the  great  Aryan  Rishis 
and  sages  of  ancient  India.  The  Brdhmins  and 
social  leaders  of  the  middle  ages  were  short- 
sighted and  superstitious;  they  had  love  of  power, 
they  wished  to  rule  over  the  people  and  keep 
them  under  their  control.  To-day  India  would 
be  one  of  the  mightiest  nations  in  the  world  if 
these  short-sighted  orthodox  social  leaders  had 
not  pursued  a  policy  of  seclusion  and  isolation, 
which  resulted  in  absolute  disunion  among  the 
members  of  the  different  classes  of  the  Hindus. 
England  could  not  have  held  her  dominant 
sword  over  the  heads  of  three  hundred  millions 
of  people  in  India  if  there  had  been  unity  among 

the  isolated  communities  and  clans  of  the  four 

109 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

divisions.  Well  has  it  been  said  by  Sir  Monier 
Monier  Williams:  "And  certainly  the  antagonism 
of  these  caste  associations  and  trade  leagues  has 
helped  us  to  govern  the  country  by  making 
political  combinations  impracticable."  * 

But  now  the  conditions  are  changing.  India 
of  to-day  is  different  from  what  she  was  fifty 
years  ago.  Education  and  intellectual  progress 
are  opening  the  eyes  of  the  nation.  The  cry 
for  social  reform  is  to  be  heard  in  every  comer 
of  this  vast  country.  People  are  begiining  to 
see  the  defects  of  the  existing  social  organism. 
The  educated  classes  are  now  convinced  that  if 
the  present  conditions  are  aUowed  to  continue 
the  absolute  disintegration  and  complete  anni- 
hilation of  the  national  life  will  be  the  inevitable 
result.  Thinking  people  are  no  longer  satisfied 
with  the  seclusion  and  isolation  of  the  different 
communities  by  iron  barriers  of  superstition. 
They  wish  to  unify  all  communities  into  one 
homogeneous  whole,  to  make  every  member  feel 
that  he  is  a  part  and  parcel,  not  merely  of  a 
family,  clan,  or  community,  not  merely  a  part 

*  Brdhminism  and  Hinduism,  p.  474. 
110 


THE   SOCIAL   STATUS   OF   THE    INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

of  a  section  of  the  Hindu  nation  which  is  limited 
by  color  or  caste,  but  a  most  important  part  of 
the  Indo- Aryan  nation  as  a  whole.  The  solidarity 
of  all  classes  and  all  communities  is  the  aim  of 
the  social  refonners.  The  work  has  begun,  but 
it  will  take  a  long  time  to  make  this  reform 
effective  and  universal. 

To-day  the  integrity  of  the  social  organization 
is  weakened;  social  chaos  and  anarchy  have 
prevailed.  Fifty  years  ago  every  one  was  proud 
of  his  noble  birth,  but  with  the  hard  competi- 
tion and  extreme  poverty  of  the  masses,  brought 
about  by  an  alien  government,  the  question  of 
bread  and  butter  has  absorbed  the  whole  atten- 
tion of  the  people.  The  people  to-day  are  very 
poor.  They  need  food  and  clothes  and  a  shelter 
over  their  heads.  They  have  no  means  to 
support  their  families.  Their  present  social 
status  depends  upon  wealth.  A  high-class 
Br^min,  disregarding  the  ancient  tradition  and 
custom  of  his  caste,  will  now  perform  the  most 
menial  tasks,  like  cooking  in  a  private  house  or 
working  as  a  servant.     To-day  the  question  is 

how  to  live.     A  Brahmin  again  will  bow  down 

111 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

to  a  Sudra  of  the  lowest  class  if  the  latter  hap- 
pens to  be  rich.  Twenty  years  ago  the  brother 
looked  upon  his  elder  as  his  superior,  but  now 
he  considers  him  merely  as  a  good  companion. 
The  rigors  of  the  social  organization,  which 
formerly  ensured  obedience  to  authority  have 
been  loosened,  and  every  one  now  feels  that 
he  is  at  liberty  to  go  his  own  way. 

The  Hindus  are  passing  through  a  transition 
period.  Social  progress  is  at  present  checked  by 
the  vigorous  efforts  of  an  unsympathetic,  greedy, 
selfish,  and  despotic  foreign  government,  whose 
heartless  officials  are  sucking  the  life-blood  of 
the  Hindu  nation.  All  the  trade  giiilds  and  in- 
dustrial leagues  which  exercised  such  tremendous 
power  in  the  social  life  of  the  Hindus  have 
no  longer  voice  or  authority  in  the  community. 
English  merchants,  protected  by  the  British 
government,  have  taken  possession  of  the  market, 
have  driven  out  the  native  manufacturers,  have 
destroyed  the  trade  and  commerce  of  the  country, 
and  have  thus  ruined  millions  of  people.  If  you 
go  to  India  to-day,  you  will  find  thousands  and 
thousands,  perhaps  millions  and  millions,  who 

112 


THE   SOCIAL   STATUS   OF  THE   INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

have  no  occupation.  No  industry  is  encouraged. 
People  are  driven  to  live  upon  agriculture.  The 
English  government  wanted  to  make  India  an 
agricultural  country  and  she  has  succeeded  in 
doing  so.  The  laboring  classes  in  consequence 
are  obliged  to  live  and  support  their  family  on 
from  two  to  five  cents  a  day.  What  social 
progress  can  we  expect  to  see  under  such  destruc- 
tive power  vigorously  exercised  by  the  so-called 
monarch  of  European  civilization?  Christian 
missionaries,  blinded  by  their  fanatical  zeal  to 
Christianize  India,  do  not  see  the  faults  and 
the  demoralizing  influence  of  the  present  system 
of  despotic  government  which  is  ruining  the 
country,  but  they  trace  the  origin  of  all  social 
evils  to  the  religion  of  the  Hindus.  Directly 
or  indirectly  their  efforts  are  to  destroy  the 
Hindu  social  structure,  but  have  they  any  better 
system  to  give  in  return?  We  see  that  the 
present  social  government  in  Europe  and  in 
this  country  is  not  perfect.  It  is  not  even  as 
perfect  as  the  corrupted  caste  system  which 
exists    in    India!     These    Christian   missionaries 

do  not  reaUze  that  the  majority  of  the  Christian 

113 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

converts  in  India  repent  as  long  as  they  live  for 
the  great  mistake  they  have  committed  in  alienat- 
ing themselves  from  the  Hindu  society.  Have 
they  any  social  standing  even  among  the  Chris- 
tians themselves?  Are  the  negroes  of  America 
on  an  equal  footing  with  the  white  Christians? 
No.  First  let  the  Christians  root  out  from 
their  hearts  the  prejudice  against  race  and  color. 
Have  they  succeeded  in  doing  that?  How  then 
can  they  solve  the  tremendous  social  problem 
which  faces  the  Hindu  people?  India  needs 
social  reconstruction,  but  will  they  find  that 
through  Christianity?  No,  Christianity  cannot 
help  them,  because  the  Christians  know  how  to 
destroy,  but  they  do  not  know  how  to  build — 
especially  in  India.  They  may  give  their  church 
government,  which  would  be  worse  in  a  country 
like  India.  The  people  have  suffered  enough  from 
priestcraft;    they  do  not  want  any  more  of  it. 

India  needs  social  reorganization  and  social 
regeneration.  The  Christians,  like  the  Mahom- 
etans, have  poured  their  ideals  into  the  sea  of 
Hindu  society  and  have  created  waves  of  radical 
reform.     To-day  the  waters  of   that  social  sea 

114 


THE   SOCIAL   STATUS   OF  THE   INDIAN   PEOPLE. 

are  being  constantly  stirred  by  the  anglicized 
and  half-Europeanized  reformers  of  the  present 
generation.  Now  the  time  has  come  for  the 
Hindu  leaders  of  society  to  stand  on  a  broader 
and  more  universal  platform  and  reconstruct 
their  system,  accepting  whatever  is  good  and 
noble  among  Western  nations  and  adding  it  to 
their  own  lofty  ideals.  They  will  have  to  make 
their  social  organization  more  flexible  than  it 
has  ever  been.  That  reconstruction  must  be 
based  upon  the  broadest  and  most  universal 
ideals  of  the  Hindu  nation,  tempered  by  the  need 
of  occidental  aggressiveness  and  commercialism. 
The  remedy  has  already  been  discovered  in  the 
all-embracing  and  unifying  system  of  Vedanta, 
which,  proclaiming  the  divine  right  of  all  human- 
ity 'rrespective  of  caste,  creed,  or  color,  and 
teaching  that  all  are  children  of  God,  whether 
Christians  or  Hindus,  Pariahs  or  Brahmins,  will 
once  more  purify  the  social  conditions,  remove 
the  evils  of  the  caste  system,  uplift  the  indi- 
viduals, bring  solidarity  among  the  members 
of  different  communities,  and  make  the  Hindu 
nation   stand   once   more    as   a   great    civilizing 

power  among  the  civilized  nations  of  the  world. 

116 


IV. 

POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS  OF    INDIA. 

Those  who  have  studied  the  history  of  the 
civiHzation  of  ancient  India  are  well  acquainted 
with  the  fact  that  the  Hindus  were  highly 
civilized  at  least  five  thousand  years  ago.  The 
earliest  records  of  Hindu  civilization  are  to  be 
found  in  the  Rig  Veda,  the  oldest  Scriptures  of 
the  world,  and  in  other  writings  of  the  Vedic 
period.  From  these  sources  we  learn,  as  was 
shown  in  the  last  lecture,  that  the  Indo-Aryans 
of  those  prehistoric  times  organized  their  society 
into  four  general  classes:  Brahmins,  Kshatriyas, 
Vaish3'as,  and  Sudras,  according  to  their  color, 
qualifications,  and  professions.  The  Brahmins 
were  entrusted  with  literary  and  priestly  duties; 
while  the  Kshatriyas  were  those  who  devoted 
their  energy  to  protect  the  country  against  in- 
vaders, to  govern  the  land,  and  to  look  after  the 

116 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

welfare  and  safety  of  all  the  other  classes.  In- 
dustry, trade,  commerce,  agriculture,  and  the 
various  duties  of  a  commercial  life  were  under- 
taken by  those  who  were  known  as  the  Vaishyas 
or  the  merchant  class;  and  the  Sudras  belonged 
to  the  serving  class. 

The  Vedic  writings  also  tell  us  that  the  Indo- 
Aryans  of  those  days  cultivated  the  land  with 
ploughs,  used  oxen  and  horses  in  the  field, 
understood  irrigation  by  means  of  canals,  and 
knew  the  use  of  wells  and  reservoirs  for  drinking 
as  well  as  for  irrigation.  Various  kinds  of 
industry,  trade,  and  commerce,  as  also  the 
existence  of  current  money — like  pieces  of  gold 
of  a  certain  fixed  value,  for  use  in  buying  and 
sellmg  are  mentioned  in  the  Rig  Veda.  The 
Indo- Aryans,  we  read,  furthermore,  were  con- 
tinually engaged  in  fighting  against  the  non- 
Aryan  aboriginal  tribes  who  were  the  original 
inhabitants  of  India,  and  remnants  of  whom 
are  still  to  be  found  in  some  parts  among  the 
hill  tribes,  just  as  you  find  to-day  some  of  the 
original  inhabitants  of  America  in  certain  parts 

of  this  country.     In  these  battles  with  hostile 

117 


INDIA   AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

tribes  "the  (Aryan)  warriors  used  not  only 
armour  and  helmets,  but  also  protecting  armour 
for  the  shoulder,  probably  shields.  They  used 
javelins  and  battle-axes,  and  sharp-edged  swords, 
besides  bows  and  arrows.  All  the  weapons  of 
war  known  elsewhere  in  ancient  times  were  known 
in  India  four  thousand  years  ago.  Drums 
assembled  men  in  battle,  banners  led  them  on 
in  compact  masses,  and  the  use  of  war  horses 
and  chariots  was  well  known.  Tame  elephants 
were  in  use  too."  * 

The  Rig  Veda  contains  numerous  allusions 
which  show  that  the  use  of  iron,  gold,  and  of 
other  metals  was  well  known  to  the  Hindus. 
Armors  worn  in  war  are  mentioned  in  Book  I, 
140,  10;  in  II,  39,  4;  in  IV,  53,  2,  as  in  various 
other  places;  while  the  javelin,  in  Sanskrit 
Rishti,  and  the  battle-axe,  Bashi  in  Sanskrit, 
are  mentioned  in  the  Rig  Veda,  V,  52,  6,  and 
57,  2.  Three  thousand  mailed  warriors  are  spoken 
of  in  the  same  Veda,  VI,  27,  6;  and  sharp-edged 
swords  are  described  in  VI,  47,  10.  That  the 
arrowheads   were   made    of    iron    is    sho\^Ti    in 


*  "Civilization   in  Ancient   India,"  Vol.    I,  p.   58. 

118 


POLITICAL   LNSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

Book  VI,  75,  15:  "We  extol  the  arrow  which  is 
poisoned  whose  face  is  iron,"  and  in  the  next 
book  {8;^,  1)  we  read:  "When  the  battle  is  nigh 
and  the  warrior  marches  in  his  armour,  he 
appears  Hke  the  cloud." 

It  was  by  ceaseless  fighting  that  the  ancient 
Indo-Aryans  protected  themselves  in  their  newly- 
conquered  countr}%  extended  the  limits  of  cul- 
tivation, and  built  new  towns  and  villages.  This 
interminable  warring  and  fighting  forced  the 
conquering  Aryan  tribes  to  organize  their  politi- 
cal and  military  institutions.  Thus  the  political 
institutions  of  the  Hindus  are  as  old  as  their 
civilization.  They  divided  the  country  into 
various  kingdoms,  principalities,  and  chiefships, 
each  enjoying  perfect  autonomy.  At  the  head 
of  cch  province  or  kingdom  was  a  Hindu  chief 
or  governor,  who  was  called  a  Rajah,  which 
means  "prince"  or  "king."  These  Rajahs  were 
absolutely  independent  of  one  another.  They 
entertained  friendly  relations  with  the  Rajahs 
of  other  neighboring  provinces,  and  sometimes 
they  were  jealous  of  each  other.     But  there  never 

was  a  universal  sovereignty  over  the  whole  of 

119 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

India,  like  that  of  the  great  autocrat  of  Russia, 

although    there   were    powerful    monarchs    and 

emperors    to    whom    other    kings,    chiefs,    and 

governors  of  states  acknowledged  subordination 

and   paid    tribute.     Their    autonomy,    however, 

was  never  sacrificed.     Their  alliances  generally 

bore  the  character  of  confederacies,  or  federal 

unions,  and  not  that  of  feudal  baronies  subject 

to  a  ruling  chief;    and  under  no  circumstances 

were  the  servile  duties  of  the  feudal  barons  of 

Europe    exacted    from    the    weaker    Rajahs    or 

governors.     The  bond  between  them  was  of  the 

feeblest  kind,  and  easily  broke  at  every  favorable 

opportunity.     In   the  Vedic   period,   there  were 

many  such  emperors  or  Chakravartins,  as  they 

were  called  in  Sanskrit.     In  the  Ramayana  we 

read  that  Rama  was  the  emperor  of  Ayodhyd 

(modem  Oudh),  and  his  power  extended  all  over 

northern   and   southern   India   as   far   down   as 

Ceylon.     From  the  Mah^bharata,  which  contains 

the  history  of  the  Hindus  who  lived  as  early 

as  1400  B.C.,  we  learn  that  Yudhishtliira  became 

the  emperor  of  India  after  the  battle  of  Kuruk- 

shetra.    His    successors,    Parikshit,   Janmejaya, 

120 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

and  many  others,  were  known  as  emperors. 
These  emperors  had  a  number  of  Rajahs  under 
them,  who  paid  allegiance  and  tribute  to  them. 
But  their  bond  could  break  at  any  time  for  very 
insignificant  causes. 

WTien  Alexander  the  Great  invaded  India,  there 
was  on  the  throne  the  most  powerful  Buddhist 
emperor,  Chandra  Gupta,  whose  capital  was 
Pataliputra,  modern  Patna,  on  the  river  Ganges. 
His  grandson  was  Asoka,  who  lived  in  260  B.C. 
and  became  the  most  celebrated  emperor  of 
those  daj^s.  He  was  like  Constantine  the  Great 
among  the  Buddhists.  He  made  Buddhism  the 
state  religion  of  India;  he  sent  missionaries  from 
Siberia  to  Ceylon,  from  China  to  Egypt,  and 
made  treaties  with  kings  of  foreign  countries. 
One  of  the  edicts  of  Asoka,  which  were  written 
during  his  lifetime,  says  that  he  made  treaties 
with  five  Greek  kings  who  were  his  contem- 
poraries, namely,  Antiochus  of  Syria,  Ptolemaos 
of  Egypt,  Antigonus  of  Macedon,  Magus  of 
C3n'ene,  and  Alexander  of  Epiros;  and  he  sent 
missionaries  to  those  places,  as  far  as  Alexandria, 
to  preach  the  Gospel  of  Buddha. 

121 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

Alexander  the  Great,  however,  invaded  only 
the  northwestern  corner  of  India,  and  defeated 
in  one  battle  some  of  the  hill-tribes,  but  after- 
wards, when  he  heard  of  the  power  and  strength 
of  Chandra  Gupta,  he  withdrew  his  troops  and 
returned  to  Greece.  His  successor,  Seleucus,  sent 
the  Greek  ambassador  Megasthenes,  who  lived 
for  several  years  at  the  court  of  this  great  em- 
peror. From  the  accounts  of  Megasthenes, 
which  are  the  most  authentic  historical  records 
that  we  can  gather  from  an  outsider,  we  learn 
many  facts  about  the  political  institutions  of 
the  Hindus  as  witnessed  by  a  foreigner  during 
the  fourth  century  B.C.  Megasthenes  left  a 
valuable  record  of  tlic  actual  work  of  administra- 
tion as  observed  by  him.  He  sa3's:  "Those  who 
have  charge  of  the  city  are  divided  into  six 
bodies  of  five  each.  The  members  of  the  first 
look  after  everything  relating  to  the  industrial 
arts.  Those  of  the  second  attend  to  the  enter- 
tainment of  foreigners.  To  those  they  assign 
lodgings,  and  they  keep  watch  over  their  modes 
of  life  by  means  of  those  persons  whom  they 
give  to  them  for  assistants.     They  escort  them 

122 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDLA. 

on  the  way  when  they  leave  the  country,  or,  in 
the  event  of  their  dying,  forward  their  property 
to  their  relatives.  They  take  care  of  them  when 
they  are  sick,  and.,  if  they  die,  bury  them.  The 
third  body  consists  of  those  who  inquire  when 
and  how  births  and  deaths  occur,  with  a  view 
not  only  of  levying  a  tax,  but  also  in  order  that 
births  and  deaths  among  both  high  and  low- 
may  not  escape  the  cognizance  of  government. 
The  fourth  class  superintends  trade  and  com- 
merce. Its  members  have  charge  of  weights 
and  measures,  and  see  that  the  products  in  their 
season  are  sold  by  public  notice.  No  one  is 
allowed  to  deal  in  more  than  one  kind  of  com- 
modity unless  he  pays  a  double  tax.  The  fifth 
class  supervises  manufactured  articles,  which 
they  sell  by  public  notice.  What  is  new  is  sold 
separately  from  what  is  old,  and  there  is  a  fine 
for  mixing  the  two  together.  The  sixth  and 
last  class  consists  of  those  who  collect  the  tenths 
of  the  prices  of  the  articles  sold." 

The  military  officers  "also  consist  of  six  divi- 
sions, with  five  members  to  each.     One  division 

is  appointed  to  cooperate  with   the  admiral  of 

123 


INDIA  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

the  fleet;  another  with  the  superintendent  of  the 
bullock-trains  which  are  used  for  transporting 
engines  of  war,  food  for  the  soldiers,  provender 
for  the  cattle,  and  other  military  requisites.  .  .  . 
The  third  division  has  charge  of  the  foot- 
soldiers,  the  fourth  of  the  horses,  the  fifth 
of  the  war-chariots,  and  the  sixth  of  the  ele- 
phants." 

In  addition  to  the  military  and  municipal 
officers,  there  was  a  third  class  whose  duty  was 
to  superintend  agriculture,  irrigation,  foiests,  and 
the  general  work  of  administration  in  rural  dis- 
tricts. "Some  superintend  the  rivers,  measure 
the  land,  as  is  done  in  Egypt,  and  inspect  the 
sluices  by  which  water  is  let  out  from  the  main 
canals  into  their  branches,  so  that  every  one 
may  have  an  equal  supply  of  it.  The  same  per- 
sons have  charge  also  of  the  huntsmen,  and  are 
entrusted  with  the  power  of  rewarding  or  pun- 
ishing them  according  to  their  deserts.  They 
collect  the  taxes,  and  superintend  the  occupa- 
tions connected  with  land,  as  those  of  the  wood- 
cutters, the  carpenters,  the  blacksmiths,  and 
the  miners.     They  construct  roads,  and  at  every 

124 


POLITICAL    INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

ten  stadia  set  up  a  pillar  to  show  the  by-roads 
and  distances."  * 

The  laws  of  war  among  the  Hindus  were  more 
humane  than  among  the  other  nations  of  the 
world,  and  Megasthenes  mentions  this  fact.  Ail 
these  Rajahs  governed  their  country  in  accordance 
with  their  laws  and  for  the  welfare  of  their  people, 
and  what  accoimts  we  get  from  Megasthenes 
are  exactly  the  same  as  those  we  read  in  Manu, 
Apastamba,  and  other  Sanskrit  law-books  of  an- 
cient time.  Regarding  the  military  law,  or  the 
laws  of  war,  the  Hindu  lawgiver  Apastamba 
says:  "The  Arj^ans  forbid  the  slaughter  of  those 
who  have  laid  down  their  arms,  of  those  who 
beg  for  mercy  with  flying  hair  or  joined  hands, 
and  of  fugitives."  (H,  5,  10,  11.)  "Let  him 
not  fight  with  those  who  are  in  fear,  intoxicated, 
insane  or  out  of  their  minds,  nor  with  those 
who  have  lost  their  armour,  nor  with  women, 
infants,  aged  men,  and  Brahmins."  (Bodhayana, 
I,  10,  18,  II.)  "The  wives  of  slain  soldiers 
were  always  provided  for."  (VasishthaXIX,  20.) 
Megasthenes  s^ys:     "For  whereas  among  other 

*  MacCrindle's  Translation. 
125 


mDIA   AND  HER   PEOPLE. 

nations  it  is  usual,  in  the  contests  of  war,  to 
ravage  the  soil,  and  thus  to  reduce  it  to  an 
uncultivated  waste,  among  the  Indians,  on  the 
contrary,  by  whom  husbandmen  are  regarded 
as  a  class  that  is  sacred  and  inviolable,  the  tillers 
of  the  soil,  even  when  battle  is  raging  in  the 
neighborhood,  are  undisturbed  by  any  sense  of 
danger.  .  .  .  Besides,  they  (the  warriors)  never 
ravage  an  enemy's  land  with  fire  nor  cut  down 
its  trees.  They  never  use  the  conquered  as 
slaves."  * 

The  duties  of  the  king,  according  to  the  law- 
giver Manu,  were  "to  protect  his  subjects,  to 
deal  impartial  justice,  and  to  punish  the  wrong- 
doer." (VII,  12,  i6.)  These  were  the  three 
principal  duties.  "Drinking,  gambling  and  licen- 
tiousness, and  hunting  were  the  most  perni- 
cious faults  of  the  king."  (VII,  50.)  The 
private  life  of  kings  is  described  by  Manu  thus: 
"The  king  should  rise  in  the  last  watch  of  the 
night,  and,  having  performed  his  personal  puri- 
fication and  devotional  exercises,  he  should  enter 
the  hall  of  audience  in  the  morning.     There  he 

*  MacCrindle's  Translation. 
126 


I 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF    INDIA. 

should  gratify  all  subjects  who  come  to  see  him, 
and,  having  dismissed  them,  he  should  take 
counsel  with  his  ministers  in  a  private  chamber." 
(VII,  145-147.)  "When  the  consultation  is  over, 
then  he  is  ready  to  take  care  of  his  physical  needs, 
meals,  and  so  on."  But  his  first  duty  is  to  give 
an  audience  to  his  subjects  and  to  gratify  their 
demands.  "In  the  afternoon,  the  king  should 
review  his  army,  inspect  his  fighting-men,  his 
chariots,  animals,  and  weapons,  and  then  perform 
his  twiUght  devotions.  After  this  he  should  give 
audience  to  his  secret  spies  and  hear  private 
reports."  (VII,  221-225.)  "The  king  was  al- 
ways assisted  by  his  council  of  seven  or  eight 
ministers,"  as  we  read  in  the  laws  of  Manu 
(VII,  54-63),  "who  were  versed  in  sciences, 
skilled  in  the  use  of  weapons,  and  descended  from 
nobie  and  well-tried  famihes.  Such  ministers 
used  to  advise  the  king  in  matters  of  peace  and 
war,  revenue  and  religious  gifts.  The  king  also 
employed  suitable  persons  for  the  collecting  of 
revenue,  and  in  mines,  manufactories,  and  store- 
houses; and  he  employed  ambassadors  for  car- 
rying   on    negotiations   with    rulers."     For   the 

127 


INDIA    AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

protection  of  villages  and  tovMis,  separate  officers 
were  appointed.  The  king  appointed  a  lord  over 
each  village,  over  ten  villages,  lords  of  twenty, 
of  a  hundred,  and  of  a  thousand  villages;  and 
these  lords  were  not  merely  governors,  but  they 
used  to  check  crime  and  protect  the  villages. 
These  were  the  special  duties  of  these  special 
officers.  They  were  like  superintendents.  Simi- 
larly, each  town  had  its  superintendent  of  all 
affairs,  who  personally  inspected  the  work  of 
all  officials  and  got  secret  information  about 
their  behavior  and  private  character,  because 
the  Hindu  law  says:  "The  servants  of  the  king, 
who  are  appointed  to  protect  the  people,  gener- 
ally become  knaves,  who  seize  the  property  of 
others;  let  him  protect  his  subjects  against  such 
men.'  (Manu,  VII,  115-123.)  From  this  you 
will  see  that,  in  ancient  times,  government  offi- 
cials used  to  become  knaves,  as  they  do  now  in 
a  highly  civilized  country  like  America.  Think 
of  the  time  when  this  law  was  written, — centuries 
before  Christ! 

The  income  of  the  state  from  the  royal  demesnes 

was    supplemented    by    taxes.     Manu    fixes    an 

128 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

income  tax  of  two  per  cent  on  cattle  and  gold. 
The  land  revenue  varied  from  one-sixth  to 
one-eighth  or  one-twelfth  of  the  crops,*  and 
this  was  much  less  than  the  land-revenue  tax 
under  British  rule.  Under  the  Hindu  rule,  the 
king  was  strictly  prohibited  from  exacting 
excessive  taxation.  He  was  allowed  to  take 
one-sixteenth  part  of  the  price  made  on  butter, 
earthen  vessels  and  stone  wares,  and  might 
exact  a  day's  service  in  each  month  from  arti- 
sans, mechanics,  and  other  working-people;  that 
is,  one  day  in  a  month  these  people  would 
give  their  service  free.  Of  course,  they  were 
maintained  by  the  king,  that  is,  they  were  fed 
by  the  king  at  that  time;  and  with  this  institu- 
tion, in  ancient  times,  they  could  erect  wonderful 
buildings,  palaces,  and  monuments  for  public 
use,  which  now  they  cannot  do  because  the  cost 
is  so  great. 

All  these  and  other  laws  regarding  administra- 
tion and  taxation  show  that  an  advanced  sys- 
tem of  government  prevailed  in  India  before  the 
beginning    of    the    Christian    era.     Megasthenes, 

*  Vide  Civilization  in  Ancient  India,  Vol.  II,  p.  102. 

129 


INDIA   AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

who  lived  in  India  in  the  fourth  century  before 
Christ,  as  also  the  Chinese  travellers,  Fa  Hian, 
who  visited  India  about  400  A.D.,  and  Houen 
Tsang,  who  came  to  India  about  630  a.d.  and 
resided  there  for  nearly  fifteen  years,  spoke 
in  the  highest  terms  of  praise  of  the  govern- 
ment and  administration  of  the  Hindu  Rdjahs. 
Frequently  we  hear  that  the  Hindus  were  so 
badly  governed  at  that  time  that  they  had  no 
peace  or  justice  and  were  constantly  engaged  in 
fighting;  but  these  witnesses  of  other  nations, 
who  came  from  other  countries  and  lived  in 
India,  left  records  which  speak  differently. 
They  do  not  cite  one  single  instance  of  a  people 
being  ground  down  by  taxes,  or  harassed  by  the 
arbitrary  acts  of  kings,  or  ruined  by  famines, 
plagues,  or  internecine  wars.  On  the  contrary, 
they  say:  "The  people  were  happy,  prosperous, 
enjoying  peace  and  justice.  Agriculture  flour- 
ished, the  fine  arts  were  cultivated."  Houen 
Tsang,  in  his  diary,  which  has  been  translated 
into  English  by  Samuel  Beal,  wrote  thus,  de- 
scribing the  administration  of  India:  "As  the 
administration  of  the  country  is  conducted  on 

ISO 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS    OF   INDIA. 

benign  principles,  the  executive  is  simple.  .  . . 
The  private  demesnes  of  the  crown  are  divided 
into  four  principal  parts:  the  first  is  for  carry- 
ing out  the  affairs  of  state  and  providing  sac- 
rificial offerings;  the  second  is  for  providing 
subsidies  for  the  ministers  and  chief  officers  of 
state;  the  third  is  for  rewarding  men  of  dis- 
tinguished ability;  and  the  fourth  is  for  charity 
to  religious  bodies,  whereby  the  field  of  merit 
is  cultivated.  In  this  way  the  taxes  on  the  peo- 
ple are  light,  and  the  personal  service  required 
of  them  is  moderate.  Each  one  keeps  his  own 
worldly  goods  in  peace,  and  all  till  the  ground 
for  their  subsistence.  Those  who  cultivate  the 
royal  estates  pay  a  sixth  part  of  the  produce  as 
tribute.  The  merchants  who  engage  in  corn- 
men,  e  come  and  go  in  carrying  out  their  trans- 
actions. The  river  passages  and  the  road  bar- 
riers are  open  on  payment  of  a  small  toll.  When 
the  public  works  require  it,  labour  is  exacted, 
but  paid  for.  The  payment  is  in  strict  pro- 
portion to  the  work  done. 

"The  military  guard  the  frontiers,  or  go  out 

to    punish    the    refractory.     They    also    mount 

131 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

guard  at  night  round  the  palace.  The  soldiers 
are  levied  according  to  the  requirements  of  the 
service;  they  are  promised  certain  pa3mients, 
and  are  publicly  enrolled.  The  governors,  min- 
isters, magistrates,  and  officials  have  each  a 
portion  of  land  assigned  to  them  for  their  per- 
sonal support." 

Houen  Tsang  also  says  that  tributary  kings 
from  China  sent  hostages  to  Kanishka,  the  great 
Buddhist  emperor,  who  reigned  in  Kashmir 
(Northwestern  India)  about  yS  a.d.,  and  he 
treated  them  with  special  favor,  and  set  apart 
for  their  residence  that  portion  of  the  country 
which  afterwards  was  named  Chinapati.  The 
Chinese  introduced  the  pear  and  the  peach  into 
India,  "wherefore  the  peach  is  called  Chindni 
and  the  pear  is  called  Chinarajaputra  (son  of 
the  Chinese  monarch)." 

Such  political  conditions  existed  in  India  from 
the  time  of  Megasthenes  down  to  Houen  Tsang; 
that  means  from  nearly  tlie  fourth  century  B.C. 
to  the  seventh  century  a.  d.  Besides  these,  the 
most  remarkable  feature  of  tlie  political  organi- 
zation  of  ancient    India   was   the   village   com- 

132 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS    OF   IKDIA. 

munity  and  municipal  institutions.     This  village 
community  was  called    "Panchayat,"  or   com- 
mittee of  five.     There  was  originally  a  commit- 
tee of  five,  then  aftenvards  it  was  increased  to 
twelve.     Each  community  formed  itself  into  an 
independent  little  republic,  which  managed  its 
own  affairs  and  governed  itself,  but  which  was 
bound  to  the  central  government  by  the  regular 
payment  of  an  assessment  or  tax  on  the  produce. 
Each  district,  again,  was  divided  into  territories 
which  were  governed  by  the  village  community, 
or    "Panchayat."     Under    this    self-government 
by   community,    every   individual   member   en- 
joyed absolute  political  freedom  and  independence. 
Each  had  full  voice  in  the  government.     This 
government  by  Panchayat  is  described  in  Manu 
and  in  other  law-books  of  ancient  India,  and  it 
has    always    existed    among    the    Hindus.     The 
people  first  elected  their  head-man,  or  president, 
who  was  a  kind  of  mayor,  and  who  was  paid  by  a 
fixed  proportion  of  land.     He  was  the  chairman 
of  the  village  or  town  council,  and  used  to  call 
regular   meetings.     The   next   important   officer 

of  the  community  was  the  notary,  or  local  at- 

133 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

tomey,  who  transacted  the  village  business  and 
kept  an  account  of  the  land  and  produce,  the 
rents  and  assessments.  Then  there  was  a 
Brahmin  priest,  a  village  schoolmaster,  a  barber, 
a  carpenter,  a  blacksmith,  a  cowman,  a  shoe- 
maker, a  potter,  a  washerman,  a  druggist,  an 
oilman,  the  watchman,  and  the  sweeper.  These 
made  up  the  village  community.  These  mem- 
bers discussed  and  managed  the  whole  affairs 
of  the  territory. 

From  the  time  of  Manu,  or  from  at  least  four 
hundred  years  before  Christ,  this  form  of  muni- 
cipal institution  has  existed  in  India,  undisturbed 
by  foreign  invasions  and  political  convulsions, 
internal  wars,  famine,  plague,  or  earthquake. 
Sir  Monier  Monier  Williams  says:  "And  here  I 
may  observe  that  no  circumstance  in  the  history 
of  India  is  more  worthy  of  investigation  than 
the  antiquity  and  permanence  of  her  village 
and  municipal  institutions.  The  importance  of 
the  study  lies  in  the  light  thereby  thrown  on  the 
parcelling  out  of  rural  society  into  autonomous 
institutions,  like  those  of  our  own  English  parishes, 

wherever   Aryan   races   have   occupied   the   soil 

134 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

in  Asia  or  in  Europe.     The   Indian  village  or 
township,  meaning   thereby  not  merely  a  col- 
lection of  houses  forming  a  village  or  town,  but 
a  division  of  territory,  perhaps   three  or   four 
miles  or  more  in  extent,  with  its  careful  dis- 
tribution of  fixed  occupations  for  the  common 
good,  with  its  intertwining  and  inter-dependence 
of  individual,  family,  and  communal  interests, 
with  its  provision  for  political  independence  and 
autonomy,  is  the  original  type,  the  first  germ, 
of  all  the  divisions  of  rural  and  civic  society  in 
mediaeval   and  modern  Europe.     It  has  existed 
almost   unaltered  since   the    description    of   its 
organization  in  Manu's  code,  two  or  three  cen- 
turies   before    the   Christian    era.     It    has   sur- 
vived all  the   religious,   political,   and  physical 
convulsions  from  which  India  has  suffered  from 
time    immemorial.     Invader   after   invader    has 
ravaged  the  country  with  fire  and  sword,  .  .  .  but 
the  simple,  self-contained  Indian  township  has 
preserved  its   constitution   intact,   its   customs, 
precedents,  and  peculiar  institutions,  unchanged 
and  unchangeable,  amid  all  other  changes.' 

*  Brihrninism  and  Hinduism,  p.  455. 
135 


"  * 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

During  the  Mahometan  rule  of  six  hundred 
years,  all  these  political  institutions  of  the  Hindus 
remained  unaltered.  They  were  never  modified 
or  disturbed.  The  Hindu  villagers  did  not  know 
that  they  were  governed  by  the  Mahometans. 
The  throne  was  occupied  by  a  Mahometan  or 
Mogul  emperor,  to  whom  the  native  Rajahs  and 
queens  paid  tribute,  but  beyond  that  they  had 
no  obligation;  they  were  quite  independent. 
Each  Rajah  had  his  own  laws,  his  own  court, 
and  his  own  separate  administraticn.  The 
government  of  the  country  according  to  the 
Hindu  system  has  always  been  continued  in 
the  native  states.  Even  at  the  present  time 
there  are  native  states  governed  by  Hindu 
Rdjahs  where  you  will  still  find*this  kind  of 
government.  The  Mahometans  never  gained 
absolute  control  over  the  whole  of  India.  Before 
the  advent  of  the  British  rule,  the  administra- 
tion of  justice,  the  repression  of  crime,  and  other 
functions  of  the  police,  the  collection  of  cesses 
and  taxes,  were  all  carried  out  by  the  govern- 
ment of  the  village  community.    To-day  in  British 

India   this  self-government   of   the   Hindus   has 

136 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

been  destroyed  by  the  short-sighted  pohcy  of 
the  British  autocrats,  and  its  place  has  been  given 
to  a  most  costly  system  of  judicial  administration, 
unparalleled  in  the  history  of  the  world.  They 
talk  about  English  justice.  Of  course  there  is 
justice  in  English  government,  but  it  is  very 
expensive  and  one-sided.  Indians  have  justice 
among  Indians,  but  if  an  Indian's  rights  are 
outraged  by  a  European  he  cannot  hope  for 
similar  justice.  The  poorer  classes,  furthermore, 
cannot  pay  for  justice  under  any  conditions;  it 
is  too  expensive.  The  present  oppression  of 
the  police  and  the  cruelty  of  revenue  collectors 
under  British  management  have  already  driven 
the  masses  to  the  verge  of  absolute  despair  and 
rebellion. 

Many  people  in  this  country  think  that  England 
conquered  India  by  force  of  arms,  but  history 
tells  us  that  some  English  merchants  first  came 
to  India  to  trade  at  the  time  when  the  Mahometan 
power  was  in  its  decline,  and  the  Hindus  were 
fighting  against  the  Mahometans  to  throw  off 
their  yoke  and  reestablish  Hindu  power  upon 
the  throne  of  Delhi.    At  this  time  of  anarchy 

137 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

and  revolution,  these  British  traders,  under  the 
name  of  the  East  India  Company,  took  the  side 
of  the  Mahometans  and  gained  the  confidence  of 
the  last  of  the  Mogul  emperors,  who  was  then 
merely  a  titular  sovereign.  He  had  lost  all 
power;  nobody  obeyed  him.  As  a  return  for 
what  he  had  received  from  the  East  India  Com- 
pany and  as  a  favor  to  Lord  Clive,  this  last 
of  the  Mogul  emperors,  in  1765,  gave  a  charter 
making  the  East  India  Company  of  British 
traders  the  Dewan,  or  administrators,  of  Bengal. 
Though  the  Great  Mogul  had  no  real  power  to 
do  such  a  thing,  still,  as  long  as  he  was  the  titular 
sovereign  of  India,  his  charter  gave  the  East 
India  Company  a  legal  status  in  the  country. 
The  officers  of  the  Company  held  that  charter  in 
their  hands  wherever  they  went.  Lord  Clive 
himself,  in  his  letter  to  the  Court  of  Directors 
from  Calcutta  dated  September  30,  1765,  writes: 
"The  assistance  which  the  Great  Moghal  had 
received  from  our  arms  and  treasury  made  him 
readily  bestow  this  grant  upon  the  Company." 
"I  mean  the  Dewanec,  which  is  the  superinten- 

dency  of  all  the  lands  and  the  collection  of  all 

138 


POLITICAL  INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

the  revenues  of  the  provinces  of  Bengal,  Behar, 
and  Orissa."  These  three  provinces  first  came  into 
the  hands  of  the  East  India  Company,  and  at 
that  period  the  revenue  from  them  was  enormous. 
Lord  Chve  writes  again:  "Your  revenues,  by 
means  of  this  acquisition,  will,  as  near  as  I  can 
judge,  not  fall  far  short,  for  the  ensuing  year,  of 
250  lacks  of  Sicca  Rupees,*  including  your  former 
possession  of  Burdwan,  etc.  Hereafter  they  will 
at  least  amount  to  twenty  or  thirty  lacks  more. 
Your  civil  and  military  expenses  in  time  of  peace 
can  never  exceed  sixty  lacks  of  Rupees;  the 
Nabob's  allowances  are  already  reduced  to  forty- 
two  lacks,  and  the  tribute  to  the  king  (the  Great 
Moghal)  at  twenty-six;  so  that  there  will  be 
remaining  a  clear  gain  to  the  Company  of  122 
lacks  of  Sicca  Rupees,  or  £1,650,900  sterling."  f 
"An  annual  remittance  of  over  a  million  and  a 
half  sterling  was  to  be  made  from  a  subject 
country  to  the  shareholders  (of  the  East  India 
Company)  in  Engliand."  t 

*  Three  rupees  make  one  dollar;    a  lack  was   100,000 
rupees. 

t  House  of  Commons  Third  Report,  1773,  Appendix, 
pp.  391-398. 

X  Economic  History  of  British  India,  p.  39. 

139 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

This  was  the  beginning  of  British  empire  in 
India.  That  annual  remittance  has  now  in- 
creased and  swelled  to  nearly  thirty  million  pounds 
sterling.  "The  scheme  of  administration  intro- 
duced by  Clive  was  a  sort  of  dual  government. 
The  collection  of  revenues  was  still  made  for  the 
(Mahometan)  Nawab's  exchequer;  justice  was 
still  administered  by  the  Nawab's  officers;  and 
all  transactions  were  covered  by  the  mask  of  the 
Nawab's  authority.  But  the  East  India  Com- 
pany, the  real  masters  of  the  country  derived 
all  the  profits;  and  the  Company's  servants 
practised  unbounded  tyranny  for  their  own  gain, 
overawing  the  Nawab's  servants,  and  converting 
his  tribunals  of  justice  into  instruments  for 
the  prosecution  of  their  own  purposes.*  It  is  a 
long  story;  time  will  not  permit  me  to  describe 
the  harrowing  tales  of  the  foul  and  treacherous 
methods  which  were  adopted  by  the  unworthy 
representatives  of  the  English  people,  under  the 
name  of  the  East  India  Company,  to  secure  for 
their  motherland  a  market-place  for  her  trade 
and  commerce,  and  to  bring  benefit  and  prosperity 

♦  Economic  History  of  British  India,  p.  43. 

HO 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS    OF   INDLV. 

to  the  British  nation,  which  was  at  that  time  the 
poorest  nation  in  Europe.  Those  who  have 
read  the  impeachment  of  Warren  Hastings  by 
Burke,  as  also  impartial  students  of  the  history 
of  the  East  India  Company,  are  already  acquainted 
with  the  brutal  policy  of  the  Company,  which  has 
ruined  the  most  prosperous  country  of  India. 
Zemindars  were  dispossessed  of  their  hereditary 
rights,  their  lands  were  let  to  the  highest  bidder 
by  public  auction,  trade  and  manufacture  were 
destroyed  by  monopoly  and  coercion,  prohibitive 
duties  were  charged  on  manufactured  articles, 
etc. 

Terrible  famines  began  for  the  first  time  with 
the  British  rule  in  India.  In  1770  there  was  a 
terrible  famine  in  the  district  of  Pumeah,  in 
Bengal,  in  which  above  one-third  of  the  popula- 
tion died  of  starvation;  but  the  revenue  from 
land-tax  was  exacted  with  such  tyranny  and 
oppression  that  even  during  that  famine  it  was 
larger  than  in  previous  years.  On  the  9th  of 
May,  1770,  the  Calcutta  Council  wrote  to  the 
Court  of  Directors:  "The  famine  which  has  ensued, 
the  mortality,  the  beggary,  exceed  all  description. 

141 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

Above  one-third  of  the  inhabitants  have  perished 
in  the  once  plentiful  province  of  Purneah,  and 
in  other  parts  the  misery  is  equal."  On  the 
I2th  of  February,  1771,  they  wrote:  "Notwith- 
standing the  great  severity  of  the  late  famine, 
and  the  great  reduction  of  the  people  thereby, 
some  increase  has  been  made  in  the  settlements 
(of  taxes)  both  of  the  Bengal  and  the  Behar 
provinces  for  the  present  year."  *  Mr.  Dutt 
says  in  his  Economic  History  of  India:  "Famines 
in  India  are  directly  due  to  a  deficien:y  in  the 
annual  rainfall;  but  the  intensity  of  such  famines 
and  the  loss  of  lives  caused  by  them  are  largely 
due  to  the  chronic  poverty  of  the  people.  If  the 
people  were  generally  in  a  prosperous  condition, 
they  could  make  up  for  local  failure  of  crops 
by  purchases  from  neighboring  provinces,  and 
there  would  be  no  loss  of  life.  But  when  the 
people  are  absolutely  resourceless,  they  cannot 
buy  from  surrounding  tracts,  and  they  perish 
in  hundreds  of  thousands,  or  in  millions,  whenever 
there  is  a  local  failure  of  crops."  f 

♦  Extracts  from  India  OfTicc  Records  quoted  in  Hun- 
ter's "Annals  of  Rural  Bengal,"  1868,  pp.  ai,  399. 

tP.   51. 

142 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS  OF   INDL\. 

The  reports  of  the  Indian  Famine  Commissions 
of  1880  and  1898  show  that  between  i860  and 
1900,  that  is,  within  forty  years,  there  were  ten 
widespread  famines  in  India.  In  i860  a  famine 
broke  out  in  Northern  India  and  the  loss  of  Ufa 
was  estimated  at  200,000,  but  was  probably 
much  larger;  in  1866  a  famine  in  Orissa  carried 
off  one- third  of  the  population,  or  about  a  million 
people;  in  1869  there  was  another  famine  in 
Northern  India,  during  which  at  least  1,200,000 
people  died;  in  1874  Bengal  was  visited  by 
famine,  but  the  land-tax  in  this  province  is 
light  and  is  permanently  settled;  the  people  are 
therefore  comparatively  prosperous  and  resource- 
ful, and  there  was  no  loss  of  life  from  this  famine. 
The  land-tax  of  Madras,  on  the  contrary,  is 
heavy  and  is  enhanced  from  time  to  time,  and 
the  people  are  poor  and  resourceless;  when, 
therefore,  a  famine  broke  out  there  in  1877,  five 
millions  perished.  A  third  famine  in  Northern 
India  in  1878  cost  the  Hves  of  1,250,000  people; 
and  during  the  famine  of  1889  in  Madras  and 
Orissa  the  loss  of  life  was  very  severe,  but  no 

official   figures   are   available.     In    1892,   again, 

143 


INDIA   AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

there  was  a  famine  in  Madras,  Bengal,  Burma, 
and  Rajputana,  causing  a  heavy  loss  of  life  in 
Madras  but  none  in  Bengal.  In  1897  famine 
swept  over  all  Northern  India,  Bengal,  Burma, 
Madras,  and  Bombay.  The  number  of  people  on 
relief  works  alone  rose  to  three  millions  in  the 
worst  months.  Deaths  were  prevented  in  Bengal 
and  elsewhere,  but  in  the  Central  Provinces  the 
death  rate  rose  from  an  average  of  thirty-three 
per  mille  to  sixty-nine  per  mille  during  the 
year.  The  famine  of  1900  in  the  Punjab, 
Rajputana,  the  Central  Provinces,  and  Bombay 
was  the  most  widespread  ever  known  in  India. 
The  number  of  persons  relieved  rose  to  six 
millions  in  the  worst  months.  In  Bombay,  in 
the  famine  camps,  so  Sir  A.  P.  Macdonnell, 
President  of  the  Famine  Commission,  reported, 
the  people  "died  like  flies."  "The  results  of 
the  three  famines  within  the  last  ten  years  (1891- 
1901),  and  of  the  increasing  poverty  of  the 
people,  are  shown  in  the  census  taken  in  March, 
1901.  The  population  of  India  has  remained 
stationary  during  the  last  ten  years.  There  is 
a  slight  increase  in  Bengal,  Madras,  and  Northern 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDU. 

India,  while  there  is  an  actual  decrease  of  some 
millions  in  Bombay,  the  Central  Provinces,  and 
the  Native  States  affected  by  recent  famines. 
In  other  words,  the  population  of  India  to-day 
is  less  by  some  thirty  millions  than  it  would 
have  been  if  the  nominal  increase  of  one  per  cent 
per  annum  had  taken  place  during  these  ten 
years."  * 

Warren  Hastings,  who  had  succeeded  CHve  as 
Governor  of  Bengal,  was  made  first  Governor- 
General  in   1772.     Pitt's     India  Bill  became  a 
law  in  1784.     It  removed  the  administration  of 
the   East    India   Company   from   the   hands   of 
directors  and  placed  it  under  the  control  of  the 
crown,    thus    compelling    some    reforms.     Lord 
Cornwallis  then  became  the  successor  of  Warren 
Hastings.     The  policy  of  all   of   the   governor- 
generals  under  the  East  India  Company  was  to 
extend  the  British  territory,  to  absorb  the  Native 
States  by  declaring  war  on  the  slightest  pretence, 
to  increase  the  revenue,  and  to  drain  the  country 
of  her  resources.     "The  people  of  India  have  no 
votes,    and    are    not    even    represented    in    the 

♦  Indian  Famines,  by  R.  C.  Dutt,  p.  2. 
145 


INDIA    AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

Executive    Councils    of    India.     They   have    no 
voice  in  the  matter  of  taxation  or  of  expenditure. 
They  have  no  share  in  the  work  of  adjusting  the 
finances  of  India.     Taxation  exceeds  ail  reason- 
able  limits   in  India,  and  the  proceeds  of  the 
taxation  are  not   all  spent   in   India.     A  large 
sum,    estimated    between    twenty    and    thirty 
millions  in  English  money,  is  annually  drained 
from    India    to    this    country    (England).     The 
disastrous  results  of  this  annual  drain  have  been 
described  by  many  EngUsh  writers  anc  admin- 
istrators throughout  the  century  which  has  just 
closed."  *     Sir  Thomas   Munro,   for  some   time 
Governor  of  Madras,  after  forty  years'  experience 
in  India,  wrote  in  1824:  "They  (natives  of  India) 
have  no  share  in  making  laws  for  themselves; 
little  in  administering  them,  except  in  very  sub- 
ordinate offices;   they  can  rise  to  no  high  station, 
civil  or  military;    they  are  everywhere  regarded 
as  an  inferior  race,  and  more  often  as  vassals  or 
servants  than  as  the  ancient  owners  and  masters 
of   the   country.  ...  All   the   civil   and   military 
offices  of  any  importance  are  now  held  by  Euro- 

♦  Indian  Famines,  by  R.  C.  Dutt,  p.  lo. 
146 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

pcans,  whose  savings  go  to  their  own  country." 
Mr.  Frederick  John  Shore,  of  the  Bengal  Civil 
Service,  wrote  in  1837:  "The  halcyon  days  of 
India  are  over;  she  has  been  drained  of  a  large 
proportion  of  the  wealth  she  once  possessed, 
and  her  energies  have  been  cramped  by  a  sordid 
system  of  misrule,  to  which  the  interests  of 
millions  have  been  sacrificed  for  the  benefit  of 
the  few."  Professor  H.  H.  Wilson,  the  noted 
English  historian,  also  says  of  the  annual  drain 
from  India:  "Its  transfer  to  England  is  an 
abstraction  of  Indian  capital  for  which  no  equiv- 
alent is  given;  it  is  an  exhausting  drain  upon 
the  country,  the  issue  of  which  is  paid  by  no 
reflux;  it  is  an  extraction  of  the  life-blood  from 
the  veins  of  national  industry,  which  no  subse- 
qutnt  introduction  of  nourishment  is  furnished 
to  restore."  John  Sullivan,  at  one  time  a  Mem- 
ber of  the  Government  of  Madras  and  President 
of  the  Board  of  Revenue,  writes  thus  in  one 
of  his  reports:  "As  to  the  complaints  which 
the  people  of  India  have  to  make  of  the  present 
fiscal  system,  I  do  not  conceive  that  it  is  the 

amount,  altogether,  that  they  have  to  complain 

147 


INDIA  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

of.  I  think  that  they  have  rather  to  com- 
plain of  the  appHcation  of  that  amount.  Under 
their  own  dynasties,  all  the  revenue  that  was 
collected  in  the  country  was  spent  in  the  country; 
but  under  our  rule,  a  large  proportion  of  the 
revenue  is  annually  drained  away,  and  without 
any  return  being  made  for  it;  this  drain  has  been 
going  on  now  for  sixty  or  seventy  years,  and 
it  is  rather  increasing  than  the  reverse.  .  .  .  Our 
system  acts  very  much  like  a  sponge,  drawing  up 
all  the  good  things  from  the  banks  of  the  Ganges, 
and  squeezing  them  down  on  the  banks  of  the 
Thames.  .  .  .  They  (the  people  of  India)  have 
no  voice  whatever  in  imposing  the  taxes  which 
they  are  called  upon  to  pay,  no  voice  in  framing 
the  laws  which  they  are  bound  to  obey,  no  real 
share  in  the  administration  of  their  own  country; 
and  they  are  denied  those  rights  from  the  insolent 
and  insulting  pretext  that  they  are  wanting  in 
mental  and  moral  qualifications  for  the  discharge 
of  such  duties."  * 

The  British  administrators,  in  the  first  part  of 
the   nineteenth    century,   did  all    they  could    to 

*  Report  of  the  Select  Committee,  p.  40a. 
148 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

promote  English  industries  at  the  sacrifice  of 
Indian  industries;  for  the  pohcy  of  English  ad- 
ministration in  India  is  shaped,  not  by  states- 
men and  philosophers,  but  by  merchants,  traders, 
and  manufacturers,  who  are  the  voters  of  Great 
Britain.  British  manufactures  were  forced  into 
India  through  the  agency  of  the  Company's 
Governor-General  and  commercial  residents,  while 
Indian  manufactures  were  shut  out  from  England 
by  prohibitive  tariffs,  as  the  following  table  will 
show. 

"Petitions  were  vainly  presented  to  the  House 
of  Common  against  these  unjust  and  enormous 
duties  on  the  import  of  Indian  manufactures 
into  England.  One  petition  against  the  duties 
on  sugar  and  spirits  was  signed  by  some  four 
hundred  European  and  Indian  merchants,"  * 
and  it  was  rejected  by  the  British  Government 
in  England.  The  policy  of  England  was  to  make 
Great  Britain  independent  of  foreign  countries 
for  the  raw  material  upon  which  her  valuable 
manufactures  depend,  and  to  make  India  the 
producer  of  raw  materials  for  English  manufac- 

♦  Economic  History  of  India,  p.  294. 
149 


INDIA    AND    HER    PEOPLE. 


< 

H 

Cm 

O 

W 
< 


n  ° 

u 

« 
0. 


I 


o 


o  o  o  o  o  o  o 

»*5  M    M    N    ro  fO  M 


O   «^  t^  O    1^  ft 


O 

a 

u 

1» 
a, 


4) 

•—4 

OS 
> 

C 

o 

V 

a, 

o 

ft 


S  o 

•»« 

WS 

c 

u  rt 

!M 

«;  bfl 

u 

Ci-u, 

u 

o 


O    O 


**J 


73 
C 

D 

a 

o 
a, 


J3 
O 

Oh 


p.  fij   O   -3   u 


<© 


J 

M  o 


M      r>»    M      f^    W      Ml    CO 


e 

u)  O 
8 


O 
O 


<0 

a' 

w 


O 

rf 

c 
ca 
u 


3  t/j 

e  t^  £i 

_    OT    P 
C 

o 


1.1  i^ 


UJ 


4->   O 


3 
<->   CT  •'> 


OSoOOhJS 


(3 

"a 

M    U 


3 

^^ 

v> 

•c 


120 


^  O  •"   3^^ 
C/3H       SW       {/3 


o 
o 

it 

c 
o 

o 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

tones.  The  German  economist,  Frederick  List, 
said:  "Had  they  sanctioned  free  importation 
into  England  of  Indian  goods,  the  English  manu- 
factories would  have  come  to  a  stand."  *  Thus, 
within  fifty  years,  India  was  reduced  from  the 
state  of  a  manufacturing  to  that  of  an  agricultural 
country. 

Cotton  and  silk  fabrics,  shawls  and  woolen 
fabrics,  sugar,  tobacco,  rum,  dyes,  saltpetre,  coffee, 
tea,  steel,  gold,  iron,  copper,  coal,  timber,  opium, 
and  salt,— all  these,  and  grains  of  all  kinds, 
India  had  traded  with  other  nations,  both  Asiatic 
and  European;  but,  under  the  pretence  of  free 
trade,  England  has  now  compelled  the  Hindus 
to  receive  the  manufactured  products  of  England 
free  of  duty,  and  has  imposed  prohibitive  duties 
or  Indian  manufactures  imported  to  England. 
No  Indian  industry  of  any  kind  has  been  encour- 
aged by  the  British  Government  during  the  last 
one  hundred  and  fifty  years.  And  no  less  than 
two  hundred  and  thirty-five  articles  were  subjected 
to  internal  duties  under  the  East  India  Company. 
Section  6  of  the  Cotton  Duties  Act  of  1896  runs 

*  The  National  System  of  Political  Economy,  p.  42, 

151 


im)lA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

thus:  "There  shall  be  levied  and  collected  at 
every  mill  in  British  India,  upon  all  cotton  goods 
produced  in  such  mill,  a  duty  at  the  rate  of  3^ 
per  centum  on  the  value  of  such  goods."  And 
Mr.  Dutt,  in  commenting  upon  this  Act,  says: 
"As  an  instance  of  fiscal  injustice,  the  Indian  Act 
of  1896  is  unexampled  in  any  civilized  country 
in  modern  times.  Most  civilized  governments 
protect  their  home  industries  by  prohibitive 
duties  on  foreign  goods.  The  most  thorough  of 
Free  Trade  Governments  do  not  excist  home 
manufactures  when  imposing  a  moderate  customs 
duty  on  imported  goods  for  the  purposes  of 
revenue.  In  India,  where  an  infant  industry 
required  protection,  even  according  to  the 
maxims  of  John  Stuart  Mill,  no  protection  has 
ever  been  given.  Moderate  customs,  levied  for 
the  purposes  of  revenue  only,  were  sacrificed  in 
1879  and  1882.  Home-manufactured  cotton 
goods,  which  were  supposed  to  compete  with 
imported  goods,  were  excised  in  1894.  And 
home  goods  which  did  not  compete  with  foreign 
goods  were  excised  in  1896.  Such  is  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  interests  of  an  unrepresented 

152 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

nation  are  sacrificed."  *  This  will  give  you  a 
rough  idea  of  how  India  has  prospered  in  her 
economic  condition  during  British  rule. 

A  special  liw  still  exists  under  the  English 
Government  to  provide  laborers  for  the  cultiva- 
tion of  tea  in  Assam.  "A  dark  stain  is  cast  on 
this  industry  by  what  is  known  as  the  'slave-law' 
of  India.  Ignorant  men  and  women,  once  in- 
duced to  sign  a  contract,  are  forced  to  work  in 
the  gardens  of  Assam  during  the  term  indicated 
in  the  contract.  They  are  arrested,  punished, 
and  restored  to  their  masters  if  they  attempt  to 
run  away;  and  they  are  tied  to  their  work  under 
penal  laws  such  as  govern  no  other  form  of 
labor  in  India.  Hateful  cases  of  fraud,  coercion, 
and  kidnapping,  for  securing  these  labourers, 
have  been  revealed  in  the  criminal  courts  of 
Bengal,  and  occasional  acts  of  outrage  on  the  men 
and  women  thus  recruited  have  stained  the 
history  of  tea-gardens  in  Assam.  Responsible 
and  high  administrators  have  desired  a  repeal 
of  the  penal  laws,  and  have  recommended  that 
the    tea  gardens    should    obtain    workers    from 

*  India  in  the  Victorian  Age,  p.  543. 
1^ 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

the  teeming  labor  markets  of  India  under  the 
ordinary  laws  of  demand  and  supply.  But  the 
influence  of  capitalists  is  strong;  and  no  Indian 
Secretary  of  State  or  Indian  Viceroy  has  yet 
ventured  to  repeal  these  penal  laws,  and  to 
abolish  the  system  of  semi-slavery  which  still 
exists  in  India."  * 

Now  let  us  see  what  is  the  present  political 
condition  of  the  Indian  people:  "The  East 
India  Company's  trade  was  abolished  in  1833, 
and  the  Company  was  abolished  m  1858,  but  their 
policy  remains.  Their  capital  was  paid  off  by 
loans,  which  were  made  into  an  Indian  Debt,  on 
which  interest  is  paid  from  Indian  taxes.  The 
empire  was  transferred  from  the  Company  to  the 
Crown,  but  the  people  of  India  paid  the  purchase- 
money."  t  In  1858  the  public  debt  was  seventy 
million  pounds,  which  had  been  piled  up  by  the 
East  India  Company  during  the  one  hundred 
years  of  their  rule  in  India,  while  they  were 
drawing  tribute  from  India,  financially  an  unjust 
tribute,    exceeding    150    millions,    not    counting 


*  India  in  the  Viclorian  Age,  p.  353. 
I  Economic  History  of  India,  p.  xii. 
164 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS  OF   INDIA. 

interest.  Besides  this,  they  had  charged  India 
with  the  cost  of  the  wars  in  China,  Afghanistan, 
and  in  other  foreign  countries.  India,  therefore, 
in  reaUty  owed  nothing  at  the  close  of  the  Com- 
pany's rule.  Her  Pubhc  Debt  was  a  myth. 
On  the  contrary,  there  was  a  balance  of  over  loo 
millions  in  her  favor  out  of  the  money  that  had 
been  drawn  from  her.  The  administration  of 
the  Crown  doubled  this  Public  Debt  in  nineteen 
years,  bringing  it  up  to  139  million  pounds  in 
1877,  when  the  Queen  became  Empress  of  India. 
Over  40  millions  sterling  of  this  represented  the 
cost  of  the  Mutiny  wars,  which  was  thrown  on 
the  revenues  of  India.  India  was  also  made  to 
pay  a  large  contribution  to  the  cost  of  the  Abys- 
sinian war  of  1867.  In  1900  the  debt  amounted 
to  224  millions  sterling.  The  construction  of 
railways  by  Guaranteed  Companies  or  by  the 
State,  beyond  the  pressing  needs  of  India  and 
beyond  her  resources,  was  largely  responsible 
for  this  increase.  It  was  also  largely  due  to  the 
Afghan  wars  of  1878  and  1897. 

India  pay^  interest  on  this  debt,  which  annually 
increases.     Besides  this,  she   pays    for   all   the 

155 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

officers,  civil  and  military,  and  a  huge  standing 
army,  pensions  of  officers,  and  even  the  cost  of 
the  India  Building  in  London,  as  well  as  the 
salary  of  every  menial  servant  in  that  house. 
For  1901-2  the  total  expenditure  charged  against 
revenue  was  ;^7i,394,282,  out  of  which  £17,368,- 
655  was  spent  in  England  as  Home  Charges, 
not  including  the  pay  of  European  officers  in 
India,  saved  and  remitted  to  England.  These 
Charges  were  as  follows: 


1.  Interest  on  Debt  and  Management  of  Debt  £3,052,410 

2.  Cost  of  Mail  Service,  Telegraph  Lines,  etc., 

charged  to  India 227,288 

3.  Railways,  State,  and  Guaranteed  (Interest 

and  Annuities) 6,416,373 

4.  Public  Works  (Absentee  Allowances,  etc.)-  5^.214 

5.  Marine  Charges  (including  H.  M.  Ships  in 

Indian  Seas) i73.5oa 

6.  Military  Charges  (including  pensions) 2,945,614 

7.  Civil  Charges  (including  Secretary  of  State's 

EstabUshment,     Cooper's     Hill     College, 

Pensions,  etc.) 2.435.37° 

8.  Stores  (including  those  for  Defence  Works)     2,057,934 

Total -£17.368,655 


The  following,  again,  is  a  comparative  table  of 

salaries  paid  out; 

156 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 


CQ 

> 

c9 

z 

55 
I 

3 

I 

Eurasians. 

C 

i 

£ 
3 
w 

In  Thousands  of  Rupees. 

Total 
Salaries 

of 
Natives. 

Total 
Salaries 
of  Eura- 
sians. 

Total 
Salaries 
of  Euro- 
peans. 

Civil  department. 
Military 

10 

I 
4 

121 1 
854 
23Q 

9 

947 
12 

10 

151 
11 

45 

25.274 
13,268 

3,415 
113 

Public  works 

Incorporated     local 
funds 

60 

15 

2313 

1002 

207 

42,070 

Besides  these  105  officers  drawing  Rs.,  10,000 
a  year  or  more  are  employed  by  the  railway 
companies;  they  are  all  Europeans,  and  their 
salaries  amount  to  16  lacks  and  28  thousand 
rupees  (about  $542,667).  Among  the  officers, 
who  are  paid  between  Rs.  5000  and  Rs.  10,000  a 
year,  we  find  421  natives  in  the  civil  department 
as  against  1207  Europeans  and  96  Eurasians. 
In  the  military  department  25  natives  are 
employed  and  1699  Europeans  and  22  Eurasians; 
while,  in  the  Department  of  Public  Works,  there 
are  85  natives,  as  against  549  Europeans  and  3 
Eurasians. 

Mr.  Alfred  Webb  (late  M.P.),  who  has  studied 

the  subject  with  care,  says:    "In  charges  for  the 

157 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

India  Office  (in  London);  for  recruiting  (in 
Great  Britain,  for  soldiers  to  serve  in  India); 
for  civil  and  military  pensions  (to  men  now  living 
in  England,  who  were  formerly  in  the  Indian 
service);  for  pay  and  allowances  on  furloughs 
(to  men  on  visits  to  England);  for  private  remit- 
tances and  consignments  (from  India  to  England); 
for  interest  on  Indian  Debt  (paid  to  parties  in 
England);  and  for  interest  on  railways  and  other 
works  (paid  to  shareholders  in  England), — there 
is  annually  drawn  from  India,  and  spent  in  the 
United  Kingdom,  a  sum  calculated  at  from 
;^25,ooo,ooo  to  ;^30, 000,000"  (between  $125,000,- 
000  and  $150,000,000). 

It  would  have  been  bad  enough  if  this  drain 
had  continued  for  a  few  years,  or  even  for  one 
year,  but  it  began  with  the  day  when  India 
came  under  England's  power  and  has  been 
kept  up  ever  since.  Of  this  Mr,  Brooks  Adams 
writes:  "Very  soon  after  Plasscy  (fought  in  1757) 
the  Bengal  plunder  began  to  arrive  in  London, 
and  the  effect  seems  to  have  been  almost  instan- 
taneous. .  .  .  Possibly  since  the  world  began,  no 

investment  has  ever  yielded  the  profit   reaped 

158 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

from  the  Indian  plunder."  *  The  stream  of 
wealth  ruthlessly  drawn  from  the  conquered 
people  of  India,  and  poured  from  Indian  treasuries 
into  English  banks,  between  Plassey  and  Waterloo 
(fifty-seven  years),  has  been  variously  calculated 
at  from  ;^5oo, 000,000  to  ^1,000,000,000.  The 
"Westminster  Gazette"  of  London,  April  24, 
1900,  estimates  the  drain  from  India  to  England, 
during  the  closing  twenty-five  years  of  the 
nineteenth  century,  to  have  been  £500,000,000 
($2,500,000,000).  It  would  be  impossible  to 
believe  these  enormous  figures  if  they  were  not 
taken  from  authentic  records.  Can  we  wonder 
that  India  to-day  is  so  impoverished?  Could 
any  nation  withstand  so  merciless  and  unceasing 
a  drain  upon  its  resources? 

The  popular  belief  is,  that  England  has  sunk 
her  enormous  capital  in  the  development  of 
India;  but  the  truth  is,  that  England  has  not 
spent  a  cent  in  governing  India.  (Compare 
this  with  the  Colonial  Governments.)  The  In- 
dian Government  means  to-day  the  government 
of  a   bureaucracy,   which   includes  the  Viceroy 

♦  Law  of  Civilization  and  Decay,  pp.  259-364. 

159 


INDIA    AND    HER  PEOPLE. 

and  the  Members  of  the  Executive  Council, 
the  Commander-in-Chief,  the  Mihtary  Mem- 
ber, the  Home  Member,  the  PubHc  Works  Mem- 
ber, the  Finance  Member,  and  the  Legal  Mem- 
ber. The  people  are  not  represented  in  this  ^ 
Council;  their  agriculture,  their  landed  interests, 
their  trades  and  industries,  are  not  represented; 
there  is  nut,  and  never  has  been,  a  single  Indian 
member  in  the  Council.  The  members  are 
high  English  officials,  who  draw  large  salaries 
and  get  pensions  for  life  after  their  service  is 
over. 

Then  in  each  large  Indian  province  there  is 
a  Legislative  Council,  and  some  of  the  members 
of  these  smaller  councils  are  elected  under  the 
Act  of  1892.  The  principal  function  of  the 
Legislative  Council  is  legislation.  In  theory 
it  exercises  control  over  finance,  but  in  prac- 
tice the  budget  is  submitted  to  the  autocracy 
merely  for  criticism;  the  representatives,  how- 
ever, can  exercise  no  control  over  its  being 
passed. 

The  Council  consists  of  twenty-five  members, 
four    of   whom    are    Indians,    recommended   by 

1(>0 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF    IKDIA. 

certain  constituencies  but  appointed  by  the 
Viceroy.  He  has  the  power  to  appoint  any  one 
he  pleases.  He  calls  them  elected,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  argument.  The  four  Indians  sit  at  one 
end  of  the  table  and  the  Englishmen  at  the 
other  end.  Beginning  with  the  Indians,  each 
one  reads  the  speech  he  has  prepared  in  order 
of  seniority,  each  speech  being  prepared  with- 
out knowledge  of  what  the  others  will  say, 
consequently  without  reference  to  what  they 
have  said.  There  is  no  real  discussion.  The 
Viceroy  may  turn  its  course  as  he  pleases.  The 
representatives  cannot  produce  any  impression 
on  the  Council,  nor  can  they  divide  the  Council 
or  shape  the  decision  in  any  way.  It  is  indeed 
no  representation  of  the  natives  in  the  proper 
sense  of  the  term. 

The  Viceroy  of  India  is  under  the  orders 
of  the  Indian  Secretary  of  State,  who  is  a  mem- 
ber of  the  English  Cabinet.  The  Secretary  of 
State  lives  in  England,  six  thousand  miles  away 
from  the  governed  people.  He  is  assisted  by 
a  Council  of  ten  retired  Anglo-Indian  officials, 

who  seek  the  interest  of  their  own  nation.     The 

161 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

whole  system  is,  as  Sir  William  Hunter  calls  it, 
an  "oligarchy"  which  does  not  represent  the 
people. 

The  government  of  India  is  as  despotic  as  it 
is  in  Russia,  because  three  hundred  millions  of 
people  who  are  governed  have  neither  voice 
nor  vote  in  the  government.  The  interest  of 
the  British  nation  i3  the  first  aim  of  the  present 
system  of  government.  People  pay  heavy  taxes 
of  all  kinds,  and  that  is  all.  The  government 
sends  out  expeditions  to  Soudan,  Egypt,  China, 
Tibet,  and  other  places  outside  of  India,  and 
then  the  poor  people  of  India  are  forced  to 
pay  the  enormous  cost  of  these  expeditions, 
amounting  to  millions  of  dollars.*  The  land- 
tax,  income  tax,  and  various  kinds  of  taxes 
are  higher  than  in  any  other  civilized  part  of 
the  world.  "In  India  the  State  virtually  in- 
terferes with  the  accumulation  of  wealth  from 
the  soil,  intercepts  the  incomes  and  gains  of 
the  tillers,  and  generally  adds  to  its  land-revenue 
demand  at  each  recurring  settlement,  leaving  the 
cultivators  permanently  poor.     In   England,   in 

•  Vide  India  in  the  Victorian  Age,  p.  604. 
162 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDLA. 

Germany,  in  the  United  States,  in  France,  and 
other  countries,  the  State  widens  the  income 
of  the  people,  extends  their  markets,  opens 
out  new  sources  of  wealth,  identifies  itself  with 
the  nation,  grows  richer  with  the  nation.  In 
India  the  State  has  fostered  no  new  industries 
and  revived  no  old  industries  for  the  people; 
on  the  other  hand,  it  intervenes  at  each  recur- 
ring land  settlement  to  take  what  it  considers 
its  share  out  of  the  produce  of  the  soil."  * 

"But  the  land-tax  levied  by  the  British  Gov- 
ernment is  not  only  excessive,  but,  what  is  worse, 
it  is  fluctuating  and  uncertain  in  many  prov- 
inces. In  England,  the  land-tax  was  between 
one  shilling  and  four  shillings  in  the  pound, 
i.e.,  between  5  and  20  per  cent,  of  the  rental, 
during  a  hundred  years  before  1798,  when  it 
was  made  perpetual  and  redeemable  by  William 
Pitt.  In  Bengal  the  land-tax  was  fixed  at 
over  90  per  cent,  of  the  rental,  and  in  Northern 
India  at  over  80  per  cent,  of  the  rental,  between 
1793  and  1822."  t 


*  Economic  History  of  British  India,  p.  xi, 
t  Ibid.  p.  ix. 

163 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

To-day  the  masses  of  people  in  India  live  on  from 
two  to  five  cents  a  day  and  support  their  faimilies 
with  these  earnings.  Expecting  to  have  their 
grievances  removed  by  the  government,  they 
have  been  agitating  for  the  last  twenty  years 
by  calling  annual  public  meetings  and  special 
public  meetings,  where  the  best  classes  of  edu- 
cated people  have  been  represented.  Although 
the  Indian  Government  has  spared  no  pains  to 
stop  all  such  agitations,  still  the  people  have 
been  passing  resolutions  and  sending  them  to 
the  Viceroy  and  to  the  Secretary  of  State. 
Not  one  single  word  of  encouragement  has  ever 
come  from  the  despotic  rulers,  who  are  deter- 
mined to  follow  the  steps  of  the  Russians  in 
their  methods  of  administration.  Indeed,  Sir 
Henry  Cotton  says:  "Even  the  Russian  Gov- 
ernment, which  we  are  accustomed  to  look 
upon  as  the  ideal  of  autocracy,  is  not  such  a 
typical  autocracy  as  the  Government  of  India." 

Ambitious,  unsympathetic  young  civilians  go 

out  to  India  for  a  few  years  to  exploit  the  country, 

satisfy  their  greed  and  self-interest,  and  return 

home  to  live  like  lords,  drawing  upon  the  taxes 

164 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS    OF   INDIA. 

of  the  impoverished  millions.  I  will  give  you 
an  illustration  of  Lord  Curzon's  administra- 
tion. Lord  Curzon  was  the  most  unpopular 
Viceroy  ever  in  India.  His  policy  was  one  of 
interference  and  distrust.  He  is  no  believer  in 
free  institutions  or  in  national  aspirations.  He 
took  away  the  freedom  of  the  press,  which  was 
steadily  gaining  in  weight  and  importance,  by 
passing  the  Official  Secrets  Act.  The  policy  of 
his  administration  was  to  keep  all  civil  as  well 
as  all  military  movements  of  the  government 
secret.  He  sent  the  expedition  to  Tibet.  He 
wasted  the  resources  of  the  country  on  the 
vain  show  and  pomposity  of  the  Durbar  while 
millions  were  dying  of  famine  and  plague.  He 
condemned  the  patriotic  and  national  spirit  of 
the  Indians,  and  lastly  he  carried  out  the  Roman 
policy  of  divide  and  rule  by  partitioning  the 
Province  of  Bengal,  simply  to  cripple  the  unity 
of  the  educated  natives,  as  also  of  seventy  mil- 
lions of  inhabitants.  .\11  these  and  many  acts 
he  carried  out  with  such  despotism  and  high- 
handedness, against  the   unanimous   opinion   of 

seventy  million  people,  that  they  were  driven  to 

165 


INDIA   AND  HER   PEOPLE. 

boycott  all  English  goods  and  manufactures. 
The  fire  of  boycott  has  spread  all  over  the 
country,  like  wildfire  in  a  forest.  The  people 
have  unanimously  appealed  to  the  Viceroy  and 
to  the  Secretary  of  State  again  and  again,  but 
all  the  higher  officials  of  India  and  England 
have  turned  deaf  ears  to  them.  It  is  to  be  hoped 
that  this  boycott  will  bring  the  English  auto- 
crats and  despots  to  their  senses. 

The  people  of  India  are  loyal  and  peace-loving, 
but  they  are  discontented  and  impoverished  after 
carrying  for  one  hundred  and  fifty  years  the 
burden  of  an  unsympathetic  alien  government. 
There  would  have  been  continuous  rebellion  and 
mutiny  had  they  not  so  long  depended  upon 
passive  resistance  with  the  expectation  that 
some  day  the  famous  proclamation  of  the  late 
Queen  Victoria  would  be  carried  into  effect. 
On  the  morrow  of  the  dark  mutiny  Queen 
Victoria  proclaimed: 

"We  desire  no  extension  of  our  present  terri- 
torial possessions;  and,  while  we  will  permit  no 
aggression    upon    our    dominions    or    our    rights 

to  be  attempted  with  impunity,  we  shaU  sanc- 

IGG 


POLITICAL    INSTITUTIONS    OF   INDIA. 

tion  no  encroachment  on  those  of  others.  We 
shall  respect  the  rights,  dignity,  and  honor  of 
Native  Princes  as  our  own;  and  we  desire  that 
they,  as  well  as  our  own  subjects,  should  enjoy 
that  prosperity  and  social  advancement  which 
can  only  be  secured  by  internal  peace  and  good 
government. 

"We  hold  ourselves  bound  to  the  Natives  of 
our  Indian  territories  by  the  same  obligations 
of  duty  which  bind  us  to  all  our  subjects,  and 
those  obligations,  by  the  blessing  of  Almighty 
God,  we  shall  faithfully  and  conscientiously 
fulfil. 

"Firmly  relying  ourselves  on  the  truth  of 
Christianity,  and  acknowledging  with  gratitude 
the  solace  of  religion,  we  disclaim  alike  the 
right  and  the  desire  to  impose  our  convictions 
on  any  of  our  subjects.  We  declare  it  to  be 
our  royal  will  and  pleasure  that  none  be  anywise 
favored,  none  molested  or  disquieted,  by  reason 
of  their  religious  faith  and  observances,  but 
that  all  shall  alike  enjoy  the  equal  and  impar- 
tial protection  of  the  law;    and  we  do  strictly 

charge   and   enjoin   all   those   who   may   be   in 

167 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

authority  under  us  that  they  abstain  from  all 
interference  with  the  religious  belief  and  wor- 
ship of  any  of  our  subjects,  on  pain  of  our  high- 
est displeasure. 

"And  it  is  our  further  will  that,  so  far  as 
may  be,  our  subjects,  of  whatever  race  or  creed, 
be  freely  and  impartially  admitted  to  offices  in 
our  service,  the  duties  of  which  they  may  be 
qualified,  by  their  education,  ability,  and  in- 
tegrity, duly  to  perform." 

(Lord  Curzon,  however,  openly  declared  that 
all  Indians  were  disqualified  by  reason  of  their 
race. ) 

This  proclamation  was  repeated  by  King 
Edward  VII  on  the  day  of  his  coronation.  But 
have  the  Anglo-Indian  bureaucracy  shown  any 
desire  to  do  the  things  which  were  promised 
by  the  late  Empress  and  the  present  Emperor, 
King  Edward?     No. 

People  have  now  organized  themselves,  have 
sent  delegates  to  England  and  America,  and 
have  awakened  to  the  truth  of  what  John  Stuart 
Mill  said:  "The  government  of  a  people  by 
itself  has  a  meaning  and  a  reality,  but  such  a 

168 


POLITICAL   INSTITUTIONS   OF   INDIA. 

thing  as  government  of  one  people  by  another 
does  not  and  cannot  exist.  One  people  may 
keep  another  for  its  own  use,  a  place  to  make 
money  in,  a  In  mi  an  cattle  farm  for  the  profit 
of  its  o%vn  inhabitants." 

The  natives  of  India  are  now  determined  to 
stand  on  their  own  feet,  but  it  is  a  hard  prob- 
lem for  an  enslaved  nation  to  raise  their  heads 
while  the  dominant  sword  of  a  powerful  alien 
government  is  held  close  to  their  necks.  If 
the  people  of  America  wish  to  know  what  would 
have  been  the  condition  of  the  United  States 
under  British  rule,  let  them  look  at  the  poHtical 
and  economic  condition  of  the  people  of  India 
to-day. 

Well  has  it  been  said  by  Mr.  Reddy,  an  Eng- 
lish friend  of  India:  "England,  through  her  mis- 
sionaries, offered  the  people  of  India  thrones 
of  gold  in  another  world,  but  refused  them 
a  simple  chair  in  this  world."  * 

*  India,  Oct.  13,  1905. 
169 


V. 
EDUCATION    IN    INDIA. 

Education  in  India  can  be  divided  into  four 
periods:  The  first,  the  pre-Buddhistic,  or  before 
the  sixth  century  B.C.;  the  second,  the  Bud- 
dhistic period,  from  500  B.C.  to  the  tenth  cen- 
tury A.D.;  the  third,  the  Mahometan;  and  the 
fourth,  the  period  under  British  rule. 

In  order  to  get  a  correct  idea  of  the  educa- 
tion of  a  people,  we  must  first  be  familiar  with 
the  civilization  of  that  people,  because  the 
standard  of  education  must  go  parallel  with 
the  culture  and  civilization  of  a  nation.  As 
we  have  already  seen,  the  earliest  civilization 
of  the  Hindus  began  in  the  Vedic  period.  His- 
tory tells  us  that  during  that  time  the  Indo- 
Aryans  developed  their  voluminous  scriptural 
works  known  as  the  Vedic  literature,  which 
consists   of   the   Rig   Veda,   Yajur   Veda,   Sdma 

170 


EDUCATION    IN    INDU. 

Veda,  and  Atharva  Veda,  with  their  Brahmanas, 
Aranyakas,  and  Upanishads.  All  these  are  in 
the  Sanskrit  language  and  are  the  most  ancient 
Scriptures  of  the  world.  The  Hindus  of  to-day 
consider  these  Vedas  as  revealed  just  as  other 
nations  believe  in  their  Scriptures  as  revealed. 
Long  before  the  art  of  writing  was  known  these 
Vedas  were  studied,  committed  to  memory, 
and  taught  from  mouth  to  mouth.  In  those 
early  days  the  study  of  these  Sacred  Scriptures 
formed  the  principal  feature  in  the  education  of 
the  boys  and  girls  of  the  Brahmins,  Kshatriyas, 
and  Vaishyas. 

The  Ufe  of  a  Hindu  at  that  time  was  divided 
into  four  periods.  The  first  was  that  of  the 
student.  The  Aryan  boys  were  initiated  as  stu- 
dents between  the  ages  of  eight  and  twelve. 
They  then  v/ent  to  the  teacher's  house,  re- 
mained there  and  studied  the  Vedas.  As  in 
this  age  the  students  of  civilized  countries  live 
in  the  universities  for  several  years,  so  in  ancient 
times  the  Hindu  boys  used  to  leave  their  homes 
and  stay  with  their  teachers.     Some  lived  with 

them   for   twelve  years,   some   for   twenty-four, 

171 


INDIA    AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

others    for    thirty-six    or   forty-eight     years,   in 
accordance  with  their  desire  to  master  one,  two, 
three,  or  four  Vedas.     When  they  had  finished 
these  years  of  study  under  various  instructors 
and  professors,   the  students   returned   to   their 
homes,  after  making  a  handsome  gift  to  their 
masters.     According  to  Hindu  custom,  no  teacher 
should  ever  sell  his  knowledge  or  receive  any 
salary    in    return    for   his    instruction,    but    the 
students  were  allowed  to  make  presents  to  their 
masters  at  the  close  of  their  studies.     Having 
returned  home,  they  married  and  settled  them- 
selves   as    householders.     Some,    however,    did 
not  return,  but  devoted  their  whole  life  to  the 
study  of  various  Shastras  or  sciences. 

The  main  object  of  education  at  that  time 
was  the  moral  and  spiritual  culture  of  the  soul, 
the  attainment  of  God-consciousness  and  the 
knowledge  of  the  various  sacrifices  that  are 
described  in  the  Vedas.  Along  with  the  Vedas 
the  students  had  to  learn  the  six  Veddngas  or 
limbs  of  the  Vedas.  These  were  regarded  as 
the  most  important  branches  of  Scriptural  study. 
The  first  was  Shikshd  or  the  science  of  phonetics, 

\T2, 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

that  is,  the  science  which  explains  the  correct 
pronunciation  of  the  Sanskrit  words  and  texts 
used  in  the  Vedas.  The  second  was  Chhanda, 
or  metre.  The  Vedic  hymns  have  different 
metres,  and  one  must  be  famihar  with  them  in 
order  to  read  or  chant  correctly.  The  scholars 
and  professors  of  Sanskrit  in  Europe  and  America 
find  great  difficulty  in  pronouncing  Sanskrit 
words  and  sentences  because  their  tongues  arc 
not  flexible  enough  to  express  the  minute  shades 
of  difference  that  exist  in  the  sounds  of  Sans- 
krit words.  The  Hindus,  however,  used  to 
study  metre,  as  also  the  science  of  pronuncia- 
tion and  grammar.  At  that  time  (even  as  early 
as  1400  B.C.)  they  had  a  scientific  grammar. 
The  Greek  and  Sanskrit  languages  have  the 
best  grammars,  but  the  Sanskrit  is  the  most 
perfect  grammar  that  exists  in  the  world.  Then 
Nirukta,  the  fourth  branch,  was  the  science  which 
describes  the  etymology,  the  meanings  of  differ- 
ent words,  as  well  as  the  use  of  the  same  word 
in  various  senses.  Also  there  was  Kalpa,  which 
includes  Shrauta-sutras,  or  the  laws  about  sac- 
rifices,   Dharma-sutras,    or    laws    regarding    the 

173 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

duties  of  a  true  citizen,  Grihya-sutras,  the  rules 
of  domestic  life,  and  Sulva-sutras,  the  geomet- 
rical principles  for  constructing  sacrificial  altars. 
And  the  last  branch  was  Jyotisha,  or  astronomy. 
In  order  to  fix  the  time  for  Vedic  sacrifices  they 
had  to  study  astronomy.  Without  knowing 
astronomy  they  could  not  understand  the  Vedas 
and  could  not  perform  any  of  the  sacrifices. 
For  this  reason  we  find  many  astronomical 
references  in  the  Vedas. 

These  were  the  main  branches  of  study  to 
which  every  Hindu  belonging  to  the  upper 
three  classes — Brahmins,  Kshatriyas,  and  Vaish- 
yas — was  entitled.  Besides  this  private  educa- 
tion in  the  house  of  some  teacher,  who,  as  I 
have  already  said,  took  no  salary,  there  were 
public  places  for  instruction.  The  courts  of 
the  enlightened  kings  and  MahdrAjahs  were  the 
principal  seats  of  learning  where  education  was 
bestowed  free  of  charge;  and  there  were  also 
the  Parishads,  which  corresponded  to  the  uni- 
versities of  Europe.  "At  the  period  of  transi- 
tion from  the  Vedic  to  the  Brahmanic  stage  of 

religious  development  about  1200  B.C.  the  courts 

174 


EDUCATION   IN    INDIA. 

of  the  kings  were  the  centers  of  culture.  .  .  . 
At  a  later  period,  looo  B.C.,  there  arose  Brah- 
manic  settlements,  called  Parishads,  which  we 
might  call  collegiate  institutions  of  learning."  * 
These  public  institutions  were  started  and 
established  by  Brahmin  professors  and  scholar?. 
The  students  in  them  used  to  stay  with  the 
teachers  and  do  some  work  in  their  households 
in  return  for  free  board  and  tuition.  Professor 
Max  Miiller,  in  his  "History  of  Sanskrit  Litera- 
ture," says  that  a  ''Partshad  used  to  consist 
of  21  Brahmins  well-versed  in  philosophy,  theol- 
ogy, and  law.  Sometimes  three  or  four  learned 
Brahmin  scholars  would  form  a  small  Parishad 
in  a  village."  In  the  Upanishads  we  find  men- 
tion of  this  kind  of  ancient  Hindu  university 
system.  For  instance,  in  the  Brihadaranyaka 
Upanishad,  VI,  2,  we  read  that  Svetaketu  went 
to  the  Parishads  of  the  Panchalas  for  education. 
In  these  colleges  were  taught  the  Vedas, 
philosophy,  theology,  and  Hindu  law,  civil  and 
criminal, — law  of  agriculture,  of  property,  of 
usury,  laws  of  inheritance  and  partition.     These 

♦  Education  in  India,  W.  I.  Chamberlain,  Ph.D.,  p.  20. 

175 


INDIA  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

taws  still  govern  Hindu  society  even  under 
British  rule.  England  has  not  succeeded  in 
changing  the  Hindu  laws  and  has  not  found 
any  others  more  just  or  more  perfect  than  those 
of  the  Hindus.  This  is  not  an  exaggeration. 
Students  of  law,  who  have  studied  Roman  and 
European  law  for  years,  cannot  complete  their 
course  without  studying  Hindu  law. 

I  have  already  shown  in  the  first  lecture  that 
there    were    six    schools    of    philosophy    among 
the  Hindus  of  the  pre-Buddhistic  peri>d,   that 
is,  between  1400  and  600  B.C.    These  six  schools  of 
philosophy  included  logic,  psychology,  the  science 
of  numbers  and  the  evolution  theory  of  Kapila, 
the   atomic   theory   of   Kan^da,   the   science   of 
thought,  metaphysics,  and  the  monistic  science 
and  philosophy  of  Vedanta.     The  students  re- 
ceived instruction  in  these  various  branches  in 
the   Parishads   or   universities.     Arithmetic,   Al- 
gebra, Geometry,  Trigonometry,  Decimal  nota- 
tion,   and   Astronomy  were   also   taught   during 
the   pre-Buddhistic   period.     You    may   be   sur- 
prised to  know  that  in  those  ancient   times  such 
sciences   and   philosophies   were   known    to   the 

17il 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

Hindus;  but  it  is  a  matter  of  history  that  these 
various  branches  of  science  and  philosophy  owed 
their  origin  to  the  Vedic  rehgion  of  India.  Geom- 
etry was  developed  from  the  rules  for  the  con- 
struction of  Vedic  altars  as  described  in  the 
Vedas.  For  instance,  it  is  told  there  to  de- 
scribe a  circle,  make  a  triangle,  or  inscribe  a 
triangle  in  a  circle,  and  so  on.  When  geometry 
fell  into  disuse  in  the  Buddhistic  period,  after 
sacrifices  were  no  longer  made,  algebra  took 
its  place.  "The  science  of  algebra  indeed  re- 
ceived a  remarkable  degree  of  development  in 
India;  the  application  of  algebra  to  astronom- 
ical investigations  and  to  geometrical  demon- 
strations is  a  peculiar  invention  of  the  Hindus; 
and  their  manner  of  conducting  it  has  received 
the  admiration  of  modem  European  mathe- 
maticians." * 

Besides  these,  the  great  epics  of  Ramdyana 
and  Mahabharata,  which  contain  the  ancient 
national  history  of  the  Hindus  as  well  as  the 
essence  of  all  Hindu  sciences  and  philosophies, 
came  into  existence  during  the  pre-Buddhistic 

*  Civilization  in  Ancient  India,  Vol.  II,  p.  246. 

177 


INDIA  AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

period.  They  were  studied  by  all  classes  of 
people,  both  men  and  women.  They  were 
written  especially  for  those  classes  who  were 
not  fitted  for  Vedic  studies.  The  Vedas  and 
the  various  sciences  and  philosophies  existed 
among  the  Hindus  long  before  the  art  of  writ- 
ing was  known  in  the  world.  Can  you  believe 
that  the  hundreds  of  volumes  which  have  been 
handed  down  to  us  were  origincilly  learned  and 
taught  from  memory?  They  were  transmitted 
from  generation  to  generation  by  word  of  mouth. 
What  a  marvellous  memory  the  people  of  that 
time  had!  The  Mahdbh^rata,  for  example,  con- 
tains one  hundred  thousand  verses  in  Sanskrit, 
and  when  I  was  in  India  I  knew  a  Brahmin 
lady  who  could  recite  every  sentence  from  the 
beginning  to  the  end;  and  there  are  many 
scholars  who  can  recite  a  volume  with  its  com- 
mentary without  looking  at  the  book.  All 
sciences  and  philosophies  were  originally  written 
in  Sanskrit,  but  lately  they  have  been  trans- 
lated into  the  various  spoken  dialects,  of  which 
there  are  at  present  about  one  hundred  and 
fifty  in  India.     Through  these  the  masses  obtain 

178 


EDUCATION   IN    INDIA. 


their  moral  and  spiritual  training.  Public  lec- 
tures and  readings  are  given  in  almost  every 
Hindu  village  for  the  education  of  the  illiterate 
classes.  Even  to-day,  in  all  Hindu  communi- 
ties, this  old  system  of  reading  a  Sanskrit  verse 
and  then  explaining  it  in  the  vernacular  lan- 
guage is  very  common.  Those  who  cannot  read 
or  write  receive  moral  and  spiritual  instruction 
through  these  Kathakatd,  or  public  readings. 

There  were  also  medical  schools  for  the  study 
of  Ayurveda,  or  the  medical  science.     The  word 

A 

"Ayus"  means  hfe,  and  "veda"  means  wisdom, 
knowledge,  and  hence  science.  Ayurveda,  there- 
fore, is  the  "science  of  hfe."  It  contains  the 
Hindu  materia  medica,  which  is  much  older  than 
the  sixth  century  B.C.  It  was  taught  long 
before  the  time  of  Hippocrates,  the  "father 
of  medicine,"  who  hved  about  400  B.C.  Even 
in  that  early  pre-Buddhistic  age,  Hindu  medi- 
cine received  scientific  treatment,  and  there  were 
separate  schools  and  colleges  for  medical  stu- 
dents. During  the  Buddhistic  period,  medical 
science  made  considerable  progress,  and  ex- 
haustive scientific  works  were  written  on  medi- 

179 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

cine.      Among  these,  the  works  by  Charaka  and 
Sushruta  were  the  best.     Their  writings  became 
so  widely  known  that  translations  of  them  were 
already  familiar  to  the  Arabs  in  the  eighth  century 
A.D.,  at  the  time  of  Haroun-al-Raschid;  and  they 
still  remain  to-day  the  standard  medical  works 
among    Hindu    physicians.     They    contain    ex- 
haustive  chapters  on  anatomy  and  physiology; 
on  sjmiptoms,  diagnoses,  and  causes  of  various 
diseases,  and  on  their  proper  treatment.     Their 
words  may  be  archaic,  but  they  give  a  scien- 
tific treatment  which  was  unknown  in  any  other 
part  of  the  world  at  that  time. 

Chemistry,  in  Sanskrit  "Rasayana,"  was  also 
famihar  to  the  Hindus  from  very  early  times. 
"Nor  is  this  surprising,  as  the  materials  for 
preparing  many  chemical  products  have  abounded 
in  India.  Rock-salt  was  found  in  Western  India; 
borax  was  obtained  from  Tibet;  saltpetre  and 
sulphate  of  soda  were  easily  made;  alum  was 
made  in  Cutch;  and  sal  ammonia  was  familiar 
to  the  Hindus;  with  lime,  charcoal,  and  sulphur 
they   were    acquainted    from    time    immemorial. 

The  alkalies  and  acids  were  early  known  to  the 

180 


EDUCATION  IN   INDIA. 


Hindus,  and  were  borrowed  from  them  by  the 
Arabians.  The  medicinal  use  of  metals  was  also 
largely  known.  We  have  notices  of  antimony 
and  of  arsenic,  of  medicines  prepared  with  quick- 
silver, arsenic,  and  nine  other  metals.  The 
Hindus  were  acquainted  with  the  oxides  of 
copper,  iron,  lead,  tin,  zinc,  and  lead;  with  the 
sulphurets  of  iron,  copper,  antimony,  mercury, 
and  arsenic;  with  the  sulphates  of  copper,  zinc, 
and  iron;  with  the  diacetate  of  copper  and  the 
carbonates  of  lead  and  iron."  *  Dr.  Royle  also 
says,  in  his  essay  on  ' '  Hindu  Medicine  " :  "  Though 
the  ancient  Greeks  and  Romans  used  metallic 
substances  as  external  applications,  it  is  gener- 
ally supposed  that  the  Arabs  were  the  first  to 
prescribe  them  internally.  .  .  .  But  in  the  works 
of  Charaka  and  Sushruta,  to  which,  as  has  been 
proved,  the  earliest  of  the  Arabs  had  access, 
we  find  numerous  metallic  substances  directed 
to  be  given  internally."  f  History  tells  us  that 
Alexander  the  Great  kept  Hindu  physicians  in 
his  camp  for  the  treatment  of  diseases  which 

*  Civilization  in  Ancient  India,  Vol.  II,  p.  254. 
t  Royle,  p.  45. 

181 


INDIA    AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

Greek  physicians  could  not  heal;  and  in  the 
eighth  century  a.d.  the  Mahometan  Badshaw, 
Haroun-al-Raschid,  retained  in  his  court  two 
Hindu  physicians.  As  early  as  260  B.C.  the 
Buddhist  emperor  Asoka  also  established  many 
public  hospitals,  not  only  for  men,  women,  and 
children,  but  also  for  animals. 

Megasthenes,  after  his  long  residence  at  the 
court  of  Chandra  Gupta  in  the  fourth  century 
B.C.,  testified  that  he  found  among  the  Hindus 
various  kinds  of  schools  suited  to  the  different 
CcLstes.  There  were  Brahmin  schools,  whose 
function  was  to  train  priests  and  teachers;  war- 
rior schools,  where  the  pupils  received  military 
training;  industrial  schools  for  the  merchant 
class;  and  schools  for  the  lowest  caste,  where 
manual  labor  was  taught. 

During  the  Buddhistic  age,  and  before  the 
Mahometan  invasion,  Hindu  culture  in  every 
branch  of  science  and  philosophy  made  tremen- 

A 

dous  progress.     Arya  Bhatta,  the  noted  Hindu 

astronomer,  who  lived  about  476  a.d.  and  who 

is  called  the  Newton  of  India,  wrote  many  works 

on    algebra   and    astronomy.     It   was    he    who 

182 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

first  discovered  the  rotation  of  the  earth  on  its 
own  axis.  As  a  Jewish  writer  says:  "The 
theory  that  the  earth  is  a  sphere  revolving  on 
its  own  axis,  which  immortahzed  Copernicus, 
was  previously  known  only  to  the  Hindus,  who 
were  instructed  in  the  truth  of  it  by  Aryabhatta 
in  the  first  century  before  the  common  era."  * 
He  also  discovered  the  true  cause  of  solar  and 
lunar  eclipses,  and  it  was  he  who,  for  the  first 
time,  grasped  the  idea  of  gravitation  toward  the 
center  (caUed  in  Sanskrit  Mddhydkarshan,  that 
is,  attraction  towards  the  center),  and  correctly 
calculated  the  distance  of  the  earth's  circum- 
ference. His  successor,  Varahamihira,  another 
noted  astronomer  (500-587  a.d.),  left  valuable 
works,  especially  his  "Brihat  Sanhita,"  which 
covered  ahnost  every  department  of  natural 
history  and  was  encyclopedic  in  its  nature. 
Brahma  Gupta,  who  lived  in  628  a.d.,  described 
in  his  astronomical  system  the  true  places  of  the 
planets,  the  calculation  of  lunar  and  solar  eclipses, 
and   wrote   a   treatise   on    spherics.     There   are 


♦  Jewish  Encyclopedia,  Vol.  XII,  p.  689. 
18S 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

still  some  ruins  of  Hindu  observatories  in  Benares 
and  other  cities. 

In  the  sixth  century  A.D.,  this  golden  age  of 
science  and  letters  reached  its  climax  in  the 
reign  of  the  great  Hindu  emperor,  Vikram5,ditya, 
who  was  what  Augustus  was  to  the  Romans, 
what  Alfred  was  to  the  Enghsh,  what  Charle- 
magne was  to  the  French,  what  Asoka  was  to 
the  Buddhists,  and  what  Haroun-al-Raschid  was 
to  the  Mahometans.  He  was  the  great  supporter 
of  learning  and  education  among  the  Hindus. 
To  the  learned,  to  the  illiterate,  to  poets,  to 
story-tellers,  to  dramatists  and  novelists,  to 
astronomers,  lexicographers,  and  historians,  to 
the  old  and  to  the  young,  the  name  of  Vikram^- 
ditya  is  as  familiar  in  India  as  the  name  of  any 
great  patron  of  science,  drama,  poetry,  and 
education  of  modem  Europe.  He  had  nine 
gems  in  his  court,  and  the  finest  among  them 
was  Kaliddsa,  the  great  Hindu  dramatist.  He 
was  as  great  as  Shakespere  of  England;  indeed, 
he  is  called  the  Shakespere  of  India.  His  best- 
known  drama,  "Sakuntal^,"  has  been  translated 

into   more    than   one   European   language,    and 

184 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

has  been  considered  by  such  great  scholars  as 
Augustus  William  Von  Schlegel,  Alexander  Von 
Humboldt,  and  Goethe  as  one  of  the  dramatic 
masterpieces  of  the  world.  Goethe  speaks  thus 
of  it: 

"Wouldst  thou  the  life's  young  blossoms  and  the  fruits 

of  its  decline, 
And    all    by   which    the    soul    is    pleased,    enraptured, 

feasted,  fed, — 
Wouldst  thou  the  earth  and  heaven  itself  in  one  sweet 

name  combine? 
I  name  thee,  O  SakuntalA,  and  all  at  once  is  said." 

You  have  heard  something  about  "  SakuntalA," 
"  Vikramorvasi,"  and  the  other  dramas  and  mas- 
terpieces which  Kalidasa  left.  His  "  Megha-duta," 
or  the  "  Cloud  Messenger,"  can  stand  side  by  side 
with  the  best  poems  of  Shelley  and  Wordsworth, 
if  not  higher.  One  critic  says:  "Like  Words- 
worth, he  looked  upon  Nature  with  the  eye  of 
a  lover,  and  his  knowledge  of  the  physical  laws 
is  superior  to  that  of  any  other  Hindu  poet." 
Kalidasa's  successors, — BhS,ravi,  Dandin,  B^a- 
bhatta,  Subandhu,  Bhartrihari,  Bhavabhuti, — all 
these  great  Hindu  poets  and  dramatists  lived  in 
the  sixth  century  a.d.    Their  writings  are  still 

185 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

studied   in   all   Sanskrit  colleges,   as   they  were 
twelve  centuries  ago. 

The  fables  of  Panchatantra  and  of  Hitopa- 
desha,*  which  gave  foundation  to  ^Esop's  fables 
and  to  the  fables  of  Pilpay,  are  also  still  studied 
in  the  primary  schools  of  India.  They  came 
into  existence  in  the  sixth  century  after  Christ, 
and  have  been  translated  into  all  the  civilized 
languages  of  the  world.  Panchatantra  "was 
translated  into  Persian  in  the  reign  of  Naushar- 
wan  (531-572  A.D.).  .  .  .  The  Persian  ransla- 
tion  was  rendered  into  Arabic,  and  the  Arabic 
translation  was  rendered  into  Greek  by  SjTneon 
Seth  about  1080.  ...  A  Spanish  translation  of 
the  A^rabic  was  published  about  1251.  The  first 
German  translations  were  published  in  the 
fifteenth  century."  f  Besides  these,  the  vast 
literature  known  as  the  "  Purdnas  "  is  still  studied 
by  all  classes  of  people,  both  men  and  women, 
as  they  were  a  thousand  years  ago. 

From  this  you  will  get  an  idea  of  the  civil iza- 

*  The  fables  of  llitopadcsha  have  been  translated  by 
Sir  Edwin  Arnold  under  the  name  of  "The  Book  of 
Good  Counsels." 

t  Civilization  in  Ancient  India,  Vol.  II,  p.  297. 

186 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

tion  of  the  Hindus  during  the  ancient  pre- 
Buddhistic  and  mediaeval  ages,  and  you  will  be 
able  to  form  some  conception  of  what  kind  of 
education  they  received  before  the  advent  of 
the  British  in  India.  The  Hindus,  it  must  be 
remembered,  have  gone  through  a  great  many 
national  disasters,  calamities,  and  vicissitudes; 
and  during  the  Mahometan  occupation,  which 
began  in  the  eleventh  century  a.d.  and  con- 
tinued for  nearly  six  hundred  years,  they  made 
very  little  progress  in  scientific  education.  They 
had  to  fight  to  protect  themselves  against  the 
invaders,  and  turn  their  attention  to  their  polit- 
ical condition;  consequently  they  neglected  the 
study  of  science.  Furthermore,  the  Mahometan 
sword  and  fire  destroyed  the  glorious  monuments 
of  Hindu  culture  and  ci\alization.  The  Mahome- 
tan rulers  never  encouraged  any  kind  of  study 
outside  of  the  reading  of  the  Koran,  for  which 
classes  were  attached  to  the  mosques.  It  is 
said  that  the  Mogul  Emperor  Arangzeb,  in  the 
seventeenth  century,  established  universities  in 
all  the  principal  cities  and  erected  schools  in  the 

smaller  towns,  but  it  is  now  difficult  to  get  any 

187 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

historical  evidence  to  support  this  statement. 
A  Mahometan  beheves  that  the  essence  of  all 
literature  and  of  all  science  is  summed  up  in  the 
Koran,  so  nothing  outside  of  the  Koran  is  to 
be  studied.  If  all  that  is  worth  knowing  is  in 
the  Koran,  then  there  is  no  use  of  studying  any 
other  books.  So  they  destroyed  aU  the  Scrip- 
tures, and  all  the  works  on  science  and  phi- 
losophy, which  they  could  get  hold  of.  But  the 
caste  prejudice  of  the  Hindus  kept  the  Brahmins 
from  mixing  with  the  Mahometans,  anc  one  of 
the  most  beneficial  effects  of  the  caste  system 
was  the  preservation  of  the  Sacred  Books  of  the 
Hindus  from  the  destructive  hands  of  fanatical 
Mussulmans. 

Mahometan  elementary  schools  were  started 
for  the  study  of  the  Persian  and  Arabic  lan- 
guages'. Many  Hindu  boys  used  to  study 
these  languages  in  Mahometan  schools.  They 
had  no  feeling  of  prejudice,  so  far  as  education 
was  concerned.  In  the  advanced  Mahometan 
schools,  there  were  complete  courses  in  rhetoric, 
logic,  law,   ritual,  and  theology;    all  these  and 

the  Arabic  language  were  taught  to  Mussulman 

188 


EDUCATION   IN  INDIA. 

students,  but  not  to  the  Hindus.  Euclid  and 
Ptolemy's  astronomy,  and  other  branches  of 
natural  philosophy,  were  also  taught  in  the  high 
schools  for  Mahometans  at  the  time  when  British 
rule  began  in  India,  about  the  middle  of  the 
eighteenth  century. 

The  pioneers  of  Western  education  in  India 
were  the  Christian  missionaries.  Some  Danish 
missionaries  arrived  at  Tranquebar,  in  Southern 
India,  in  1706,  and  at  once  began  to  study  the 
vernacular  languages  in  order  to  teach  the 
Bible.  They  founded  some  schools  for  that  pur- 
pose, which  were  of  minor  importance.  Their 
object  was  to  convert  the  students  to  Christianity. 
In  1727  the  first  English  mission  estabhshed  in 
India  a  society  for  promoting  Christian  knowl- 
edge, but  it  did  not  make  much  progress  until 
the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  century,  when 
the  third  missionary  society  of  the  Enghsh 
Baptists  was  established  in  Bengal.  Their  repre- 
sentatives were  Carey  and  Marshman,  who  were 
men  of  abiHty  and  distinction.  They  studied 
the  vernacular  languages,  and  established  schools 
for  the  teaching  of  the  Bible. 

180 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

The  East  India  Company,  however,  hesitated 
to  impart  Enghsh  education  to  the  natives  of 
India.  When,  in  1792,  Wilberforce  proposed  to 
add  two  clauses  to  the  Charter  Act  of  the  year 
for  sending  out  schoolmasters  to  India,  the  di- 
rectors of  the  Company  strongly  objected  to 
the  proposal.  "On  that  occasion  one  ot  the 
Directors  stated  that  we  had  just  lost  America 
from  our  folly  in  having  allowed  the  establish- 
ment of  schools  and  colleges,  and  that  it  would 
not  do  for  us  to  repeat  the  same  ;ict  of  folly  in 
regard  to  India;  if  the  natives  required  any- 
thing in  the  way  of  education  they  must  come 
to  England  for  it."  *  This  policy  still  exists  at 
the  bottom  of  the  educational  system  estab- 
lished by  the  British  Government  in  modern 
India.  Although  this  policy,  or  rather  fear, 
has  apparently  been  modified,  and  schools,  col- 
leges, and  universities  have  been  founded,  still 
the  government  of  India  does  not  feel  safe  in  giv- 
ing the  natives  substantial  higher  education  of 
the  same  nature  as  can  be  obtained  in  England, 

*J.  C.  Marshman's  Evidence,  Lords'  Second  Report, 

1853- 

190 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

Europe,  or  America.  It  was  on  account  of  this 
fear  that  the  only  educational  institutions  which 
were  established  up  to  1792  were  a  Mahometan 
College  at  Calcutta,  founded  by  Warren  Hast- 
ings in  1781,  and  a  Sanskrit  College  at  Benares, 
founded  by  Lord  Comwallis  in  1792.  The  main 
object  of  these  institutions  was  to  train  law 
officers,  both  Mahometan  and  Hindu,  to  help 
the  Enghsh  judges  in  the  judicial  administra- 
tion of  the  country.  For  twenty  years  longer 
the  English  Government  was  disinclined  to  spread 
English  education  in  India. 

In  1813  the  British  Parliament,  for  the  first 
time,  offered  the  sum  of  £10,000  from  the  revenue 
of  India,  to  be  appropriated  for  the  education 
of  the  people  of  the  three  provinces  of  Bengal, 
Bombay,  and  Madras.  Nothing,  however,  was 
done  for  ten  years  until  1823.*  In  the  mean- 
time the  Hindus  themselves,  under  the  leader- 
ship of  the  great  Hindu  reformer,  whose  name 
is  known  all  over  the  world.  Rajah  Ram  Mohun 
Roy,  became  anxious  to  learn  the  English  lan- 

*  Vide  Sir  Charles  Trevelyan's  Evidence,  Lords'  Second 
Report,  1853. 

101 


INDIA    AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

guage.  He  was  the  first  Hindu  who  learned 
English  thoroughly  by  his  private  exertions,  for 
there  was  no  school  at  that  time;  and  he  was 
the  first  native  of  India  who  went  to  England, 
where  he  died.  His  grave  still  exists  in  Bristol. 
At  that  time  there  was  in  Calcutta  an  illiterate 
English  watchmaker,  Mr.  David  Hare  by  name. 
He  was  a  man  of  great  energy  and  practical 
sense.  Rfijah  Ram  Mohun  Roy  consulted  with 
him  and  planned  to  open  an  English  seminary. 
The  project  started  in  1815,  and  this  energetic 
Mr.  Hare  had  some  circulars  written  out  and 
distributed.  He  first  succeeded  in  interesting 
some  of  the  English  officers  and  some  representa- 
tive Hindus,  and  in  1817  he  established  a  school 
at  Calcutta  which  is  known  to-day  as  the  Hare 
School.  It  was  the  first  respectable  English 
seminary  in  Bengal,  and  was  founded  by  the 
Hindus  tliemselves  before  the  British  Govern- 
ment did  anything  for  education  in  India.* 

In  1820  the  Government  of  India  started  an 
inquiry  to   find  out   the   indigenous  method  of 

♦  Vide  Rev.  Alexander  Duff's  Evidence,  Lords'  Second 
Report,  1853. 

192 


EDUCATION   IN   INDL\. 

education  among  the  Hindus  in  the  Presidencies 
of  Madras,  Bombay,  and  Bengal;  but  for  two 
years  nothing  was  done.  In  1822  Sir  Thomas 
Munroe,  the  Governor  of  Madras,  finding  the 
decay  of  literature  and  arts  and  the  deep  igno- 
rance of  the  masses,  started  an  investigation, 
from  which  he  discovered  that  the  number  of 
Hindu  schools  and  colleges  under  the  old  Hindu 
system,  in  the  Presidency  of  Madras  alone, 
amounted  to  12,498  among  a  population  of 
something  over  twelve  millions.  In  his  report 
to  the  Court  of  Directors,  which  was  made  known 
in  1826,  he  says:  "I  am  inclined  to  estimate  the 
portion  of  the  whole  population  who  receive 
school  education  to  be  nearer  one-third  than 
one-fcurth  of  the  whole.  The  state  of  education 
exhibited,  low  as  it  is,  compared  with  our  own 
country,  is  higher  than  it  was  in  most  European 
countries  at  no  very  distant  time."  * 

In  1823  Lord  Elphinstone,  Governor  of  Bom- 
bay, found  that  there  was  in  the  Bombay  Presi- 
dency alone  1705  Hindu  schools  and  colleges; 
and    in    1835    Lord    Bentinck    discovered    3355 

*  Minute  dated  March  10,  1S26. 
193 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

Hindu  schools  among  a  population  of  seven 
millions  in  Bengal  alone.  This  will  prove  how* 
the  Hindus  have  always  cared  for  knowledge, 
culture,  and  education.  In  every  village  there 
was  an  elementary  school  where  the  village  boys 
were  taught  reading,  writing,  arithmetic,  and 
the  elements  of  mensuration.  These  elementary 
schools  were  called  Pdthasdlds,  or  school-houses. 
Besides  these,  there  were  collegiate  institutions 
like  the  Parishads,  which  I  have  already  described, 
for  higher  education  in  grammar,  mathematics, 
rhetoric,  poetry,  astronomy,  and  other  branches 
of  science  and  philosophy,  as  they  were  known 
to  the  Hindus  at  that  time.  The  proportion  of 
the  latter  to  the  former,  that  is,  of  collegiate 
schools  to  village  schools,  was  one  to  three. 

A  Committee  of  Public  Instruction  was  ap- 
pointed by  the  East  India  Company's  govern- 
ment in  1823,  and  the  ;fio,ooo,  which  had  been 
granted  by  Parliament  ten  3'ears  before,  were 
expended  in  establishing  an  English  school,  under 
the  name  of  Hindu  College,  in  Calcutta,  six 
Oriental  colleges,  and  a  number  of  elementary 
schools    in   Bengal    and  Rajputana.     The   Com- 

194 


EDUCATION   IN   INDU. 

mittee  also  gave  its  attention  to  the  publication 
of  Oriental  books,  and  started  a  press  in 
1824. 

Between  1823  and  1833  no  special  thing  was 
done  in  the  educational  line  other  than  to  add 
classes  in  English  in  all  the  chief  colleges.  In 
1835  Lord  Bentinck,  the  Governor-General  of 
India,  enlarged  the  Committee  of  Public  Instruc- 
tion and  appointed  Macaulay  as  its  president. 
Two  distinguished  Hindu  gentlemen  of  the  time, 
Sir  R^jah  Radha  Kanta  Deb  Bahadur  and  Ros- 
somoy  Dutt  of  Calcutta,  and  Takawar  Jung,  the 
Mahometan  Nawab  of  Bengal,  were  enrolled  as 
members  of  the  Committee.  With  Macaulay's 
support  and  assistance,  Lord  Bentinck  passed  the 
famous  resolutions  of  March  7,  1835,  by  which 
the  English  language  was  established  as  the 
language  of  superior  education  in  India.  The 
resolutions  were  these: 

(i)  That  the  chief  aim  of  the  educational 
policy  of  the  Government  should  be  to  promote  a 
knowledge  of  European  literature  and  science. 

(2)  That  henceforth  no  more  stipends  should 
be    conferred,    but    that    all    existing    stipends 

195 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

should  be  continued  as  long  as  the  natives  con- 
tinue to  avail  themselves  of  them. 

(3)  That  the  printing  of  Oriental  books  should 
at  once  cease,  and  that  the  funds  thus  set  free 
should  be  employed  in  promoting  European 
studies  through  the  medium  of  the  English 
language. 

In  Madras,  about  tliis  time,  a  Hindu  named 
Pachiapa  left  a  large  donation  for  religious  uses, 
and  out  of  this  sum,  which  amounted  to  nearly 
£80,000,  a  central  educational  institution,  which 
is  now  known  as  Pachiapa's  College,  was  estab- 
lished   by    the   Hindus    in    1839.     It    still    con- 
tinues to  be  the  most  flourishing  college  for  the 
study  of  English  in  Madras,  and  it  was  the  first 
college    established    there.     In    1830    Alexander 
Duff  arrived  in  Calcutta   as  the  missionary  of 
the  General  Assembly  of  the  Scotch  Kirk,  and 
established  a  school  which  was  at  first  a  great 
success;    but  his  aim  was  to  convert  the  natives 
to  Christianity,  and  when  some  of  the  students 
were  persuaded  to  accept  Christianity,  the  whole 
Hindu  community  protested  against  the  object 

and  plan  of  the  missionary  schools  and  would 

196 


EDUCATION  IN   INDIA. 

not  allow  their  children  to  enter  them  as  students. 
During  his  stay,  Alexander  Duff  succeeded  in 
converting  only  forty  young  Hindus  who  were 
studying  in  his  school,  and  the  conversion  of 
these  created  a  great  sensation  in  the  city  of 
Calcutta.  About  that  time  the  Hindus  began 
to  study  Thomas  Paine's  "Age  of  Reason." 
The  book  spread  like  wildfire  among  native  stu- 
dents and  scholars,  and  Dr.  Duff,  finding  that 
it  was  a  great  obstacle  in  the  path  of  converting 
the  Hindus,  bought  all  the  copies  that  were  in 
the  market,  piled  them  in  the  street  and  made 
a  bonfire  out  of  them;  but  the  Hindus  reprinted 
the  book  and  distributed  it  among  themselves. 

Being  thus  aroused,  the  native  Hindus  of 
Calcutta  were  determined  to  start  schools  and 
colleges  for  the  education  of  their  boys  in  Enghsh. 
Foremost  among  them  was  Pundit  Iswara  Chun- 
der  Vidyasagar,  the  most  distinguished  edu- 
cationalist and  the  greatest  Hindu  scholar  of 
his  time.  He  established  by  his  own  individual 
efforts,  unaided  by  the  Government,  the  Metro- 
politan School  in  Calcutta,  and  to-day  it  is  one 

of  the  most  powerful  and  best  conducted  colleges 

197 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

in  India.  It  has  always  been  entirely  under 
Hindu  management,  and  all  its  teachers  and 
professors  are  Hindus.  Hundreds  and  thousands 
of  students  study  English  and  graduate  every 
year  under  native  professors. 

Lord  Hardinge  established  one  hundred  schools 
in  the  different  districts  of  Bengal  for  the  pur- 
pose of  imparting  education  in  the  vernacular 
as  a  preliminary  step  to  higher  education  in 
English.  He  also  passed  the  famous  resolution 
of  1844  for  the  selection  of  candidates  for  public 
employment  from  those  who  had  been  educated 
in  the  institutions  established.  This  gave  a 
tremendous  impetus  to  native  efforts  to  start 
schools,  colleges,  and  seminaries  in  Calcutta  and 
other  places.  Intense  desire  to  learn  and  teach 
English  was  expressed  by  all  classes  of  people 
and  no  caste  distinction  was  observed.  Students 
from  all  castes  and  all  classes  wanted  to  study 
and  to  teach  English,  and  schools  sprang  up  on 
all  sides  for  imparting  English  education. 

In  1836  Hoogly  College  was  opened,  and  in 
three  days  twelve  hundred  names  were  enrolled 
and  an  auxiliary  school  was  immediately  filled. 

198 


EDUCATION   IN  INDIA. 

In  1843  there  were  fifty-one  schools  and  colleges, 
containing  8,200  students,  of  whom  5,132  were 
studying  EngUsh,  426  Sanskrit,  572  Arabic, 
and  706  the  Persian  language.  In  1839  Lord 
Auckland  offered  a  grant  from  the  Government 
treasury  of  25,000  rupees  (about  S8000)  to  pro- 
mote Oriental  education;  and  in  1845  Mr. 
Thomason,  the  Governor  of  the  Northwestern 
Provinces,  started  a  plan  to  encourage  the  native 
village  schools  of  the  Hindus,  which  have  existed 
in  India  for  ages.  This  plan  involved  the  estab- 
lishment of:  (i)  An  elementary  school  for  circles 
of  villages,  each  school  to  be  situated  in  a  central 
village  and  no  village  to  be  more  than  one  mile 
from  the  central  school;  (2)  A  middle  school  at 
the  headquarters  of  each  subdivision;  (3)  A 
high  school  in  each  Zillah  or  district.  This  plan 
was  sanctioned  by  the  Directors,  who  made  an 
allowance  of  500,000  rupees.  Operations  began 
in  1850,  and  after  four  years  there  were  eight 
District  High  Schools  in  the  whole  Northwestern 
Province.  For  the  support  of  these  state  schools 
(which  were  not  free)  monthly  fees,  which 
varied  from  one  to  twelve  rupees,  were  exacted 

199 


INDIA    AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

of  all  students.     In  the  state  schools  the  fees 
were  higher  than  in  the  private  schools. 

The  missionary  schools  were  mostly  element- 
ary or  primary.  Only  three  or  four  of  them 
imparted  secondary  education,  and  some  of 
them  were  free  of  charge  to  help  the  poorer 
classes.  Up  to  this  time  the  Government  had 
not  taken  any  step  to  educate  the  girls.  Female 
education  received  no  support  from  the  Govern- 
ment; while  the  missionaries  were  trying  their 
best  to  educate  native  girls  in  the  tenets  of 
Christianity,  denouncing  the  religion  of  their 
forefathers  and  condemning  everything  of  Hindu 
origin  or  which  had  to  do  with  Hindu  society 
and  religion,  in  the  same  manner  as  they  did  in 
the  schools  for  boys.  This  is  one  of  the  greatest 
drawbacks  in  the  missionary  methods  of  educa- 
tion. They  condemn  everything  that  is  outside 
of  their  religion,  their  standards  and  their  ideals. 
They  are  too  narrow  to  see  good  in  any  but 
their  own  creed  and  dogmas.  They  do  not  con- 
sider the  Hindu  religion  as  a  religion  or  the 
Hindu  Saviours  as  Saviours;  but  they  think 
that  the  Hindus  arc  all  going  to  eternal  perdi- 

200 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

tion  and  so  they  are  very  anxious  to  save  their 
heathen  souls!  An  American  missionary,  in 
referring  to  the  schools  for  non-Christians  in 
India,  writes:  "These  are  especially  established 
with  a  view  to  reaching  and  affecting  the  non- 
Christian  community.  .  .  .  They  represent  the 
leaven  of  Christianity  in  India.  They  furnish 
excellent  opportunity  to  present  Christ  and  his 
Gospel  of  salvation  to  a  large  host  of  young  , 
people  under  very  favorable  circumstances.  .  .  . 
And  I  fearlessly  maintain  that  more  conversions 
take  place  and  more  accessions  are  made  through 
these  schools  than  through  any  other  agency." 
This  wiU  give  you  an  idea  of  the  fanaticism  and 
bigotry  of  these  apostles  of  Christianity,  who 
pretend  to  impart  free  education  to  the  boys  and 
girls  of  poor,  illiterate  parents.  The  poor  Hindu 
boys  and  girls  come  to  study  and  learn  some- 
thing, but  instead  of  receiving  the  blessing  of 
true  education,  their  minds  are  fiUed  with  super- 
stitious and  unscientific  doctrines  and  dogmas, 
and  they  are  forced  to  leave  the  community  of 
their  parents  and  relatives  and  become  converts 
to  Christianity.     These  missionaries  do  not  think 

201 


INDIA   AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

for  a  moment  why  the  Hindus  should  give  up 
their  own  prophets  and  Saviours  and  worship 
the  prophets  of  the  Semitic  race,  especially  of 
the  Jews.  Why  should  the  Hindus  abandon  their 
ancient  traditions  and  the  religion  of  their  Aryan 
forefathers?  Why  should  they  forsake  the  Aryan 
prophets  and  accept  the  Jewish  prophets  in- 
stead? Those  who  never  had  any  higher  phi- 
losophy, higher  religion,  or  a  spiritual  leader  like 
Christ,  may  accept  with  delight  the  banner  of 
Christ,  but  not  the  Hindus,  who  have  many 
Saviours, — Krishna,  Rama,  Buddha,  Chaitanya, 
Ramakrishna, — each  of  whom,  according  to  the 
Hindus,  was  as  great  as  the  Saviour  of  Nazareth. 
The  Christian  missionaries,  before  preaching 
Christ  among  the  Hindus,  should  first  convert 
the  Jews. 

The  East  India  Company's  charter  was  renewed 
in  1853,  and  a  Lords'  Committee  was  appointed 
to  make  necessary  additions  or  modifications  in 
the  policy  of  the  government  of  India.  Among 
other  things,  the  Committee  discussed  the  sub- 
ject of  education  of  the  people  of  India.     After 

collecting  evidence  from  all  sides,  the  Committee 

202 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

issued  a  Despatch  in  1854,  constituting  the  great 
Charter  of  Indian  education;  and  on  this  De- 
spatch the  whole  system  of  education  in  India  of 
to-day  is  based.  It  approved  of  the  higher  edu- 
cation and  the  estabhshment  of  universities  in 
Calcutta,  Bombay,  and  Madras,  the  chief  towns 
of  the  three  Presidencies  under  British  rule.  The 
Despatch  of  1854  extended  the  field  of  education 
and  prescribed  these  objects:  "First,  the  con- 
stitution of  a  separate  department  of  the  admin- 
istration of  education.  Second,  the  institution 
of  the  universities  at  the  Presidency  towns. 
Third,  the  establishment  of  institutions  for  train- 
ing teachers  for  all  classes  of  schools.  Fourth, 
the  maintenance  of  the  existing  Government  col- 
leges and  high  schools,  and  the  increase  of  their 
number  when  necessary.  Fifth,  the  establish- 
ment of  new  middle  schools.  Sixth,  increased 
attention  to  vernacular  schools,  indigenous  or 
other,  for  elementary  education.  And  seventh, 
the  introduction  of  a  system  of  grants-in-aid." 

"Aid  is  to  be  given  (so  far  as  available 
fimds  may  render  it  possible)  to  all  schools  im- 
parting   a    good    secular    education,    provided 

303 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

they  are  under  adequate  local  management 
and  subject  to  Government  inspection,  and  pro- 
vided that  fees,  however  small,  are  charged  in 
them."  In  the  assignment  of  these  grants, 
however,  there  were  no  less  than  five  systems 
in  operation.     They  were  as  follows: 

(i)  The  Salary  Grant  System,  in  use  in  Madras 
only,  was  applied  to  secondary  education. 
Under  this  system  the  Government  contributed 
a  fixed  proportion  of  the  teacher's  salary  in 
accordance  with  his  qualifications. 

(2)  The  Results  Grant  System  was  in  Madras 
applied  to  primary  education  only,  and  in  Bom- 
bay to  secondary  education.  To  obtain  this 
grant  it  was  necessary  to  pass  Government 
examinations. 

(3)  The  combined  Salary-Results  System. 

(4)  The  Fixed  Period  System  was  in  operation 
in  the  greater  part  of  Northern  and  Central 
India.  Under  this  an  average  grant  was  paid  for 
periods  of  three  or  five  years. 

(5)  The  CaptJtative  System  was  applied  to  a 

few  girls'  schools  in  Bengal. 

The  seven   articles  of  the  Despatch  of   1854 

204 


EDUCATION    IN   INDIA. 

helped  in  a  systematic  manner  the  promotion 
of  education  in  India.  The  EngHsh  language 
became  the  medium  in  the  higher  branches  and 
the  vernacular  in  the  lower.  The  system  of 
grants-in-aid  was  based  upon  the  principle  of 
absolute  neutrality.  Aid  was  given  from  1854 
to  all  schools  imparting  a  good  secular  educa- 
tion. Three  universities  were  established  in 
1857  by  Lord  Canning  after  the  model  of  the 
London  University.  Thus  the  inspiring  in- 
fluence of  Western  education  reached  a  larger 
circle  of  the  population.  Two  more  universi- 
ties have  been  added  since, — one  in  the  Punjab 
in  1882  and  the  other  in  Allahabad  in  1887; 
so  there  are  altogether  five  universities  in  India, 
— one  in  Calcutta,  one  in  Bombay,  one  in  Madras, 
one  in  the  Punjab  and  the  other  in  Allahabad. 
These  universities  consist  of  a  chancellor,  the 
governor  of  the  Presidency  ex  officio,  a  vice- 
chancellor,  and  not  less  than  thirty  fellows,  who 
constitute  a  Senate.  The  Senate  controls  the 
management  of  the  funds  of  the  universities, 
and  frames  rules  and  regulations,  which  are 
subject    to    Goverimient    approval    and    under 

205 


INDIA    AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

which  examinations  are  held  periodically  in  the 
various  branches  of  art  and  science  by  exami- 
ners chosen  from  among  themselves  or  nomi- 
nated from  outside.  The  Senate  is  divided  into 
four  faculties, — Arts,  Law,  Medicine,  and  En- 
gineering. The  executive  government  of  the 
university  is  in  the  hands  of  a  syndicate,  which 
consists  of  the  vice-chancellor  and  eight  of  the 
Fellows.  This  syndicate  selects  examiners,  reg- 
ulates examinations,  recommends  for  degrees, 
honors,  and  rewards,  and  carries  on  the  busi- 
ness of  the  university.  Boards  of  studies  in  the 
various  departments  are  also  appointed  from 
among  the  Fellows  by  the  s}Tidicate.  The 
Fellows  do  not  correspond  to  the  Fellows  of  this 
country,  nor  of  Europe,  nor  even  of  England. 
The  office  of  Fellow  is  an  honorary  office,  usually 
conferred  on  some  representative  man  or  upon 
those  who  have  been  active  in  the  cause  of 
education.  They  may  be  natives  or  Europeans. 
The  Indian  universities  are  without  a  staff  of 
teachers.  They  simply  hold  examinations  and 
grant  degrees,  but  they  have  no  courses  of 
lectures.     In   India   we   do   not   have   anything 

200 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

like  the  universities  of  this  country  and  nothing 
like  Cambridge  and  Oxford.     I  will  give  you  an 
idea  of  the  examinations  that  are  held  under 
the  universities: 
The  subjects  of  examinations  are:  (i)  English; 

(2)  A  classical  (Oriental  or  European)  or  vernacu- 
lar language;  (3)  Physics  and  Chemistry;  (4)  His- 
tory; (5)  Geography;  (6)  Arithmetic,  Algebra, 
Geometry.  This  is  the  examination  for  entrance 
into  college.  Under  each  university  there  are 
many  schools  and  colleges  started  and  managed 
by  the  natives.  Then  after  two  years'  study  in  a 
college  the  student  prepares  for  the  First  Ex- 
amination in  Arts.  The  subjects  are:  (i) 
English;  (2)  A  classical  language  (Oriental  or 
European)  or  a  vernacular;  (3)  Logic;  (4)  Mathe- 
matics; (5)  History  and  Geography;  and  (6) 
Physical  Science.  Two  years  later  comes  the 
B.A.  Examination.  This  has  two  branches — 
the  Language  Division  and  the  Science  Division. 
The  subjects  in  the  Language  Division  are:  (i) 
English;    (2)  A  classical  or  vernacular  language; 

(3)  Mathematics;    (4)  and  (5)    any  two  of  the 

following:    Moral  Philosophy,  History,  and  Ad- 

207 


INDIA   AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

vanced  Mathematics.  The  Science  Division  con- 
sists of  (i)  English;  (2)  Mathematics;  (3) 
Chemistry;  (4)  Physical  Geography;  (5)  either 
Physics,  Physiology,  or  Geology. 

For  the  degree  of  Masters  of  Arts  there  is  an 
honor  examination  in  Language,  Mental  and  Moral 
Philosophy,  Natural  Science,  or  History  and 
Mathematics.  Then  there  are  Law  examinations, 
Medical  examinations,  and  Civil  Engineering 
examinations  with  degrees. 

This  system  has  been  in  existence  /or  the  last 
forty-eight  years.  The  total  number  of  stu- 
dents in  schools  and  colleges  all  over  British 
India  is  4,405,042.  To-day,  excluding  cities, 
three  villages  out  of  four  are  without  schools, 
and  seven  children  out  of  eight  are  growing  up 
in  ignorance  and  darkness.  According  to  the 
census  of  1901  there  are  147,086  educational 
institutions  of  all  kinds  in  British  India.  Of 
these  104,743  are  public  institutions  (that  is, 
institutions  open  to  all  classes  but  not  free), 
which  are  divided  as  follows:  44  Professional 
Colleges,  141  Art  Colleges,  5461  Secondary 
Schools,   98,133   Primary  Schools,   170  Training 

208 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

Schools,  and  494  Special  Schools.  In  addition 
to  these  there  are  42,343  private  institutions,  of 
which  4306  are  advanced,  26,668  elementary, 
11,016  teaching  the  Koran  only,  and  263  not 
conforming  to  departmental  standards.  "Dur- 
ing the  past  three  years  the  sum  of  4,000,000 
rupees  has  been  contributed  by  the  (native) 
public  in  the  United  Provinces  towards  educa- 
tion. Nearly  half  of  this  sum  was  given  in  the 
year  1905.  The  numbers  attending  public  in- 
stitutions of  all  kinds  have  increased,  while 
those  attending  private  institutions  have  de- 
clined. The  past  year  witnessed  the  erection  of 
several  schools  and  boarding-houses,  the  in- 
stitution of  schemes  for  the  development  of 
Sanskrit,  Arabic,  the  enlargement  of  the  Medical 
School  at  Agra,  the  development  of  mechanical 
training  and  electrical  work  at  Rurki  and  the 
starting  of  an  institution  for  mechanical  and 
manual  training  at  Lucknow."  * 

The  Government  does  not  give  free  educa- 
tion in  India  and  although  the  Hindus  pay  all 
kinds  of  taxes — 40  per  cent  more  than  the  tax- 

*  The  Indian  Nation,  Jan.  22,  1906. 
209 


INDIA  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

payer  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland — and  support 
the  most  expensive  system  of  administration, 
still  they  do  not  receive  from  the  Government 
free  education.  The  Government  now  spends 
annually  nearly  27  million  pounds  sterling  for 
military  expenses  and  about  £750,000  for  the 
education  of  the  natives.  The  Rev.  J.  T.  Sunder- 
land, after  long  residence  in  India,  says:  "Much 
credit  has  been  given  to  the  Indian  Government 
for  education.  It  has  done  some  good  work  in 
this  direction,  for  which  let  it  have  full  praise. 
But  how  little  has  it  done  compared  with  the 
need,  or  compared  with  what  the  people  want, 
or  compared  with  its  ability,  if  it  would  only 
use  its  resources  primarily  for  India's  good! 
Why  has  so  little  of  the  people's  money  been 
spent  for  education?  In  the  schools  of  India, 
of  all  kinds,  high  and  low,  there  are  some  4,418-, 
000  scholars  (if  we  include  the  native  states). 
But  what  is  this  number  in  a  population  nearly 
as  large  as  that  of  all  Europe?  How  much  does 
the  Indian  Government  spend  annually  for 
education?     The  munificent  sum  of  one  penny 

and  a  fifth  per  head  of  the  population!     Think 

210 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

of  it!  Is  it  any  wonder  that,  after  a  century 
and  a  half  of  British  dominance,  the  number 
of  persons  in  India  who  can  read  and  write  is 
only  about  eleven  in  a  hundred  among  males, 
and  one  in  two  hundred  among  females?  With 
their  native  industries  so  badly  broken  down, 
the  Indian  people  have  special  need  for  indus- 
trial, technical,  and  practical  education.  But 
their  rulers  are  giving  them  almost  nothing  of 
this  kind.  Britain's  neglect  of  education  is  a  dark 
stain  upon  her  treatment  of  India."  * 

The  Government  has  no  school  or  college  for 
female  education.  The  first  girls'  school  was 
estabhshed  in  Calcutta  by  Mr,  Drinkwater 
Bethune  (a  legal  member  of  the  Governor- 
General's  Council),  who  gave  £10,000  from  his 
own  pocket.  This  school  is  the  most  success- 
ful institution  for  girls  in  India,  and  teaches  up 
to  the  highest  grades  of  university  examina- 
tions. The  Indian  universities  bestow  degrees  on 
women,  and  lady  graduates  take  their  degrees 
in  Calcutta,   Madras,  and   Bombay.     There   are 

*  Paper  on  "The  Causes  of  Famines  in  India,"  before 
the  Canadian  Institute,  p.  22. 

211 


INDIA   AND  HER   PEOPLE. 

many  girls'  schools  which  have  been  started  by 
the  Hindus.  In  private  primary  schools,  little 
boys  and  girls  are  taught  together.  Ihe  total 
number  of  girls  who  receive  education  is  about 
half  a  million;  but  the  majority  of  Hindu  girls 
receive  their  education  at  home.  The  illiterate 
women  in  India  are  given  moral  and  spiritual 
instruction,  as  well  as  instruction  in  religious 
truths  and  moral  duties,  and  in  their  national 
traditions  and  literature,  to  a  much  larger  extent 
than  in  Europe. 

About  85  per  cent  of  the  population  of  India 
to-day  depends  upon  agriculture.  Yet  the  Gov- 
ernment had  no  agricultural  institution  in  the 
country  until  recently,  when  it  started  one  agri- 
cultural college  in  Poona,  near  Bombay. 

Education  in  India  is  very  expensive,  consider- 
ing that  the  average  annual  income  per  head  is 
£2,  out  of  which  from  14  to  15  per  cent  goes  to- 
wards paying  taxes.  Furthermore,  the  educated 
Hindus,  who  have  spent  a  considerable  part  of 
this  income  in  receiving  university  degrees,  have 
no  prospect  of  obtaining  higher  positions  in  Cov- 
er nment    offices.     All    the    liigher   positions  are 

212 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

occupied  by  English  officials,  who  draw  large 
salaries,  while  native  graduates  are  allowed  to 
remain  as  clerks  on  a  salary  of  from  three  to 
ten  dollars  per  month.  Until  recently,  these 
Hindu  graduates  had  the  one  chance  of  enter- 
ing Government  offices  through  competitive  ex- 
aminations. But  Lord  Curzon  closed  that  door 
by  passing  the  University  Bill,  which  brings  the 
universities  and  schools  under  rigid  official  con- 
trol. Now  none  but  those  who  are  appointed 
by  the  Government  can  hold  any  Government 
position.  The  Official  Secrets  Bill  passed  by 
Lord  Curzon  has  also  gagged  the  Indian  press. 
There  are  a  number  of  daily  and  weekly  papers 
published  in  English  by  the  Hindus.  But  they 
cannot  agitate  the  political  and  economic  policy 
of  the  Government.  Thus  people  are  kept  in 
absolute  darkness.  Notwithstanding  his  de- 
spotic rule,  however,  Lord  Curzon  did  on  good 
act  in  allowing  a  permanent  grant  of  £220,000 
from  the  surplus  revenue  for  primary  education. 
India  needs  to-day  free  education,  and  free 
industrial  and  technical  schools  and  colleges  for 

the  masses.     India  needs  schools  and  colleges  for 

213 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

the  education  of  girls,  not  under  the  management 
of  Christian  missionaries,  but  under  the  man- 
agement of  the  Hindus.  India  needs  a  national 
university  where  boys  and  girls  will  receive 
secular  education  free  of  charge,  and  where  all 
technical  and  manual  training  can  be  obtained 
freely. 

To-day  the  Hindus  have  shown  to  the  world 
that  intellectually  they  are  equal  to  the  most 
intellectual  people  of  Europe  and  America,  but 
they  are  downtrodden  and  poor.  The  whole 
weight  of  the  British  Government  is  grinding  the 
nation  and  crushing  the  spirit  of  progress.  Fur- 
thermore, India  is  impoverished  under  British 
rule;  yet  the  Hindus  are  raising  private  funds 
and  sending  their  students  to  America  and  Japan 
to  receive  better  and  more  substantial  education 
than  what  they  receive  under  the  British  Gov- 
ernment. The  Hindus  are  eager  to  learn,  and 
they  are  indebted  to  England  for  introducing 
Western  education  in  India.  If  England  has 
done  any  good  to  India,  it  is  by  the  introduction 
of  English  education.  This  is  the  greatest  bless- 
ing that   India  has  received  under  British  rule. 

214 


EDUCATION   IN   INDIA. 

The  seed  of  Western  education  is  sown  in  the 
soil  of  India;  future  generations  will  reap  the 
fruit. 

Herbert  Spencer  says  "education  is   training 

for  completeness  of  hfe."     The  Hindus  now  see 

the  defects  of  the  present  system  of  education 

in  India,  and  are  endeavoring  to  reform  it  and 

to  make  it  as  perfect  as  it  is  in  this  land  of  free 

education  and  political  independence.     May  their 

noble  efforts  be  crowned  with  glorious  success! 

215 


VI. 


THE  INFLUENCE  OF  INDIA  ON  WESTERN 
CIVILIZATION,  AND  THE  INFLUENCE  OF 
WESTERN   CIVILIZATION  ON   INDIA. 

The  dawn  of  Aryan  civilization  broke  for  the 
first  time  on  the  horizon,  not  of  Greece  or  Rome, 
not  of  Arabia  or  Persia,  but  of  India,  which  may 
be  called   the  motherland  of  metaphysics,   phi- 
losophy,  logic,   astronomy,   science,   art,   music, 
and  medicine,  as  well  as  of  truly  ethical  religion. 
Although  students  in  the  schools  and  colleges  of 
modern    Europe    and    America    are    generally 
taught  that  the  Greeks   and    Romans  were  the 
fathers  of  European    civilization    and  that  phi- 
losophy and  science  first  arose  in  ancient  Greece, 
still  it  has  been  proved  by  the  Oriental  scholars 
of    Europe    and   by   all    impartial   students   of 
history  that  ancient  Greece  was  greatly  indebted 
to  India  for  many  of  her  best  ideas  in  philosophy, 

216 


THE   INFLUENCE    OF    INDIA. 

science  and  intellectual  culture,  as  also  for  many 
of  her  ethical  and  spiritual  ideals. 

If  we  read  the  writings  and  historical  accounts 
left  by  Pliny,  Strabo,  Megasthenes,  Herodotus, 
Porphyry  and  a  host   of  other   ancient  authors 
of  different  countries,  we  shall  see  how  highly 
the  civilization  of  India  was  regarded  by  them. 
In  fact,  between  the  years  1500  and  500  B.C., 
the   Hindus   were  so   far   advanced   in   religion, 
metaphysics,  philosophy,  science,  art,  music,  and 
medicine  that    no  other  nation   could  stand  as 
their  rival,  or  compete  with  them  in  any  of  these 
branches  of  knowledge.     On  the  contrary,  many 
of  the  nations  which  came  in  contact  with  the 
Hindus  through  trade  or  otherwise,  accepted  the 
Hindu  ideas  and  moulded  their  own  after  the 
Hindu    pattern.     For   instance,    the   science    of 
geometry,    as    I    have    already    said,    was    first 
invented  in  India  by  the  Hindus  from  the  Vedic 
rules   for  the   construction  of  sacrificial  altars; 
from  these  rules  they  gradually  developed  geom- 
etry,  and  it  has  been   admitted  by  the  great 
scholars  that  the  world  owes  its  first  lesson  in 

this  science,  not  to  Greece,  but  to  India.     The 

217 


INDIA   AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

geometrical  theorem  that  the  square  of  the  hy- 
potenuse of  a  rectangular  triangle  is  equal  to  the 
squares  of  its  sides  was  ascribed  by  the  Greeks 
to  Pythagoras,   but  it  was   known    in   India  at 
least  two  centuries  before  Pythagoras  was  bom. 
It  was   contained   in   the   two  rules:    "(i)   The 
square  of  the  diagonal  of  a  square  is  twice  as 
large  as  that  square;  and  (2)  The  square  of  the 
diagonal  of  an  oblong  is  equal  to  the  square  of 
both  its  sides."    These   rules  formed  a  part  of 
the  Sulva  Sutras,  which  date   from   the  eighth 
century  before  Christ.    There  is  a  Greek  tradition 
that  Pythagoras  visited  India,  and   most  prob- 
ably he  did,  because  in  his  writings  we  find  such 
ideas  as  were  very  common  among  the  Hindus, 
but    which    were    unknown    to    other    nations. 
Probably  he  learned  from  the  Hindus  his  first 
lessons  in  geometry,  mathematics,  the  doctrine 
of  pre-existence  and  transmigration  of  souls,  and 
of  final  beatitude,  ascetic  observances,  prohibition 
of  eating  flesh,  vegetarianism,  the  conception  of 
the  virtue  of  numbers,  and  lastly,  the  idea  of  a 
fifth  element,  which  was  unknown  in  Greece  and 
Egypt  at  that  ancient  time.     The  Egyptians  and 

218 


THE    INFLUENCE    OF    INDIA. 

Greeks  admitted  four  elements,  but  ether  as  an 

element  was  known  only  among  the  Hindus   of 

those  days.     All  these  things  were  taught  by  the 

Hindus  centuries  before  the  time  of  Pythagoras. 

Prof.  E.  W.  Hopkins  admits  this  in  his  "Religions 

of  India,"  as  you  will  recall  from  the  first  lecture, 

when  he  says:    "Before  the  6th  century  B.C.  all 

the   religious-philosophical   ideas   of   Pythagoras 

are  current  in  India." 

Geometry  gradually  fell  out  of  use  among  the 

Hindus,  and  geometrical  truths  were  represented 

by  algebra  and  arithmetic.     The   Greeks  could 

not  rival  the  Hindus  in  the  science  of  numbers. 

The  world  indeed  owes  decimal  notation  to  India. 

The  Arabs  first  learned  it  from  the  Hindus  and 

then  introduced  it  into  Europe.     It  was  unknown 

to  the  Greeks  and  Romans,  and  arithmetic  as  a 

practical  science    would    have    been    impossible 

■without    decimal    notation.     The    Hindus    have 

also   given  algebra   (Vijaganita)  to  the  Western 

world  through  the  Arabs,  who  translated  it  in 

the  eighth  century  a.d.;    and  Leonardo  da  Pisa 

first  introduced  it  into  Europe  in  the  thirteenth 

century.    So  the  world  received  its  first  lesson  in 

319 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

algebra  from  India.  The  Hindus  were  also  the  first 
teachers  of  plane  and  spherical  trigonometry. 
The  great  Indian  mathematician,  Bhaskara- 
chdrya,  who  lived  from  1114-1150  a.d.,  wrote 
exhaustive  treatises  *  on  all  these  subjects,  and 
his  works  contain  solutions  of  remarkable  prob- 
lems which  were  not  achieved  in  Europe  until 
the  seventeenth  and  eighteenth  centuries. f  In 
astronomical  observations,  the  Hindus  were  the 
first  to  fix  the  lunar  mansions,  lunar  Zodiac,  and 
the  divisions  of  the  constellations.     The  Chinese 

*  Those  treating  of  algebra  and  arithmetic  have  been 
translated  by  Colebrooke,  and  the  portion  on  spherical 
trigonometry  has  been   translated  by  Wilkinson. 

t  "A  striking  history  has  been  told  of  the  problem 
to  find  X  so  that  ax^-Vh  shall  be  a  square  number.  Fre- 
mat  made  some  progress  towards  solving  this  ancient 
problem,  and  sent  it  as  a  defiance  to  the  English  alge- 
braists in  the  seventeenth  century.  Euler  finally  solved 
it,  and  arrived  exactly  at  the  point  attained  by  Bh4skara 
in  1 1 50.  A  particular  solution  of  another  problem  given 
by  Bh4skara  is  exactly  the  same  as  was  discovered  in 
Europe  by  Lord  Brounker  in  1657;  and  the  general 
solution  of  the  same  problem  given  by  Brahmagupta, 
in  the  seventh  century  a.d.,  was  unsuccessfully  attempted 
by  Euler.  and  was  only  accomplished  by  De  la  Grange 
in  1767  A.D.  The  favorite  process  of  the  Hindus  known 
as  the  Kuttaka  was  not  known  in  Europe  till  published 
by  Bachet  de  Mezeriac  in  1624  a.d."— Civilization  in 
Ancient   India,  Vol.   II,  p.    246. 

220 


THE    INFLUENCE   OF   INDIA. 

and  Arabs  borrowed  these  from  India.  The 
Hindus  first  developed  the  science  of  music 
from  the  chanting  of  the  Vedic  hymns.  The 
Sama  Veda  was  especially  meant  for  music.  And 
the  scale  with  seven  notes  and  three  octaves 
was  known  in  India  centuries  before  the  Greeks 
had  it.  Probably  the  Greeks  learned  it  from  the 
Hindus.  It  will  be  interesting  to  you  to  know 
that  Wagner  was  indebted  to  the  Hindu  science 
of  music,  especially  for  his  principal  idea  of  the 
"leading  motive";  and  this  is  perhaps  the 
reason  why  it  is  so  difficult  for  many  Western 
people  to  understand  Wagner's  music.  He  be- 
came familiar  with  Eastern  music  through  Latin 
translations,  and  his  conversation  on  this  sub- 
ject with  Schopenhauer  is  probably  already 
familiar  to  you. 

The  Western  world,  again,  owes  its  first  lesson 
in  medicine  to  India.  In  the  preceding  lecture 
I  gave  proofs  that  Alexander  not  only  had  in 
his  camp  Hindu  physicians,  but  that  he  pre- 
ferred them  to  Greek  physicians.  Megasthenes, 
Nearchus,  and  Arrian  spoke  highly  of  the  won- 
derful healing  powers  of  the  Hindu  physicians. 

221 


INDIA  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

In  1837  Dr.  Royle,  of  King's  College,  London, 
wrote  his  celebrated  essay  on  "Hindu  Medicine," 
in  which  he  showed  that  Hippocrates,  the  father 
of  medicine,  who  lived  in  Greece  in  the  fourth 
century  B.C.,  borrowed  his  Materia  Medica  from 
India.  Dr.  Royle  says,  "We  owe  our  first  system 
of  medicine  to  the  Hindus." 

Herodotus,  who  lived  in  the  fifth  century  B.C., 
states  that  the  Hindus  were  the  greatest  nation 
of  that  age.  He  also  writes  that  the  Hindus 
had  trade  with  Egypt,  while  from  other  sources 
we  gather  that  they  had  trade  with  Babylon 
and  Syria.  From  another  authentic  source  we 
learn  that  there  was  a  Hindu  philosopher  who 
visited  Socrates  at  Athens,  a  fact  which  Prof. 
Max  Miiller  confirms  in  his  book  on  "Psychologi- 
cal Religion."  This  Hindu  philosopher,  we  are 
told,  had  a  conversation  with  the  great  Greek 
philosopher.  He  asked  in  what  the  philosophy 
of  Socrates  consisted,  and  Socrates  replied  that 
his  philosophy  consisted  in  inquiries  about  the 
life  of  man,  upon  which  the  Hindu  philosopher 
smiled  and  answered:  "  How  can  you  know  things 

human  without  first    knowing    things   divine^ " 

222 


THE   INFLUENCE  OF  INDU. 

And  that  is  an  answer  which  could  not  have 
been  given  by  any  other  than  a  Hindu,  because 
the  Hindus  ascribed  all  true  knowledge  to  Divine 
origin,  and  did  not  care  much  for  the  knowl- 
edge of  anything  human  before  knowing  God. 

Ralph  Waldo  Emerson  says:  "Plato  was  a 
synthesis  of  Europe  and  Asia,  and  a  decidedly 
Oriental  element  pervades  his  philosophy,  giving 
it  a  sunrise  color."  In  fact,  in  teaching  asceti- 
cism, Plato  was  more  of  a  Hindu  than  a  Greek, 
because,  of  all  nations,  the  Greeks  were  least 
ascetic.  My  friend.  Professor  Edward  Howard 
Griggs,  in  his  lecture  on  the  "Philosophy  of 
Plato"  before  the  Vedanta  Society  of  New  York, 
also  admitted  this  in  saying:  "Plato's  belief 
in  the  conquest  of  the  senses,  as  the  only  means 
of  attaining  true  knowledge,  was  preeminently 
Oriental  and  non-Greek."  Moreover,  if  we  study 
Plato  carefully,  comparing  his  ideas  with  those 
of  the  Upanishads  and  other  Vedic  writings,  we 
find  that  his  weU-known  figure  of  the  man 
chained  in  the  cave  is  merely  an  allegorical 
presentation  of  the  Vedanta  doctrine  of  M^yd, 
that    the   phenomenal   world   is   like   a   dream; 

223 


INDIA   AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

while  his  other  figure  of  the  chariot  was  a  favor- 
ite theme  of  the  Vedic  writers  who  lived  cen- 
turies before  Plato.  In  the  Katha  Upaiiishad, 
for  instance,  we  read:  "This  body  may  be  com- 
pared to  a  chariot,  intellect  to  the  charioteer, 
mind  to  the  reins,  the  five  senses  to  the  horses, 
whose  path  is  the  object  of  senses."  Sir  William 
Jones,  the  first  eminent  Sanskrit  scholar  among 
the  English,  confirming  this  fact,  writes  that 
"it  is  impossible  to  read  the  Vedanta,  or  the 
many  fine  compositions  in  illustration  of  it, 
without  believing  that  Pythagoras  and  Plato 
derived  their  sublime  theories  from  the  same 
fountain  with  the  Indian  sages."  * 

Professor  Max  Miiller  and  other  Oriental 
scholars  maintain,  as  you  know,  that  the  logic 
of  Aristotle  was  perhaps  a  Greek  presentation 
of  the  Hindu  logic.  You  will  also  remember 
that  Professor  Hopkins  writes,  in  his  "Religions 
of  India,"  that  Thales  and  Parmenides  were  both 
anticipated  by  the  sages  of  India,  while  the 
Eleatic  School  appears  merely  a  reflection  of  the 
Upanishads.      He   even   suggests  that   the   doc- 

♦  Works  (Calcutta  Ed.),  pp.  20,  125,  127. 
224 


THE   INFLUENCE    OF   INDIA. 

trines  propounded  by  Anaximander  and  Hera- 
clitus  might  not  have  been  known  first  in  Greece. 
We  should,  indeed,  bear  in  mind  that  after  the 
invasion  of  India  by  Alexander  the  Great  the  con- 
nection between  India  and  Greece  became  closer 
than  ever  before,  and  many  Hindu  philosophers 
lived  at  Athens  and  in  other  parts  of  Greece. 
They  were  known  as  G^nnnosophists,  or  Hindu 
philosophers  from  India.  At  that  time  Alex- 
andria became  the  center  of  trade  and  commerce 
between  India  and  Greece,  and  there  was  great 
opportunity  for  interchange  of  ideas  between 
the  Hindus  and  Western  nations.  Porphyry 
speaks  of  the  wise  men  from  India  in  high  terms 
of  praise  for  their  wisdom,  morality,  and  knowl- 
edge of  the  mysteries  of  the  universe.  In  regard 
to  Neo-Platonism,  Professor  Garbe  has  said  that 
Plotinus  was  in  perfect  agreement  with  the 
Hindu  philosophers,  and  that  his  disciple  Porphyry 
knew  of  the  Yoga  doctrine  of  union  with  the 
Deity.  It  was  unknown  to  any  of  the  Western 
nations,  like  the  Hebrews,  Parsees,  or  Egyptians. 
Through    Plato    and    his    followers,    the    Neo- 

Platonists,  Stoics,  and  Philo  of  Alexandria  were 

225 


INDIA   AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

also  influenced  by  the  Hindu  Philosophy.  The 
idea  of  the  Logos  which  formed  the  comer-stone 
of  the  philosophy  of  Plato,  of  the  Neo-Platonists, 
of  Philo,  and  later  of  the  Fourth  Gospel,  first 
arose  in  India.  In  the  Vedas  we  find  reference 
to  it;  and  it  has  moulded  Hindu  thought,  as  well 
as  the  religious  ideals  of  other  nations. 

Christianity  as  a  religion  owes  a  great  deal  to 
India.  This  may  startle  some  of  our  friends, 
but  from  the  historical  standpoint  it  is  true. 
If  we  read  the  religious  history  of  the  East,  we 
find  many  evidences  which  are  undeniable. 
For  instance,  Asoka,  who  lived  in  260  B.C.,  had 
his  edicts  inscribed  on  pillars  of  stone  during 
his  lifetime,  and  in  one  of  those  edicts  we  read 
that  he  sent  Buddhist  missionaries  to  different 
parts  of  the  world,  from  Siberia  to  Ceylon,  from 
China  to  Egypt,  and  that,  for  two  centuries  before 
the  advent  of  Jesus,  the  Buddhist  missionaries 
preached  the  sublime  ethics  of  Buddha  in  Syria, 
Palestine  and  Alexandria.  The  same  ethical 
ideas  were  afterwards  repeated  and  emphasized 
by  Christ.  The  Christian  historian  Mahaflfi, 
speaking  about  those  Buddhist  missionaries,  de- 

226 


THE   INFLUENCE   OF   INDIA. 

clared  it  to  be  a  fact  that  they  were  the  fore- 
runners of  Christ.  These  preachers  influenced 
the  Jewish  sect  known  as  the  Essenes;  and  the 
Roman  historian  PHny,  who  hved  between  23 
and  79  A.D.,  described  the  mode  of  Hving  of  the 
Essenes, — that  they  lived  like  hermits,  without 
having  any  possessions  or  any  sex  relation, 
being  celibates  and  associates  of  palm-trees.  It 
can  be  shown  that  they  belonged  to  the  sect 
founded  by  the  Buddhist  monks  from  India, 
who  lived  in  Syria,  Palestine,  and  Egypt.  Phi- 
losophers like  ScheUing  and  Schopenhauer,  and 
Christian  thinkers  like  Dean  Mansel  and  D.  Mill- 
man,  admit  that  the  sect  of  the  Essenes  arose 
through  the  influence  of  the  Buddhist  mis- 
sionaries who  came  from  India.  Moreover,  it  is 
a  V. ell-known  fact  that  John  the  Baptist  was  an 
Essene.  Ernest  Renan,  speaking  of  John  the 
Baptist,  says:  "He  led  there  a  life  like  that  of  a 
Yogi  of  India,  clothed  with  skins  or  cloth  of 
camel's  hair,  having  for  food  only  locusts  and 
wild  honey.  .  .  .  We  might  imagine  ourselves 
transported  to  the  banks  of  the  Ganges,  if  special 

features  had  not  revealed  in  this  recluse  the  last 

227 


INDU   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

descendant  of  the  grand  prophets  of  Israel.**  • 
Again  he  says:  "The  teachers  of  the  young 
were  also  at  times  a  species  of  anchorites,  re- 
sembhng  to  some  extent  the  Gurus  (spiritual 
preceptors)  of  Brahminism.  In  fact,  might  there 
not  in  this  be  a  remote  influence  of  the  Mounts 
(sages)  of  India?  Perhaps  some  of  those  wan- 
dering Buddhist  monks  who  overran  the  world, 
as  the  first  Franciscans  did  in  later  times,  preach- 
ing by  their  actions  and  converting  people  who 
knew  not  their  language,  might  have  turned 
their  steps  towards  Judea,  as  they  certainly  did 
towards  Syria  and  Babylon.  .  .  .  Babylon  had 
become  for  some  time  a  true  focus  of  Buddhism. 
Boudasp  (Bodhisattva)  was  reputed  a  wise 
Chaldean,  and  the  founder  of  Sabeism.  Sabeism 
was,  as  its  etymology  indicates,  baptism.'''  f 
And  he  continues:  "We  may  believe,  at  all 
events,  tliat  many  of  the  external  practices  of 
John,  of  the  Essenes,  and  of  the  Jewish  spiritual 
teachers  of  this  time,  were  derived  from  in- 
fluences then  but  recently  received  from  the  far 
East.     The  fundamental  practice  which  gave  to 

*  Life  of  Jesus,  p.  126.  ^  Ibid.,  p.   137. 

228 


THE   INFLUENCE   OF   INDIA. 

the  sect  of  John  its  character,  and  which  has 
given  him  his  name,  has  always  had  its  center 
in  lower  Chaldea,  and  constitutes  a  religion 
which  is  practised  there  to  this  day.  This  prac- 
tice was  baptism  or  total  immersion.  Ablutions 
were  already  familiar  to  the  Jews,  as  they  were 
to  all  the  religions  of  the  East.  The  Essenes 
had  given  them  a  peculiar  extension."  * 

Thus  we  see  that  baptism  by  water  was  in- 
troduced among  the  Essenes  by  the  Buddhist 
missionaries,  having  originated  in  India.  Bap- 
tism afterwards  became  the  principal  ceremony 
at  the  time  of  the  initiation  of  the  disciple  in  the 
religion  of  John.  The  hfe  of  Jesus  the  Christ 
as  described  in  the  Synoptic  Gospels, — the  immac- 
ulate conception  of  a  virgin  mother,  the  miracu- 
lous birth,  the  story  of  the  slaughter  of  infants 
by  Herod,  and  the  chief  events  of  his  life,  all 
these  seem  like  repetitions  of  what  happened  in 
the  lives  of  Krishna  (1400  B.C.)  and  of  Buddha 
(547  B.C.).  In  fact,  the  idea  of  the  incarnation 
of  God  is  purely  a  Hindu  idea.  It  was  not  known 
among    the    Jews.     The    Jews    never    accepted 

*  Renan,  Life  of  Jesus,  p.  ia8. 
229 


INDIA    AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

Christ  as  the  incarnation  of  Divinity,  but  from 
the   Vedic   period    the   Hindus   accepted   many 
Avataras  or  Incarnations  of  the  Lord  in  a  human 
form,  and  this  is  at  the  foundation  of  the  rehgion 
of  the  Hindus.     Many  of  the   famous  parables 
of  Jesus  the  Christ  existed  among  the  Hindus 
and  Buddhists  of  the  pre-Christian  era.     In  the 
Gospel   of   Buddha,    for   instance,   we   find   the 
parables  of  the  prodigal  son  and  of  the  marriage 
feast,  which  were  taught  by  Buddlia  to  his  dis- 
ciples  about   five   centuries   B.C.,   and   they   re- 
semble  in   every   way   the   similar   parables   of 
Jesus   the   Christ.     The   Roman   Catholics  have 
taken  a  great  many  of  their  ideas — their  form  of 
worship,  the  monastic  life,  the  nunnery  and  the 
idea  of  purgatory — from  the  Buddhists  of  India. 
In   the   religious  history  of  the  world,   Buddha 
was  tlie  first  to  organize  communities  of  monks 
and  nuns  and  to  establish  monasteries  and  nun- 
neries.    Under  cover  of  the  legend  of  Barlaam 
and  Josaphat,  the  story  of  Buddha  has  found  a 
niche  in   tlie   row  of  canonized   Catholic   saints 
and  has  his  Saint-day  in  the  calendar  of  the  Greek 
and  Roman  churches. 

230 


THE   INFLUENCE   OF   INDIA. 

The  Buddhist  missionaries  and  preachers  also 
influenced  the  faith  of  the  Gnostics  and  Mani- 
cheans,*  and  introduced  the  idea  of  reincarna- 
tion among  them.  Many  of  the  early  church 
Fathers,  like  Origen,  admitted  that  the  soul 
existed  before  birth  and  would  be  born  again, 
that  this  was  not  the  first  or  the  last  time  that  we 
had  come  or  would  come  to  this  world.  The  doc- 
trine of  pre-existence  and  reincarnation  of  souls 
was  accepted  by  the  majority  of  the  Christians 
until  it  was  suppressed  in  538  a.d.  by  Justinian, 
who  passed  this  law:  "Whoever  shall  support  the 
mythical  presentation  of  the  pre-existence  of  the 
soul  and  the  consequently  wonderful  opinion  of 
its  return,  let  him  be  Anathema."  It  was  for- 
eign to  Judaism  until  about  the  eighth  century 
A.D.,  when  under  the  influence  of  the  Hindu 
mystics  it  was  adopted  by  the  Karaites  and  other 
Jewish  sects.  The  Jewish  Encyclopedia  says: 
"  Only  with  the  spread  of  the  Cabala  did  it  begin 
to   take   root   in   Judaism,  and   then   it   gained 

-  -■   — —  -       ■     ■  ■  ■      ■  ■  _  —  -■ ,  ,  , ,    J 

*  Professor  E.  W.  Hopkins  declares  that  "  Neo- 
Platonism  and  Christian  Gnosticism  owe  much  to  India  " 
in  their  philosophical  beliefs.     See  p.  25, 

231 


INDIA    AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

believers  even  among  men  who  were  little  in- 
clined toward  mysticism."  And  again:  "Like 
Origen  and  other  church  Fathers  the  Cabalists 
used  as  their  main  argument  in  favor  of  the 
doctrine  of  metempsychosis  the  justice  of  God!"* 

The  Sanskrit  grammar  of  Panini,  who,  accord- 
ing to  Max  Miiller,  was  the  greatest  grammarian 
that  the  world  has  ever  seen,  has  given  a  key 
to  the  science  of  comparative  philology.  Many 
of  the  English  words  which  we  commonly  use 
can  be  traced  back  to  a  Sanskrit  ongin.  For 
instance:  Mother,  in  Latin  mater,  is  in  San- 
skrit Mdtar;  father,  in  Latin  pater,  is  in 
Sanskrit  Pitar;  brother,  in  Sanskrit  Bhrdtar; 
sister,  Swasar;  daughter,  Duhitar;  path,  in 
Sanskrit  Patha;  serpent,  Sarfa;  bond,  Bandha; 
etc.  The  word  "punch"  has  an  interesting 
history.  It  originally  meant  "five"  in  Sans- 
krit; so  the  expression,  "Give  him  a  punch," 
means  litcriilly  "Give  him  five  fingers."  We 
also  use  the  name  "punch"  for  the  drink,  which 
implies  that  it  is  made  up  of  five  ingredients. 

In  the  last  lecture,  I  showed  how  the  fables 

♦  Vol.  XII.  p.  332. 
232 


THE    INFLUENCE   OF   INDIA. 

of  ^sop  and  Pilpay  originated  in  India.  In- 
deed, these  stories  of  animals,  with  their  wonder- 
ful Hindu  morals,  have  influenced  the  young 
minds  of  Europe  and  America  for  many  centu- 
ries. I  think  no  child  is  brought  up  without 
studying  some  of  them  and  learning  the  morals 
attached  to  them.  Roman  law  and  Roman  juris- 
prudence also  were  perhaps  not  left  uninfluenced 
by  the  more  perfect  system  of  ancient  Hindu 
law. 

Now,  I  will  show  you  the  more  recent  influ- 
ence of  India  upon  Western  civilization.  Those 
who  have  studied  Schopenhauer's  philosophy 
have  undoubtedly  noticed  that  he  was  full  of 
Buddhistic  ideas,  as  well  as  of  the  principles  of 
the  Vedanta  philosophy.  He  paid  a  great  tribute 
to  the  latter  by  his  celebrated  saying,  "There 
is  no  study  more  beneficial  and  elevating  to 
mankind   than   the  study  of  the  Upanishads  * 

*  "Fifty  Upanishads,  tinder  the  name  of  Oupenek'hat, 
were  translated  from  the  Sanskrit  into  Persian  in  1656 
at  the  instance  of  the  Sultan  Mohammed  Dara  Shakoh, 
and  from  the  Persian  into  Latin  in  180 1-2  by  Anquetil 
Duperron." — Philosophy  of  the  Upanishads,  Pavil  Deus- 
•en,  p.  36. 

2» 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

(Vedanta).  It  has  been  the  solace  of  my  life, 
and  it  will  be  the  solace  of  my  death."  And 
Max  Miiller  declares,  "If  philosophy  is  moant  to 
be  a  preparation  for  a  happy  death,  or  Euthan- 
asia, I  know  of  no  better  preparation  for  it  than 
the  Vedanta  philosophy";  while  Schopenhauer's 
direct  disciple,  Paul  Deussen,  writes  in  his  "Phi- 
losophy of  the  Upanishads":  "God,  the  sole 
author  of  all  good  in  us,  is  not,  as  in  the  Old 
Testament,  a  Being  contrasted  with  and  distinct 
from  us,  but  rather  .  .  .  our  divine  self.  This 
and  much  more  we  may  learn  from  the  Upan- 
ishads: we  shall  learn  the  lesson  if  we  are  willing 
to  put  the  finishing  touch  to  the  Christian  con- 
sciousness, and  to  make  it  on  all  sides  consist- 
ent and  complete."  In  fact,  the  philosophy  of 
modern  Europe  has  obtained  a  new  life  since 
the  introduction  of  the  doctrines  of  Vedanta  into 
it.  Carlyle  was  influenced  by  the  teachings  of 
Krishna  through  the  English  version  of  the 
Bhagavad  Gita,*  first  translated  by  Charles 
Wilkins  during  the  administration  of  Warren 
Hastings,  and  now  well  known  to  you  as    the 

♦  Published  in  London  in  1785  and  in  New  York  in  1867. 

234 


TH^   INFLUENCE    OF   INDIA. 

**Song  Celestial."  Many  other  translations  have 
also  been  published  in  Europe  and  America. 
Frederick  Schlegel,  Victor  Cousin,  Amiel,  Paul 
Deussen,  Max  Miiller,  and  Emerson  were  great 
advocates  of  the  Vedanta  philosophy.  Emerson 
was,  indeed,  the  pioneer  of  Hindu  thought  in 
America.  He  says  in  his  Journal  that  the  study 
of  the  Upanishads  was  a  favorite  recreation  with 
him.  Perhaps  you  have  read  his  poem  on 
Brahman,  which  he  calls  "Brahm";  it  begins 
with  this  celebrated  verse: 

'■If  the  red  slayer  thinks  he  slays, 
Or  if  the  slain  thinks  he  is  slain, 
They  know  not  well  the  subtle  ways 
I  keep,  and  pass,  and  turn  again." 

This  is  almost  a  literal  translation  of  a  passage 
in  the  Bhagavad  Gita,  which  runs  thus: 

"He  who  thinketh  It  to  be  a  slayer  and  he 
who  thinketh  It  to  be  slain, — both  of  these  know 
not,  for  It  neither  killeth  nor  is  killed"  (chap,  ii, 
verse  19). 

Like  Emerson,  the  Concord  sage,  Thoreau,  was 

also  deeply  imbued  with  the  sublime  teachings  of 

Vedanta.      "The  Hindus,"  he  writes,  "are  more 

235 


INDIA    AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

serenely  and  thoughtfully  religious  than  the  He- 
brews. They  have,  perhaps,  a  purer,  more  inde- 
pendent, and  impersonal  knowledge  of  God.  Their 
religious  books  describe  the  first  inquisitive  and 
contemplative  access  to  God;  the  Hebrew  Bible, 
a  conscientious  return,  a  grosser  and  more  per- 
sonal repentance.  Repentance  is  not  a  free  and 
fair  highway  to  God.  A  wise  man  will  dispense 
with  repentance.  It  is  shocking  and  passionate. 
God  prefers  that  you  approach  him  thoughtfully, 
not  penitent,  though  you  are  the  chief  of  smners. 
It  is  only  by  forgetting  yourself  that  you  draw 
near  to  Him. 

"The  calmness  and  gentleness  with  which  the 
Hindu  philosophers  approach  and  discourse  on 
forbidden  themes  is  admirable. 

"What  extracts  from  the  Vedas  I  have  read 

fall  on  me  like  the  light  of  a  higher  and  purer 

luminary,  which  describes  a  loftier  course  through 

a  purer  stratum, — free  from  particulars,  simple, 

universal.     It   rises   on   me  like   the   full   moon 

after  the  stars  have  come  out,  wading  through 

some  far  summer  stratum  of  sky. 

"The  Vedant  teaches  how,  '  by  forsaking  re- 

236 


THE   INFLUENCE   OF    INDIA. 

ligious  rites,'  the  votary  may  'obtain  purification 
of  mind.' 

"One  wise  sentence  is  worth  the  State  of 
Massachusetts  many  times  over. 

"The  Vedas  contain  a  sensible  account  of  God. 

"The  reHgion  and  philosophy  of  the  Hebrew 
are  those  of  a  wilder  and  ruder  tribe,  wanting 
the  civility  and  intellectual  refinement  and 
subtlety  of  the  Hindus. 

"I  do  not  prefer  one  religion  or  philosophy  to 
another.  I  have  no  sympathy  with  the  bigotry 
and  ignorance'  which  makes  transient  and  partial 
and  puerile  distinctions  between  one  man's 
faith  and  another's,  as  Christian  and  heathen. 
I  pray  to  be  delivered  from  narrowness,  par- 
tiality, exaggeration,  bigotry.  To  the  philoso- 
pher, all  sects,  all  nations,  are  alike.  I  like 
Brahma,  Hari,  or  Buddha,  the  Great  Spirit,  as 
well  as  God." 

To-day  the  whole  Western  world  is  permeated 

with  Hindu  thoughts  and  ideals.     The  educated 

men  and  women  of  Europe  and  America,  who 

have  outgrown  the  superstitions,  doctrines,  and 

dogmas  of  orthodox  Christianity,  are  finding  the 

237 


INDIA   AND   HER  PEOPLE. 

right  solutions  of  the  problems  of  life  and  death, 
and  of  the  riddles  of  the  universe,  as  also  the 
greatest  comfort  and  happiness  in  the  universal 
religion  of  Vedanta,  which  is  in  perfect  harmony 
with  the  science,  logic,  and  philosophy  of  modern 
Europe.  To-day  the  moral  influence  of  Bud- 
dhism and  the  ethics  of  Vedanta  are  strongly  felt 
in  all  European  and  American  communities. 
You  see  how  many  vegetarians  are  springing  up, 
how  many  people  now  prefer  a  vegetarian  diet 
to  animal  flesh.  I  saw  the  other  day  in  New 
York  a  hospital  for  dogs  and  cats,  but,  as  I  have 
already  told  you,  such  a  hospital  was  built  in 
260  B.C.  by  the  Buddhist  emperor,  Asoka.  Then, 
again,  the  interest  in  concentration,  meditation, 
breathing  exercises,  New  Thought,  etc.,  which  is 
to  be  found  at  present  all  through  Europe  and 
America,  is  the  result  of  Eastern  influence.  Mrs. 
Eddy's  early  editions  of  "Science  and  Health" 
had  quotations  from  the  Bhagavad  Gita;  and 
Celia  Thaxter,  we  know,  was  deeply  influenced 
by  the  teachings  of  Krishna,  gathered  from  the 
same    source.     The    Theosophists   have,    indeed, 

disseminated  the  Hindu  teachings  most  widely 

23S 


THE   ESTFLUENCE   OF   INDIA. 

all  over  the  world.  Even  in  Mexico  I  discovered 
that  the  teachings  of  Vedanta  were  spreading 
rapidly. 

From  very  ancient  times  the  Hindus  as  a 
nation  have  practised  the  subUme  ethical  pre- 
cept of  non-resistance  of  evil,  and  the  grand 
moral  doctrine  of  returning  good  for  evil  and 
"love  thy  neighbor  as  thyself."  "Love  thy 
neighbor  as  thyself"  was  taught  by  Christ,  but 
why?  The  reason  was  not  given  by  Him.  In 
the  Vedas  we  find  the  reason:  "Thou  shalt  love 
thy  neighbor  because  thou  art  thy  neighbor 
in  spirit.  Thou  art  one  with  him."  ''Tat  twam 
asi,^''  "That  art  Thou."  Love  means  expression 
of  oneness.  The  Hindus  have  always  practised 
these  higher  ethical  virtues,  but  as  a  result  India 
has  been  invaded  again  and  again  by  the  greedy 
nations  of  Europe  and  Asia.  To-day  they  have 
been  enslaved  by  the  swords  of  a  Christian  nation, 
whose  Master  proclaimed  before  the  world  the 
doctrine  of  non-resistance  of  evil,  of  returning 
good  for  evil,  and  of  loving  one's  enemies.  As 
nations,  the  so-caUed  Christian  nations  of  Europe 
do  not  follow  the  path  of  their  Master,  do  not 

239 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

practise  non-resistance  of  evil,  do  not  love  their 
enemies;  on  the  contrary,  they  worhip  Mammon, 
and  seek  worldly  success  and  material  prosperity 
instead  of  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven.     They  send 
missionaries  as  forerunners  of  conquest  and  pio- 
neers   for   territorial   possession.     They   do   not 
spread  peace    and  goodwill  among  the   people, 
but  fire  and  guns,  as  we  have  seen  lately  in  the 
British  expedition  to  Tibet.     We  cannot  forget 
how  the  poor,   innocent  Tibetans  were  mowed 
down  by  Maxim  guns.     We  cannot  forget  how 
the  Portuguese  and  Dutch  Christians  held  in  one 
hand  the   Bible  and  in  the  other  a  gun,   and 
demolished   the    Hindu   temples   in    India.     We 
cannot    forget    how   the   Christian   missionaries, 
under  the  name  of  religion,  destroyed  the  monu- 
ments of  Buddhism  in  Japan   until  they  were 
driven  out  by  the  Japanese  Government  in  1614 
A.D.     The  Hindu  and  Buddhist  missionaries,  on 
the   contrary,   have   always   carried,   instead   of 
fire  and  sword,  the  gospel  of  peace  and  goodwill, 
and  have  civilized  the  nations. 

Think  what  Buddhism  has  done  for  China  and 
Japan,  for  Tibet  and  Burmah!     The  whole  civ- 

240 


THE   INFLUENCE   OF   INDIA. 

ilization  of  Japan  is  indebted  to  Buddhism  for 
its  art,  as  for  most  other  things.  Buddhism  was 
introduced  into  Japan  in  the  sixth  century  after 
Christ,  and  since  that  time  has  lived  there  in 
absolute  peace  and  harmony  with  Shintoism  and 
Confucianism.  Buddhism  was  introduced  into 
China  in  65  a.d.,  and  it  has  existed  among  the 
Chinese  for  nearly  two  thousand  years  without 
destroying  anything  of  Taoism  and  Confucianism, 
at  the  same  time  broadening  the  religious  ideals 
of  the  nation,  humanizing  and  civilizing  them. 
Lafcadio  Heam,  in  his  book  on  Japan,  shows 
how  much  Buddhism  has  done  for  Japan;  and 
those  who  have  read  "The  Soul  of  a  People," 
by  H.  Fielding  Hall,  cannot  help  admiring  the 
humane,  loving,  and  spiritual  qualities  of  the 
Buddhist  people.  Religious  toleration  has  always 
been  practised  by  the  Hindus  and  Buddhists. 
When  the  Parsees  were  driven  out  of  Persia  by 
the  Mohometans,  they  took  refuge  in  India, 
where  they  are  now  flourishing  and  living  un- 
molested. Under  the  influence  of  this  religious 
toleration  of  the  Hindus,  Western  nations,  espe- 
cially the  English,  are  beginning  to    learn  and 

241 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

practise  it.  The  Hindus  and  Buddhists  have 
never  robbed  their  neighbors  to  enrich  them- 
selves, but  they  have  given  to  the  world  the 
highest  moral  and  spiritual  truths,  not  in  mere 
theories,  but  by  setting  their  noble  examples. 
The  Hindus  and  Buddhists  have  always  been 
the  true  spiritual  teachers  of  the  world;  they 
know  how  to  preach  and  how  to  live  religion. 
By  a  strange  irony  of  fate,  to-day  they  are  called 
barbarous  and  uncivilized  heathens  by  the  ag- 
gressive pioneers  of  European  conquest.* 

Practical  morality  and  spirituality  have  always 
been  considered  by  the  Hindus  as  greater  than 
mere  intellectual  culture.  In  India,  religion 
has  been  the  source  of  philosophy,  science,  art, 
music,  and  everything.  From  religion  the  Hin- 
dus have  gained  their  education  and  culture, 
therefore  religion  is  a  vital  thing  with  them. 
It   is   the  primary  thing,  while  intellectual  cul- 

*"  Unhappy  Asia!  Do  you  call  it  unhappy  Asia? 
this  land  of  divine  needs  and  divine  thought !  Its  slumber 
is  more  vital  than  the  waking  life  of  the  rest  of  the  globe, 
as  the  dream  of  genius  is  more  precious  than  the  vigils 
of  ordinary  men.  Unhappy  Asia,  do  you  call  it?  It 
is  the  unhappiness  of  Europe  over  which  I  mourn." 
Benjamin  Disraeli  (Lord  Beaconsfield). 

242 


THE    INFLUENCE    OF    INDIA. 

ture  is  seconda^J^  The  Hindus  cultivate  the 
feeUngs  of  the  heart  and  do  not  care  much  for 
external  reforms.  It  is  for  this  reason  that 
their  civilization  is  based  upon  the  highest  moral 
and  spiritual  standards.  Hindu  civilization  is 
founded,  not  upon  the  commercial  and  indus- 
trial interests  of  the  people,  but  upon  the  eter- 
nal moral  and  spiritual  laws  which  govern  our 
lives.  It  is  not  like  the  European  civiliza- 
tion of  to-day,  which  inspires  a  nation  mainly 
to  protect  its  self-interest  at  the  expense  of 
other  nations,  and  to  gain  material  and  com- 
mercial prosperity  by  depriving  others  of  their 
rights,  by  robbing  the  weaker  nations  who  are 
kind,  innocent,  and  humane. 

According  to  the  Hindu  idea,  that  man  is 
civilized  who  is  versed  in  the  Scriptures;  who 
is  learned  and  wise  in  the  various  branches  of 
knowledge;  who  is  truthful,  unselfish,  and  who 
obeys  the  moral  laws;  who  helps  the  poor  and 
distressed;  who  returns  good  for  evil;  and  who 
conquers  hatred  by  love,  avarice  by  generosity. 
These  are  the  high  moral  virtues  which  should 
adorn   the   character   of   a   thoroughly  civilized 

243 


INDIA    AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

man.  A  civilized  man  must  always  cultivate 
these  virtues,  and  control  the  brute  impulses  and 
animal  propensities  with  which  he  is  bom.  By 
these  virtues  the  civilized  man  is  distinguished 
from  a  barbarous  savage,  as  also  from  lower 
animals.  A  civilized  man  or  woman  must  have 
polished  manners,  not  simply  as  an  external  form, 
as  we  see  in  Europe  to-day,  but  they  must  pro- 
ceed from  tlie  feelings  of  the  heart.  European 
civilization,*  on  the  contrary,  has  left  moral 
and  spiritual  standards  in  the  background,  and 
made  material  prosperity  and  intellectual  cul- 
ture the  chief  factors  of  civilization.  The  old 
brutal  law  of  "might  is  right"  is  still  in  its 
ascendancy  in  the  civilization  of  the  West.  The 
West  looks  mainly  to  externals,  but  India  looks 
chiefly  to  the  internal.  With  the  former,  worldly 
prosperity  is  the  goal,  and  intellectual  preemi- 

*  "Asia  revivified  would  act  upon  Eurojjc.  The  Eu- 
ropean comfort,  which  they  call  civilization,  is,  after 
all,  confined  to  a  very  small  space, — the  Island  of  Great 
Britain,  France,  and  the  course  of  a  .single  river,  the 
Rhine.  The  greater  part  of  Europe  is  as  dead  as  Asia, 
without  the  consolation  of  climate  and  the  influence  of 
immortal  traditions." — Benjamin  Disraeli  (Lord  Beacon»- 
lield). 

244 


THE   INFLUENCE    OF    INDIA. 

nence  is  its  watchword.  With  the  latter,  the 
attainment  of  spiritual  perfection  is  the  highest 
aim  of  civilization,  and  the  cultivation  of  moral 
virtues  is  a  necessary  step  or  auxiliary.  In 
Europe,  religion  has  always  retarded  the  progress 
of  true  civilization  and  freedom  of  thought  by 
the  Inquisition,  and  by  continuous  persecution 
on  the  part  of  priests  and  clergy.  Think  of  the 
fate  of  Galileo,  Giardino  Bruno,  and  a  host  of 
other  eminent  thinkers  of  the  Middle  Ages! 
G)nsequently  religion  has  been  put  aside  from 
practical  daily  hfe.  But  freedom  of  thought 
must  be  the  constant  companion  of  true  civiliza- 
tion. Social  and  political  freedom  are  also  the 
outcome  of  the  most  advanced  kind  of  civiliza- 
tion. Freedom  is  the  goal  for  every  man,  but 
that  freedom  must  be  based  upon  moral  and 
spiritual  laws. 

Through  the  influence  of  the  dominant  or 
rather  militant  civilization  of  Europe,  India  has 
lost  her  social  and  political  freedom.  She  has 
become  a  slave.  She  cannot  talk  freely;  she 
cannot  discuss  the  unjust  policy  and  oppressive 
methods  of  the   so-called  civilized  government 

245 


INDIA    AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

which  rules  over  her.  European  civilization  has 
given  to  India  the  standard  of  commercialism,  and 
has  set  an  example  of  extreme  selfishness,  and  this 
has  been  undermining  the  moral  and  spiritual 
standards  of  the  Hindus.  The  ideal  of  simplicity 
and  of  humanitarianism  is  every  day  sacrificed 
upon  the  altar  of  commercialism  and  greed  for 
material  possession.  Those  who  try  to  live  in 
India  a  Christ-like  life  of  purity  and  righteousness 
are  robbed  and  dispossessed  of  their  prooerty  by 
the  selfish  pioneers  of  the  aggressive  civihzation 
of  England.  Under  the  influence  of  British 
rule,  the  culture  of  the  feelings  of  the  heart 
among  the  younger  generation  has  become  almost 
an  impossibility.  The  moral  and  spiritual 
standards  of  the  Hindus  are  giving  place  to 
hypocrisy  and  intellectual  culture  for  material 
gain.  The  vices  of  Christian  civilization,  with 
slaughter-houses  and  saloons,  with  the  liquor 
trade  and  the  opium  trade  as  Government 
monopolies  for  revenue,  have  been  spreading  all 
over  India  under  the  civilizing  power  of  English 
rule. 

The   influence   of  Western   civili2ation   is   de- 

246 


THE    INFLUENCE   OF  INDIA. 

stroying  the  social  structure  of  the  Hindus, 
and  is  breaking  the  harmony  of  the  household 
life  which  has  existed  from  time  immemorial. 
But  it  has  done  some  good.  It  has  loosened  the 
rigidity  of  caste  rules  and  caste  distinctions, 
and  has  removed  the  degenerating  evil  effects 
of  priestcraft.  India  was  groaning  under  priest- 
craft, but  to-day  its  evil  effects  have  been  re- 
moved by  English  education.  English  educa- 
tion, on  the  other  hand,  has  disturbed  the  minds 
of  the  people;  has  shaken  their  faith  in  their 
religion;  has  made  its  students  advocates  of 
atheism,  agnosticism,  and  utilitarianism,  which 
are  the  banes  of  scientific  education.  The  great 
mass  of  Hindu  students  who  come  out  of  the  uni- 
versities every  year  do  not  believe  in  God  or  the 
human  soul,  do  not  care  for  anything  but  worldly 
success,  social  position,  fame,  and  glory.  Their 
first  object  in  life  is  to  earn  their  bread  and  butter 
by  some  honest  profession.  The  heartless  and 
demoralizing  influence  of  business  competition, 
which  never  existed  imder  caste  rules  in  India, 
is  suppressing  the  moral  and  spiritual  develop- 
ment of  the  people.     The  gladiatorial  pohcy  of 

247 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

European  civilization  is  now  in  full  force.  The 
educated  Hindus  of  to-day  do  not  know  which 
step  to  take  in  the  path  of  their  worldly  career. 
They  run  for  help  toward  the  governing  power, 
as  a  child  would  run  to  its  father  for  protection 
in  time  of  distress,  but  their  hearts  are  filled 
with  despair  when  they  meet  the  frowning  eyes 
of  task-masters  under  the  garb  of  Western 
culture  and  civilization.  A  civilized  English- 
man in  India  kicks  his  native  servant  to  death, 
and  is  fined  perhaps  five  dollars  by  the  Govern- 
ment. A  civilized  Englishman  on  a  tea  planta- 
tion in  Assam  will  carry  on  a  coolie  trade,  which 
is  almost  as  bad  as  the  old  slave-trade,  and  is 
seldom  punished  by  the  Government.  Such  are 
the  examples  which  the  Hindus  are  witnessing 
every  day  in  India. 

Western  civilization  under  British  rule  has 
opened  the  eyes  of  the  masses,  has  made  them 
realize  that  a  foreign  government  is  no  better 
than  a  curse  of  God  upon  a  nation;  and  a  nation 
which  tyrannizes  over  another  nation  for  its 
own  gain  is  not  entitled  to  be  called  civilized, 

according  to  the  Hindu  standard  of  civilization. 

248 


THE   INFLUENCE   OF    INDIA. 

But  I  must  say  that  India  has  derived  certain 
benefits  from  Enghsh  rule.  After  one  hundred 
and  fifty  years  of  oppression  and  tyranny,  it  has 
made  the  Hindus  stand  on  their  own  feet,  and 
has  brought  out  their  national  and  patriotic 
feelings,  in  which  they  were  lacking  for  nearly 
a  centurj\  It  has  brought  India  in  close  touch 
with  European  and  American  culture,  and  has 
driven  away  many  superstitious  ideas  from  the 
minds  of  the  Hindus.  The  Hindus  are  now 
taking  lessons  in  commercialism  from  the  civil- 
ized masters  of  Europe,  and  are  studying  their 
ways  and  manners,  so  that  in  future  they  will 
be  able  to  become  their  worthy  disciples.  Japan 
has  shown  to  the  world  what  ready  disciples  of 
Western  civilization  her  people  have  become  in 
less  than  half  a  century.  Now  it  will  be  the 
turn  for  poor  and  downtrodden  India.  We 
may  not  see  it,  but  future  generations  will  enjoy 
that  freedom  which  is  the  goal  of  all  nations. 

Another  good  thing  has  come  from  the  influ- 
ence of  Western  civilization,  and  that  is  the 
blessing  of  scientific  education  for  the  masses. 
It  has  opened  a  new  field,  and  has  brought  a 

249 


INDIA  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

tremendous  power  of  knowledge  with  it.  India 
is  beginning  to  wake  np  from  her  sleep  in  the 
darkness  which  prevailed  during  the  night  of 
the  Mahometan  rule  of  six  hundred  years,  and 
her  children  are  now  receiving  the  light  of  science 
and  the  blessings  of  knowledge  which  have  come 
from  her  contact  with  England.  India  will 
always  remain  gratefully  indebted  to  the  West, 
especially  to  England,  for  this  blessing,  and  will 
always  thank  the  Lord  that  He  has  given  to  her 
people  so  glorious  an  opportunity  to  accomplish 
her  future  greatness  and  political  regeneration. 
India  needs  the  spirit  of  Western  civilization, 
while  the  West  needs  yet  to  learn  from  the 
Hindus  the  lesson  of  religious  toleration,  as  also 
that  practical  method  by  which  it  will  establish 
its  civilization  upon  the  principles  of  higher 
ethics  and  true  spirituality  taught  by  the  uni- 
versal  religion   of  Vcdanta,   which   is   the  crest 

jewel  of  the  civilization  of  India. 

260 


WOAUN'S  PLACE  IN  HINDU  RELIGION. 


VII. 
WOMAN'S  PLACE   IN  HINDU   RELIGION. 

Well  has  it  been  said  by  Louis  Jaccoliot,  the 
celebrated  French  author  of  the  "Bible  in  India,'* 
that:  "India  of  the  Vedas  entertained  a  respect 
for  women  amounting  to  worship;  a  fact  which 
we  seem  httle  to  suspect  in  Europe  when  we 
accuse  the  extreme  East  of  having  denied  the 
dignity  of  woman,  and  of  having  only  made  of 
her  an  instrument  of  pleasure  and  of  passive 
obedience."  He  also  said:  "What!  Here  is  a 
civilization,  which  you  cannot  deny  to  be  older 
than  your  own,  which  places  the  woman  on  a 
level  with  the  man  and  gives  her  an  equal  place 
in  the  family  and  in  society." 

Long  before  the  civil  laws  of  the  Romans, 
which  gave  the  foundation  for  the  legislation  of 
Europe  and  of  America,  were  codified  by  Jus- 
tinian, the  Hindu  laws  of  Manu  were  closely 

253 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE, 

observed  and  strictly  followed  by  the  members 
of  Hindu  society  in  general.  Many  of  the  Ori- 
ental scholars,  having  compared  the  digest  of 
Justinian  and  the  Mosaic  laws  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment with  the  Hindu  laws,  have  arrived  at  the 
conclusion  that  the  code  of  Manu  was  related  to 
them  as  a  father  is  to  his  child.  Yet  the  Hindu 
law-givers  only  repeated  and  codified  the  ethical 
principles  which  were  inculcated  in  the  Vedas. 
Following  the  teachings  of  the  Vedas,  the  Hindu 
legislator  gave  equal  rights  to  men  and  women 
by  saying:  "Before  the  creation  of  this  phe- 
nomenal universe,  the  first-born  Lord  of  all 
creatures  divided  his  own  self  into  two  halves, 
so  that  one  half  should  be  male  and  the  other 
half  female."  This  illustration  has  established 
in  the  minds  of  the  Hindus  the  fundamental 
equality  of  man  and  woman.  Just  as  the  equal 
halves  of  a  fruit  possess  the  same  nature,  the 
same  attributes,  and  the  same  properties  in  equal 
proportion,  so  man  and  woman,  being  the  equal 
halves  of  the  same  substance,  possess  equal 
rights,  equal  privileges,  and  equal  powers.  This 
idea  of  the  equality  of  man  and  woman  was  the 

254 


woman's   place   in   HINDU   RELIGION. 

comer-stone  of  that  huge  structure  of  religion 
and  ethics  among  the  Hindus  which  has  stood 
for  so  many  ages  the  ravages  of  time  and  change, 
defying  the  on&Jaughts  of  the  short-sighted 
critics  of  the  world.  Therefore,  in  India,  what- 
ever is  claimed  for  the  man  may  also  be  claimed 
for  the  woman;  there  should  be  no  partiality 
shown  for  either  man  or  woman,  according  to 
the  ethical,  moral,  and  religious  standards  of  the 
Hindus. 

The  same  idea  of  equality  was  most  forcibly 
expressed  in  the  Rig  Veda  (Book  5,  h3min  61, 
verse  8).  The  commentator  explains  this  pas- 
sage thus:  "The  wife  and  husband,  being  the 
equal  halves  of  one  substance,  are  equal  in  every 
respect;  therefore  both  should  join  and  take 
equal  parts  in  all  work,  religious  and  secular." 
No  other  Scriptures  of  the  world  have  ever  given 
to  the  woman  such  equality  with  the  man  as 
the  Vedas  of  the  Hindus.  The  Old  Testament, 
the  Koran,  and  the  Zend-Avesta  have  made 
woman  the  scapegoat  for  all  the  crimes  com- 
mitted by  man.  The  Old  Testament,  in  describ- 
ing the  creation  of  woman  and  the  fall  of  man,  has 

255 


INDIA    AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

established  the  idea  that  woman  was  created  for 
man's  pleasure;  consequently  her  duty  was  to 
obey  him  implicitly.  It  makes  her  an  instru- 
ment in  the  hands  of  Satan  for  the  temptation 
and  fall  of  the  holy  man  with  whom  she  was 
enjoying  the  felicity  of  paradise.  Adam's  first 
thought  on  that  occasion  was  to  shift  the  burden 
of  guilt  on  to  the  shoulders  of  the  woman.  St. 
Paul,  in  the  New  Testament,  shows  that,  through 
Adam's  fall,  woman  was  the  means  of  bringing 
sin,  suffering,  and  death  into  the  world.  Popu- 
lar Christianity  has  been  trying  lately  to  take 
away  this  idea,  but,  in  spite  of  all  the  efforts  of 
the  preachers,  it  still  lurks  behind  the  eulogies 
that  have  been  piled  upon  the  conception  of 
womanhood  in  Christian  lands.  How  is  it  pos- 
sible, for  one  who  believes  the  accounts  given  in 
Genesis  to  be  literally  true,  to  reject  the  idea 
there  set  forth  that  woman  was  the  cause  of  the 
temptation  and  fall  of  man,  thereby  bringing  sin 
and  suffering  and  death  into  the  world?  For 
one  who  accepts  the  Biblical  account,  there  is  no 
other  alternative  left. 

In  India,  such  ideas  never  arose  in  the  minds 

256 


woman's    place   in   HINDU    RELIGION. 

of  the  Vedic  seers,   nor  have   kindred  notions 
found  expression  in  the  writings  of  the  law-givers 
of  later   days.     The   Hindu   legislators   realized 
that  both  sexes  were  equal,  and  said  before  the 
world  that  women  had  equal  rights  with  men 
for  freedom,  for  the  acquirement  of  knowledge, 
education,  and  spirituality.     It  is  for  this  reason 
that  we  find  in  the  Rig  Veda  the  names  of  so 
many    inspired    women    who    attained    to    the 
reahzation  of  the  highest  spiritual  truths.     These 
inspired  women  are  recognized  by  all  classes  as 
the  Seers  of  Truth,  as  spiritual  instructors,  divine 
speakers  and  revealers,  equally  with  the  inspired 
men  of  Vedic  hymns.     Those  who  believe  that 
the  Hindu  religion  debars  women  from  studying 
the  Vedas,  or  from  acquiring  religious  ideas  ought 
to  correct   these  erroneous  notions   by  opening 
their  eyes  to  the  facts,  which  are  indelibly  written 
on   the  pages  of  the  religious  history  of  India. 
The  one  hundred  and  twenty-sixth  hymn  of  the 
first  book  of  the  Rig  Veda  was  revealed  by  a 
Hindu  woman  whose  name  was  Romasha;    the 
one   hundred   and   seventy-ninth    hymn    of   the 
same  book  was  by  Lopamudra,  another  inspired 

257 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

Hindu  woman.  I  can  cite  at  least  a  dozen  names 
of  women  revealers  of  the  Vedic  wisdom,  such 
as  Visvavara,  Shashvati,  Gdrgi,  Maitreyi,  Apala, 
Ghosha,  and  Aditi,  who  instructed  Indra,  one  of 
the  Devas,  in  the  higher  knowledge  of  Brahman, 
the  Universal  Spirit.  All  of  these  are  the  names 
of  inspired  women  revealers  of  the  spiritual 
wisdom.  Every  one  of  them  lived  the  ideal  life 
of  spirituality,  being  untouched  by  the  things  of 
the  world.  They  are  called  in  Sanskrit  Brali- 
mavMinis,  the  speakers  and  revealers  of  Brahman. 
They  were  devout  performers  of  the  religious 
rites,  singers  of  holy  hymns,  and  often  discussed 
with  great  philosophers  the  most  subtle  problems 
of  life  and  death,  the  nature  of  the  soul  and  of 
God,  and  their  inter-relation,  and  sometimes,  in 
the  course  of  these  discussions,  they  defeated  the 
most  advanced  tliinkers  among  their  opponents. 

Those  who  have  read  the  Upanishads,  the 
philosophical  portions  of  the  Vedas,  know  that 
Gargi  and  Maitreyi,  the  two  great  women  Seers 
of  Truth,  discoursed  on  pliilosophical  topics  with 
YAjnavalka,  who  was  one  of  the  best  authorities 
in  the  Vedic  lore.     There  are  many  instances  of 

258 


WOMAN  S    PLACE    IN   HINDU   RELIGION. 

women  acting  as  arbitrators  on  such  occasions. 
When  Sankaracharya,  the  great  commentator  of 
the  Vedanta,  was  discussing  this  philosophy  with 
another  philosopher,  a  Hindu  lady,  well  versed 
in  all  the  Scriptures,  was  requested  to  act  as 
umpire. 

If,  in  the  face  of  such  facts,  the  Christian 
missionaries  say  that  the  Hindu  religion  prevents 
women  from  studying  the  Vedas,  or  denies  them 
a  place  in  religion,  we  can  only  console  ourselves 
by  thinking  that  the  eyes  of  our  missionary 
brothers  and  sisters  are  not  open  to  truths  which 
exist  outside  the  boundary-line  of  their  own 
particular  creed  and  religion.  It  is  the  especial 
injunction  of  the  Vedas  that  no  married  man 
shall  perform  any  rehgious  rite,  ceremony,  or 
sacrifice  without  being  joined  in  it  by  his 
wife;  should  he  do  so,  his  work  wiU  be  incom- 
plete and  half  finished,  and  he  wiU  not  get  the 
full  results,  because  the  wife  is  considered  to 
be  a  partaker  and  partner  in  the  spiritual  life 
of  her  husband:  she  is  called,  in  Sanskrit,  Saha- 
dharmini,    "spiritual    helpmate."     This    idea    is 

very  old,  as  old  as  the  Hindu  nation.     It  is  true 

259 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

that  there  were  certain  prohibitions  for  some 
women  against  certain  studies  and  ceremonies, 
which  were  prescribed  for  those  only  who  were 
in  a  different  stage  of  spiritual  development,  just 
as  a  certain  class  of  men  were  proscribed  from  the 
studies  of  some  portions  of  the  Vedas,  or  from 
performing  certain  ceremonies  simply  because 
they  were  not  ready  for  them. 

Coming  down  from  the  Vedic  period  to  the 
time  when  the  Puranas  and  Epics  were  written, 
we  find  that  the  same  idea  of  equality  between 
men  and  women  was  kept  alive,  and  that  the 
same  laws  were  observed  as  during  the  time  of 
the  Vedas.  Those  who  have  read  the  Ram- 
dyana  will  remember  how  exemplary  was 
the  character  of  Sit^,  the  heroine.  She  was 
the  embodiment  of  purity,  chastity,  and  kind- 
ness, the  personification  of  spirituality.  She  still 
stands  as  the  perfect  type  of  ideal  womanhood 
in  the  hearts  of  the  Hindu  women  of  all  castes 
and  creeds.  In  the  whole  religious  history  of 
the  world  a  second  Sit^  will  not  be  found.  Her 
life  was  unique.  She  is  worshipped  as  an  In- 
carnation of  God,  as  Christ  is  worshipped  among 

260 


woman's    place    in    HINDU    RELIGION. 

the  Christians.  India  is  the  only  country  where 
prevails  a  behef  that  God  incarnates  in  the  form 
of  a  woman  as  well  as  in  that  of  a  man. 

In  the  Mahabharata  we  read  the  account  of 
Sulabha,  the  great  woman  Yogi,  who  came  to 
the  court  of  King  Janaka  and  showed  wonderful 
powers  and  wisdom,  which  she  had  acquired 
through  the  practice  of  Yoga.  This  shows  that 
women  were  allowed  to  practise  Yoga;  even 
to-day  there  are  many  living  Yoginis  in  India 
who  are  highly  advanced  in  spirituality.  Many 
of  these  Yoginis  become  spiritual  teachers  of 
men.  Sri  Ramakrishna,  the  greatest  Saint  of 
the  nineteenth  century,  was  taught  spiritual 
truths  by  a  Yogini.* 

As  in  religion  the  Hindu  woman  of  ancient 
times  enjoyed  equal  rights  and  privileges  with 
men,  so  in  secular  matters  she  had  equal  share 
and  equal  power  with  them.  From  the  Vedic 
age  women  in  India  have  had  the  same  right  to 
possess  property  as  men;    they  could  go  to  the 


♦  See  "Life  and  Sayings  of  Ramakrishna,"  by  Prof. 
F.  Max  MuUer,  published  by  Scribner  and  Sons,  New 
York. 

361 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

courts  of  justice,  plead  their  own  cases,  and  ask 
for  the  protection  of  the  law. 

Those  who  have  read  the  famous  Hindu  drama, 
called  Sakuntala,  know  that  Sakuntala  pleaded 
her  own  case  and  claimed  her  rights  in  the 
court  of  King  Dushyanta.  Similar  instances 
are  mentioned  in  the  one  hundred  and  eighth 
hymn  of  the  tenth  book  of  the  Rig  Veda.  As 
early  as  2000  B.C.  Hindu  women  were  allowed 
to  go  to  the  battle-fields  to  fight  against 
enemies.  Sarama,  one  of  the  most  power- 
ful women  of  her  day,  was  sent  by  her  hus- 
band in  search  of  robbers.  She  discovered 
their  hiding-place  and  afterwards  destroyed 
them. 

In  the  fifth  book  of  the  Rig  Veda  we  read  that 
King  Namuchi  sent  his  wife  to  fight  against  his 
enemies.  She  fought  and  eventually  conquered 
them.  There  have  been  many  instances  of 
women  holding  high  political  powers,  governing 
states,  making  laws,  and  administering  justice 
to  all.  Throughout  the  history  of  India  are  to 
be  found  the  names  of  many  women  who  have 
governed    their    own    territories.     Some    women 

262 


woman's    place    in    HINDU    RELIGION. 

of  later  dates  resisted  foreign  invaders.*  The 
history  of  India  records  the  wonderful  general- 
ship of  the  Rdni  of  Jhansi,  who  held  a  portion  of 
the  British  army  in  check  during  the  famous 
mutiny  of  1857-58.  She  headed  her  troops 
against  the  British,  dressed  like  a  cavalry  officer, 
and  after  a  hard  fight  she  fell  in  battle  and  died, 
in  June,  1858.  Sir  Hugh  Rose  declared  that 
the  best  man  on  the  enemy's  side  was  the  Rant 
of  Jhansi,  not  knowing  that  the  Rant  was  not  a 
man,  but  the  Queen  herself. 

Not  long  ago  a  Hindu  lady,  Aus  Kour  by 
name,  was  elevated  by  the  Hindus,  with  the 
help  of  the  British  Government,  to  the  disputed 
throne  of  the  disorganized  and  revolted  State  of 
Patiala,  in  the  northwest  of  India.  She  has 
been  described  by  Enghsh  historians  as  the  most 
competent  person  to  govern  that  state.  In  less 
than  a  year  she  brought  peace  and  security  into 
all  parts  of  her  dominions. 

Ahalyd  Bai,   the  Queen  of  M^lwd,   governed 

♦  The  heroic  queen  Chand  Bibi,  who  defended  the 
fort  of  Ahmednagar  against  the  attacks  of  the  Mogul 
emperor  Akbar,  may  be  called  the  Joan  of  Arc  of  India. 

263 


INDIA    AND   HER    PEOPLE. 


her  kingdom  with  great  success  for  twenty  years, 
devoting  herself  to  the  rights  and  welfare  of  her 
people  and  the  happiness  of  her  subjects;  she 
was  so  great  and  popular  that  both  the  Mahome- 
tans and  the  Hindus  united  in  prayers  for  her 
long  life;  so  little  did  she  care  for  name  and 
fame  that,  when  a  book  was  written  in  her  honor, 
she  ordered  it  to  be  destroyed,  and  took  no 
notice  of  the  author. 

America  boasts  of  her  civilization  and  the 
freedom  of  her  women,  but  we  know  how  little 
power  and  how  few  privileges  have  been  given 
to  women.  The  cause  of  this  is  deeply  rooted 
in  the  Bibhcal  conception  of  womanhood.  It  is 
claimed  that  Christianity  has  elevated  the  con- 
dition of  women;  but,  on  the  contrary,  history 
tells  us  that  it  is  Christianity  that  has  stood 
for  centuries  in  the  way  of  the  religious,  social, 
and  political  freedom  of  women.  Think  of  the 
women's  suffrage  societies,  and  how  hard  they 
are  strugghng  to  win  recognition  of  the  rights 
of  their  sex.*     Roman   law   and   Roman   juris- 


♦  The    following  extract   from   a   letter  sent   by   Mrs. 
Elizabeth  Cady  Stanton  to  Bishop  Potter,  of  New  York, 

264 


woman's    place  in   HINDU    RELIGION. 

prudence  gave  woman  a  place  far  more  elevated 
than  that  given  to  her  by  Christianity.  The 
Christians  learned  to  honor  women  from  the 
pagans.  The  Teutonic  tribes  believed,  like  the 
Hindus,  in  the  perfect  equality  of  both  sexes 
in  all  domestic  and  social  relations,  and  held 
that  a  queen  was  as  good  as  a  king.  Even 
to-day  the  Christian  nations  fail  to  see  this 
equality  between  man  and  woman. 

on  15th  January,  1901,  will  give  an  idea  of  the  situa- 
tion: 

"Ever  and  anon  public  thought  is  aroused  by  a  terrible 
tragedy,  like  the  one  enacted  in  Paterson,  or  by  some 
unusually  open  manifestation  of  vice  in  the  streets  of 
our  cities.  Though  an  aroused  public  sentiment  can 
repress  the  evils  for  a  time  in  one  locality,  they  reappear 
at  once,  with  renewed  energy,  in  many  others.  Occa- 
sionally, church  officials  make  their  protests,  but  no 
one  seems  to  imderstand  the  hidden  cause  of  all  these 
outrages. 

"The  authorities  of  the  Episcopal  Church  are  just 
now  aroused  to  action.  The  first  step  to  be  taken  is 
to  teach  woman  a  higher  respect  for  herself,  and  the 
rising  generation  a  more  profoimd  reverence. 

"The  Church  and  the  Bible  make  woman  the  foot- 
ball for  the  jibes  and  jeers  of  the  multitude. 

"When,  in  their  marriage  service,  it  is  the  duty  of 
woman  to  obey,  and  be  given  away  by  some  man,  she 
is  made  the  inferior  and  subject  of  man. 

"All  our  efForts  to  suppress  the  social  evil  are  hope- 
less until  woman  is  recognized,  in  the  canon  law  and  all 

265 


INDIA    AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

The  Hindu  law  allows  the  women  a  much 
greater  share  in  the  management  of  property 
than  most  of  the  statutes  of  the  Christian  nations. 
In  family  affairs,  religious  or  secular,  especially 
in  business  or  trade,  a  husband  in  India  cannot 
take  any  step  without  consulting  the  female 
members  of  the  family. 

It  is  often  said  that  Hindu  \vomen  are  treated 
like  slaves  by  their  husbands,  but  it  is  not  a 
fact.  On  the  contrary,  the  Hindu  women  get 
better  treatment  than  the  majority  of  the  wives 

church  discipline,  as  equal  in  goodness  to  bishops,  arch- 
bishops, and  the  Pope  himself. 

"The  sentiments  of  men  in  high  places  are  responsible 
for  the  outrages  on  woman  in  the  haunts  of  vice  and 
on  the  highway.  If  the  same  respect  the  masses  are 
educated  to  feel  for  cathedrals,  altars,  symbols,  and 
sacraments  were  extended  to  the  mothers  of  the  race, 
as  it  should  be,  all  these  problems  would  be  speedily 
settled. 

"When  our  good  men  in  State  and  Church  try  to 
suppress  the  terrible  outrages  on  woman,  while  thry 
deal  with  the  evil  on  the  surface,  they  should  begin  the 
lasting  work  of  securing  to  her  equal  honor,  dignity,  and 
respect  by  sharing  with  her  all  the  liberties  they  them- 
selves enjoy. 

"The  les.son  of  inferiority  is  taught  everywhere,  and 
in  these  terrible  tragedies  of  life  we  have  the  result  of 
the  universal  degradation  of  woman." 

206 


woman's   place   in   HINDU   RELIGION. 

of  Englishmen  or  of  Americans  endowed  with 
the  spirit  of  an  Enghsh  husband.  Sir  Monier 
Monier  Wilhams  says :  ' '  Indian  wives  often  possess 
greater  influence  than  the  wives  of  Europeans." 
The  number  of  wife-beaters  is  considerably 
smaller  in  India  than  in  Europe  or  America. 
He  is  not  a  true  Hindu  who  does  not  regard  a 
woman's  body  as  sacred  as  the  temple  of  God. 
He  is  an  outcast  who  touches  a  woman's  body 
with  irreverence,  hatred,  or  anger.  "A  woman's 
body,"  says  Manu  the  law-giver,  "must  not  be 
struck  hard,  even  with  a  flower,  because  it  is 
sacred."  It  is  for  this  reason  that  the  Hindus 
do  not  allow  capital  punishment  for  women. 
The  treatment  of  woman,  according  to  Hindu 
religion,  will  be  better  understood  from  some  of 
the  quotations  from  the  laws  of  Manu  and  other 
law-givers.     Manu  says: 

1.  "The  mouth  of  a  woman  is  always  pure." 
V,  130. 

2.  "Women  must  be  honored  and  adorned  by 
their  fathers,  husbands,  brothers,  and  brothers- 
in-law,  who  desire  their  own  welfare."     Ill,  55. 

3.  "Where  women  are  honored,  there  the  Devas 

267 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

(gods)  are  pleased;    but  where  they  are  dishon- 
ored, no  sacred  rite  yields  rewards."     Ill,  56. 

4.  "Where  female  relations  live  in  grief,  the 
family  soon  wholly  perishes;  but  that  family 
where   they   are   not    unhappy   ever   prospers." 

ni,  57. 

5.  "In  like  manner,  care  must  be  taken  of 
barren  women,  of  those  who  have  no  sons,  of 
those  whose  family  is  extinct,  of  wives  and 
widows  faithful  to  their  lords,  and  of  women 
afflicted  with  diseases."     VIII,  28. 

6.  "A  righteous  king  must  punish  like  thieves 
those  relatives  who  appropriate  the  property  of 
such  females  during  their  lifetime."     VIII,  29. 

7.  "In  order  to  protect  women  and  Brahmins, 
he  who  kills  in  the  cause  of  right  commits  no 
sin."     VIII,  349. 

8.  "One's  daughter  is  the  highest  object  of 
tenderness;  hence,  if  one  is  offended  by  her,  one 
must  bear  it  without  resentment."  IV,  185. 
(Compare  this  with  the  statements  of  the  mission- 
aries that  the  Hindu  religion  sanctions  the  killing 
of  girls.) 

9.  "A  maternal  aunt,  the  wife  of  a  maternal 

368 


woman's    place   in   HINDU   RELIGION. 

uncle,  a  mother-in-law,  and  a  paternal  aunt, 
must  be  honored  like  the  wife  of  one's  spiritual 
teacher;  they  are  equal  to  the  wife  of  one's 
spiritual  teachei."     II,  131. 

(In  India,  the  wife  of  a  spiritual  teacher  is 
regarded  as  a  living  goddess.) 

10.  "Towards  the  sister  of  one's  father  and  of 
one's  mother  and  towards  one's  elder  sister,  one 
must  behave  as  towards  one's  mother;  but  the 
mother  is  more  venerable  than  they."     II,  133. 

11.  "But  the  teacher  is  ten  times  more  vener- 
able than  the  sub-teacher,  the  father  a  hundred 
times  more  than  the  teacher,  but  the  mother  a 
thousand  times  more  than  the  father."     II,  145. 

12.  "A  chaste  wife,  who  after  the  death  of  her 
husband  constantly  remains  chaste,  reaches 
heaven,  though  she  have  no  son,  just  like  those 
chaste  men."  V,  160.  (Compare  this  with  the 
statements  of  the  missionaries  that  Hindu  widows 
are  cursed  by  their  religion.) 

13.  "In  that  family  where  the  husband  is 
pleased  with  his  wife  and  the  wife  with  her  hus- 
band, happiness  will  assuredly  be  lasting."  Ill, 
60. 


INDIA   AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

14.  "Offspring,  the  due  performance  of  re- 
ligious rites,  faithful  service,  highest  conjugal 
happiness,  and  heavenly  bliss  for  the  ancestors 
and  one's  self,  depend  upon  the  wife  alone."  IX, 
28. 

15.  "Let  mutual  fidelity  continue  till  death; 
this  may  be  considered  as  a  summary  of  the 
highest  law  for  husband  and  wife."     IX,  loi. 

From  other  Hindu  laws: 

"Woman   possesses   an   unequalled   means   of 
purification:  they  never  become  (entirely)  foul." 
"Women  are  pure  in  all  limbs." 

1.  "Man  is  strength,  woman  is  beauty;  he  is 
the  reason  that  governs  and  she  is  the  wisdom 
that  moderates." 

2.  "He  who  despises  woman  despises  his 
mother." 

3.  "He  who  is  cursed  by  a  woman  is  cursed 
by  God." 

4.  "The  tears  of  a  woman  call  down  the  fire 
of  heaven  on  those  who  make  them  flow." 

5.  "Evil  to  him  who  laughs  at  a  woman's 
sufferings;    God  shall  laugh  at  his  prayers." 

6.  "The  songs  of  women  are  sweet  in  the  ears 

'270 


woman's    place    in   HINDU    RELIGION. 

of  the  Lord;    men  should  not,  if  they  wish  to 
be  heard,  sing  the  praises  of  God  without  women." 

7.  "There  is  no  crime  more  odious  than  to 
persecute  women,  and  to  take  advantage  of  their 
weakness  to  despoil  them  of  their  patrimony." 

8.  "The  woman  watches  over  the  house,  and 
the  protecting  divinities  (Devas)  of  the  domestic 
hearth  are  happy  in  her  presence.  The  labors 
of  the  field  should  never  be  assigned  to  her." 

9.  "When  relatives,  by  some  subterfuge,  take 
possession  of  the  property  of  a  woman,  her  car- 
riages or  her  jewels,  such  evil-doers  shall  descend 
into  the  infernal  regions." 

10.  "The  virtuous  woman  should  have  but 
one  husband,  as  the  right-minded  man  should 
have  but  one  wife." 

Here  is  the  definition  of  a  wife  given  in  the 
Mahabharata : — 

A  wife  is  half  the  man,  his  truest  friend; 
A  loving  wife  is  a  perpetual  spring 
Of  virtue,  pleasure,  wealth;  a  faithful  wife 
Is  his  best  aid  in  seeking  heavenly  bliss ; 
A  sweetly-speaking  wife  is  a  companion 
In  solitude,  a  father  in  advice, 
A  mother  in  all  seasons  of  distress, 
A  rest  in  passing  through  life's  wilderness."  ' 
271 


INDIA  AND    HER   PEOPLE. 

The  Christian  missionaries  say  that  these  laws 
are  most  horrible!  Yet  to-day  in  some  parts  of 
Europe  women  are  yoked  together  with  horses 
and  cattle  in  the  field,  and  obhged  to  do  the 
roughest  labor! 

The  unmarried  daughter,  not  the  son,  inherits 
the  mother's  estate.  This  is  the  Hindu  law. 
The  special  property  of  the  wife  which  she  gets 
as  dowry  cannot  be  used  by  the  husband.  A 
wife  in  India  is  not  responsible  for  the  debts 
of  her  husband  or  son.  The  mother  in  India 
owns  her  children  as  much  as  the  father  does. 

Mrs.  F.  A.  Steele,  who  has  written  several 
novels  on  Indian  life,  and  who  resided  in  India 
for  twenty-five  years,  writes  of  Indian  women: 
"In  regard  to  the  general  position  of  women 
in  India,  I  think  it  is  rather  better  than  our 
own.  Women  in  India  can  hold  property,  and 
a  widow  always  gets  a  fixed  portion  of  her  hus- 
band's estate." 

Some  American  ladies  who  lived  in  India, 
not  as  missionaries  but  as  impartial  observers, 
have  corroborated  these  statements.  It  is  gen- 
erally said  that  the  Hindu  law  makes  no  provi- 


woman's    place    in  HINDU   RELIGION. 

sion  for  the  Hindu  widows.  Let  us  see  what 
an  Enghsh  historian  says: 

"In  the  absence  of  direct  male  heirs,  widows 
succeed  to  a  hfc-interest  in  real  and  abso- 
lute interest  in  personal  property.  The  daugh- 
ters inherit  absolutely.  Where  there  are  sons, 
mothers  and  daughters  are  entitled  to  shares, 
and  wives  hold  peculiar  property  from  a  variety 
of  sources  over  which  a  husband  has  no  control 
during  their  lives,  and  which  descends  to  their 
own  heirs,  with  a  preference  to  females."  * 

Much  has  been  said  against  the  marriage 
customs  of  the  Hindus.  I  have  heard  a  great 
deal  of  objection  to  them,  in  this  country  espe- 
cially. It  is  true  that  marriage  by  courtship 
is  not  considered  by  the  Hindus  to  be  the  highest 
and  best  system;  they  say  this  method  generally 
proceeds  from  selfish  desires,  or  the  mere  grati- 
fication of  passion.  Marriage,  according  to  the 
Hindu  ideas,  must  be  based  on  the  ideal  of  the 
spiritual  union  of  the  souls,  and  not  on  the 
lower  desires  for  sense  pleasures.  It  must  be 
a  sacred  bond.     The  Hindus  were  the  first  to 

♦Mill's  History  of  India,  Vol.  I,  p.  248. 
273 


INDL.\  AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

recognize  marriage  as  an  indissoluble  holy  bond 
between  two  souls.  Even  death  does  not  dissolve 
it;  and  this  idea  prevails  in  the  hearts  of  many 
Hindu  wives,  who  do  not  care  to  remarry  after 
the  death  of  their  husbands,  but  prefer  to  de- 
vote their  lives  to  fulfilling  spiritual  duties. 

Mrs.  Steele  says:  "I  have  seen  many  a  virgin 
widow  who  gloried  in  her  fate."  Marriage  is 
not  considered  to  be  the  only  aim  of  life.  There 
are  nobler  and  higher  purposes,  and  they  must 
be  accomplished  before  death  comes.  The  whole 
spirit  of  the  marriage  laws  in  India  is  in  favor 
of  the  legal  union  between  one  man  and  one 
woman,  but  they  allow  a  little  latitude  for  the 
preservation  of  the  race.  It  is  said  that  a  man 
may  marry  a  second  wife  for  progeny  alone, 
with  the  consent  of  his  first  wife,  in  case  she 
should  be  barren. 

The  aim  of  Hindu  law-givers  was  to  build  a 
society  where  the  moral  and  spiritual  evolution 
of  the  individual  should  be  free  from  legal  inter- 
ference. Therefore  they  divided  society  into 
classes,  and  set  forth  laws  for  each  class;  the 
marriage  laws  in  India  have  been  many-sided  in 

274 


woman's    place    in    HINDU   RELIGION. 

order  to  suit  the  different  tendencies  which  pre- 
vailed among  different  classes.  Hindu  law-givers 
understood  that  one  law  would  not  do  for  all 
people.  The  higher  the  class  in  society,  the 
more  restricted  are  their  lav/s;  for  instance,  the 
same  law-giver,  who  allows  the  marriage  of  widows 
amongst  the  lower  classes,  sets  forth  arguments 
against  its  practice  among  women  of  a  higher 
class.  Nearly  all  Hindu  widows  of  the  lower 
classes  can  remarry  after  the  death  of  their 
husbands;  but  it  depends  upon  the  choice  both 
of  the  husband  and  the  wife.  The  Hindu  law 
provides  for  the  remarriage  of  widows  *  and  of 
divorced  women  in  the  same  way  as  for  the 
remarriage  of  widowers  and  divorced  men.  Ac- 
cording to  the  law,  a  wife  may  abandon  her 
husband  (if  she  choose)  if  he  be  criminal,  insane, 

*  "That  the  remarriage  of  widows  in  Vedic  times  was 
a  national  custom  can  be  easily  established  by  a  variety 
of  proofs  and  arguments.  The  very  fact  of  the  Sans- 
krit language  having  from  ancient  times  such  words  as 
didhishu,  'a  man  that  has  married  a  widow,'  parapurva, 
'a  woman  that  has  taken  a  second  husband,'  paunar- 
bhava,  'a  son  of  a  woman  by  her  second  husband,'  are 
enough  to  establish  it." — "Indo-Arians,"  by  Rajendra 
Lala  Mitra,  Vol.  11,  p.  155. 

276 


INDIA    AND    HER    PEOPLE, 

impotent,  outcast,  or  afflicted  with  leprosy,  also 
because  of  his -long  absence  in  foreign  lands,  and 
can  take  another  husband.  The  Roman  law- 
gives  no  other  causes  of  divorce  than  these. 
Similarly,  a  husband  may  abandon  his  wife  if 
she  be  drunken  or  adulterous,  afflicted  with  lep- 
rosy, or  cruel  towards  husband  and  children,  and 
can  remarry.  But  the  Hindu  law  does  not  allow 
a  divorce  simply  for  incompatibility  of  temper, 
nor  because  of  the  simple  desire  in  either  party 
to  marry  another. 

It  is  said  that  the  greatest  curse  is  the  child- 
marriage  in  India,  and  that  it  is  sanctioned  by 
religion;  but  this  is  not  true.  Religion  distinctly 
forbids  it,  and  in  many  parts  of  India  so-called 
child-marriage  is  nothing  but  a  betrothal.  The 
betrothal  ceremony  takes  place  some  years 
before  the  real  marriage  ceremony;  sufficient 
cause  may  prolong  the  period  of  betrothal  for 
even  three  or  four  ^^-cars.  In  Northern  India  the 
real  marriage  docs  not  take  place  until  the  parties 
are  of  proper  age;  it  is  attended  with  music, 
feasting,  and  the  presentation  of  gifts.  A  be- 
trothed wife  stays    in    her    father's   house  until 

276 


woman's   place   in   HINDU   RELIGION. 

the  time  of  her  real  marriage.  In  Southern 
India,  customs  are  not  the  same;  many  abuses 
have  crept  in,  and  child-wives  are  often  given 
to  their  husbands  at  too  tender  an  age.  The 
Hindu  law  does  not  prevent  the  remarriage  of 
the  betrothed  wife  after  the  death  of  her  be- 
trothed husband,  but  it  says  that  under  such 
circmnstances  the  parents  of  the  betrothed  wife 
commit  a  sin  as  of  giving  false  witness  before 
the  court  of  justice. 

According  to  the  Hindu  law,  it  is  better  for  a 
girl  of  a  high  caste  to  remain  unmarried  for  life 
than  to  marry  one  who  is  not  of  noble  birth  or 
from  a  family  of  the  same  caste,  or  one  who  is 
unqualified  and  illiterate. 

Eight  different  kinds  of  marriages  are  described 
and  discussed  by  Hindu  legislators,*  among 
which  marriage  with  the  consent  of  the  parents 
of  both  parties,  and  not  a  sentimental  love  con- 
tract, is  considered  to  be  the  highest.  In  ancient 
times,  when  the  country  was  governed  by  Hindu 
kings,  the  Svayambara  system  of  marriage  was 
very  common.     It  was  the  system  of  free  choice 

*  Manu,  III,  21 — 3;^. 
277 


INDIA   AND    HER    PEOPLE. 

of  a  husband  by  the  maiden.  Those  who  have 
read  "The  Light  of  Asia,"  by  Sir  Edwin  Arnold, 
will  remember  how  Buddha  was  married.  But 
when  the  Hindus  lost  their  pohtical  freedom  they 
would  have  been  unable  to  prevent  the  inter- 
mixture of  races  had  such  liberty  been  continued; 
so  they  abandoned  that  system  of  marriage  and 
adopted  that  of  betrothing  their  sons  and  daugh- 
ters in  their  youth.  The  betrothal,  however,  is- 
not  practised  in  all  parts  of  the  country. 

Christian  missionaries  have  brought  false 
charges  against  the  moral  character  of  Hindu  wo- 
men; and  some  of  our  own  countrywomen,  having 
enlisted  their  names  as  Christian  converts,  have, 
I  regret  to  say,  joined  these  missionary  detractors 
in  bringing  false  charges  against  Hindu  women. 
If  you  wish  to  know  the  true  condition  of  the 
women  in  India,  you  will  have  to  reject  ninety- 
nine  per  cent  of  the  statements  which  you  hear 
from  the  missionaries,  or  from  Christian  con- 
verts who  come  from  India.  There  are  immoral 
women  in  India,  as  there  are  in  every  other 
country,  but  it  is  more  than  wicked  to  make  such 
sweeping  statements  as  that  there  is  no  morality 

278 


woman's   place   in   HINDU    RELIGION. 

among  Hindu  women.  The  Pandita  Ramabai 
said:  "I  would  not  trust  one  of  my  girls  in  any 
Indian  home.  The  immorality  in  that  country 
is  horrible!"  ♦ 

Self-burning  of  widows  was  not  sanctioned  by 
the  Vedic  religion,  but  was  due  to  other  causes. 
Some  say  that,  when  the  Mahometans  conquered 
India,  they  treated  the  widows  of  the  soldiers 
so  brutally  that  the  women  preferred  death, 
and  voluntarily  sought  it.  It  is  often  said  that 
the  "Christian  government"  has  suppressed 
Suttee;  but  the  truth  is,  that  the  initiative  in 
this  direction  was  taken  by  that  noble  Hindu, 
Rdjah  R^jn  Mohan  Roy,  who  was,  however, 
obhged  to  secure  the  aid  of  the  British  Govern- 
ment in  enforcing  his  ideas,  because  India  was 
a  subject  nation.  The  educated  classes  among 
the  Hindus  had  strongly  protested  against  the 
priests  f  who  supported  this  inhuman  custom 
(which  prevailed  only  in  certain  parts  of  India), 
and  efforts  had  been  made  to  suppress  the  evil 
by  force;    but,  as  it  could  not  be  done  without 

*  Fitchburg  Sentinel,   i8  April,   1898. 
t  BrAhminism  and  Hinduism,  p.  482. 
279 


INDIA   AND  HER   PEOPLE. 

official  help,  appeal  was  made  to  the  Viceroy, 
Lord  Bentinck,  and  a  law  against  Suttee  was 
passed.  Thus  the  evil  was  practically  sup- 
pressed by  the  Hindus  themselves,  aided  by 
the  British  Government. 

Sir  Monier  Monier  Williams  says:  "Perhaps  the 
most  important  point  to  which  he  (Rajah  Ram 
Mohan  Roy)  awakened  attention  was  the  absence 
of  all  Vedic  sanction  for  the  self-immolation  of 
widows  (Suttee,  in  Sanskrit  Sati) .  It  was  princi- 
pally his  vehement  denunciation  of  this  practice, 
and  the  agitation  against  it  set  on  foot  by  him, 
which  ultimately  led  to  the  abolition  of  Sati 
throughout  British  India  in  1829."* 

The  exclusion  of  women  from  the  society  of 
men,  which  we  find  in  some  parts  of  India,  is 
not  due  to  their  religion,  but  to  other  causes. 
Although  this  custom  existed  among  the  aristo- 

♦  Some  of  the  BrAhmin  priests  perverted  the  meaning 
of  the  Vedic  text  which  describes  the  funeral  ceremony 
of  the  ancient  Hindus.  The  true  meaning  of  that  verse 
is:  "Rise  up,  woman,  thou  art  lying  by  one  whose  life 
is  gone;  come,  come  to  the  world  of  the  hving,  away 
from  thy  husband,  and  become  the  wife  of  him  who 
grasps  thy  hand  and  is  willing  to  marry  thee." — Rig 
Veda.  Bk.    10,  Hymn   18,  verse  8. 

280 


woman's   place   in   HINDU    RELIGION. 

cratic  classes  of  the  Hindu  community,  still  it 
came  into  practice  largely  for  self-defence  against 
Mahometan  brutality.  The  Purda  system,  that 
is,  the  custom  of  not  allowing  women  to  appear 
in  public  without  a  veil,  was  not  of  Hindu  origin, 
but  was  introduced  into  India  by  the  Mahome- 
tans. There  are  many  parts  of  India  where  the 
Purda  system  does  not  exist  at  all,  where  men 
mix  freely  with  women,  travel  in  the  same  vehicle, 
and  appear  in  public  with  the  women  unveiled. 
Sir  Monier  Monier  Williams  writes :  ' '  More- 
over, it  must  be  noted  that  the  seclusion  and 
ignorance  of  women,  which  were  once  mainly 
due  to  the  fear  of  the  ^Mahometan  conquerors, 
do  not  exist  in  the  same  degree  in  provinces 
unaffected  by  those  conquerors." 

Every  one  has  heard  the  old  missionary  tale 
of  the  Hindu  mothers  throwing  their  babies  to 
the  crocodiles  in  the  Ganges.  Touching  pic- 
tures of  a  black  mother  with  a  white  baby  in 
her  arms,  calmly  awaiting  the  advent  of  a  large 
crocodile,  have  adorned  many  Sunday-school 
books.  Perhaps  this  story  arose  from  the  fact 
that  in  certain  places  poor  Hindu  mothers  place 

281 


INDIA    AND   HER   PEOPLE. 

the  dead  bodies  of  their  little  ones  by  the  river- 
side, because  they  cannot  afford  the  expense  of 
cremating  them. 

The  zeal  of  the  pious  missionaries  for  Chris- 
tianizing India  was  the  cause  of  the  story  of  the 
car  of  Jaggannath.  Sir  Monier  Monier  Williams 
says:  "It  is  usual  for  missionaries  to  speak  with 
horror  of  the  self-immolation  alleged  to  take 
place  under  the  car  of  Jaggannath.  But,  if 
deaths  occur,  they  must  be  accidental,  as  self- 
destruction  is  wholly  opposed  both  to  the  letter 
and  spirit  of  their  religion."  * 

As  regards  female  infanticide,  Pandita  RamA- 
bai  herself  wrote: 

"Female  infanticide,  though  not  sanctioned  by 
religion  and  7ievcr  looked  upon  as  right  by  con- 
scientious people,  has  nevertheless,  in  those 
parts  of  India  mentioned  been  silently  passed 
over  unpunished  by  society  in  general."  f 

The  Pandita  does  not  perhaps  know  that 
numbers  of  dead  bodies  of  illegitimate  babies 
are   picked    up   every   year   in    the   streets   and 

♦  Brfthmanism  and  Hinduism,  p.  ii8. 
t  High-caste  Hindu  Women,  p.  26. 
282 


woman's   place   in   HINDU   RELIGION. 

vacant  lots  of  New  York  and  other  large  Ameri- 
can cities.  What  does  American  society  do 
about  such  criminals?  Is  it  not  equally  reason- 
able to  charge  these  evils  to  the  Christian  re- 
ligion as  to  lay  all  the  sins  of  India  at  the  door 
of  the  Hindu  religion? 

High-caste  Hindu  women  generally  learn  to 
read  and  write  in  their  own  vernacular,  but  they 
do  not  pass  public  examinations.  Hindu  religion 
does  not  prevent  any  woman  from  receiving 
education;  on  the  contrary,  it  says  that  it  is  the 
duty  of  the  parents,  brothers,  and  husbands  to 
educate  their  daughters,  sisters,  and  wives.  So, 
if  there  be  ignorance  among  Hindu  women,  it  is 
not  the  fault  of  their  religion,  but  rather  of  their 
poverty. 

Malabar  boasts  of  seven  great  poets,  and  four 
of  them  were  women.  The  moral  sentiments 
uttered  by  one  of  them  (Avyar)  are  taught  in  the 
schools  as  the  golden  rules  of  life.  The  writings 
of  Lilavati,  a  great  woman  mathematician,  still 
form  the  text-book  in  native  schools  of  the 
Hindus. 

It  is  often  said  by  the  Christian  missionaries 

283 


INDIA   AND   HER    PEOPLE. 

that  Hindu  religion   teaches  that  women  have 
no  souls,  and  that  they  are  not  entitled  to  sal- 
vation.     On  the  contrary,  all  the  sacred  books 
of    the  Hindus  testify  against    such    outrageous 
falsities.      Those  who  have  read  the  Bhagavad 
Gita,  or  the  Upanishads,  know  that,  according  to 
Hindu  religion  the  soul  is  sexless,  and  that  all 
men  and  women  will  sooner  or  later  reach  the 
highest  goal  of  religion.     It  was  in  India  that 
women  were  first  allowed  to  be  spiritual  teachers 
and  to  enter  into  the  monastic  life.     Those  who 
have  read  the  life  of  Buddha  know    that    his 
wife  became  the  leader  of   the   Buddhist   nuns. 
There  are  to-day  hundreds  of  Hindu  Sannydsinis 
(nuns)  who  are  recognized  as  spiritual  teachers 
by  the  Hindus.     The  wife  of  Sri  RA,makrishna, 
the  great  Hindu  Saint  of  the  nineteenth  century, 
has  become  a  living  example  of  the  great  honor 
and   reverence   that   are   paid   by   Hindus   to   a 
woman  of  pure,  spotless,  spiritual  life. 

Lastly,  the  position  of  women  in  Hindu  re- 
ligion can  be  understood  better  by  that  unique 
idea  of  the  Motherhood  of  God,  which  is  nowhere 
so  strongly  expressed  and  recognized  as  in  India. 

284 


woman's   place   in   HINDU   REUGION. 

The  mother  is  so  highly  honored  in  India  that 
the  Hindus  are  not  satisfied  until  they  see  divin- 
ity in  the  form  of  earthly  mother.  They  say 
that  one  mother  ^s  greater  than  a  thousand 
fathers,  therefore  the  Hindus  prefer  to  call  the 
Supreme  Being  the  Mother  of  the  Universe. 
The  Divine  Mother  is  greater  than  the  "Creator" 
of  other  religions.  She  is  the  Producer  of  the 
Creator,  or  the  First-born  Lord  of  all  creatures. 
There  is  no  other  country  in  the  world  where 
every  living  mother  is  venerated  as  an  incarna- 
tion of  the  Divine  Mother,  where  every  village 
has  a  guardian  mother  who  protects  all  as  her 
own  children. 

Listen  to  the  prayer  that  rises  every  day  to 
the  Almighty  Mother  of  the  universe  from  the 
hearts  of  Hindu  worsliippers : 

"O  Mother  Divine,  Thou  art  beyond  the 
reach  of  our  praises;  Thou  pervadest  every  par- 
ticle of  the  universe;  all  knowledge  proceeds 
from  Thee,  O  Infinite  Source  of  wisdom!  Thou 
dwellest  in  evfery  feminine  form,  and  all  women 

are  Thy  Uving  representatives  upon  earth." 

285 


How  to  be  a  Yogi,      (^ifth  Edition.) 

BY  SWAMI  ABHEDANANDA 


I.     Introductory.  III.     Science  of  Breathing. 

II.     What  is  Yoga?  IV.     Was  Christ  a  Yogi? 

I2mo,  l88  pages.     Portrait  of  author,  frontispiece. 
Cloth.  $i.oo.      Postage,  8  cents. 

**  For  Christians  interested  in  foreig^n  missions  this  book  is  M 
Bioment,  as  showing  the  method  of  reasoning  which  they  must  be 
prepared  to  meet  if  they  are  to  influence  the  educated  Hindu.  To 
the  Orientalist,  and  the  philosopher  also,  the  book  is  not  without 
interest.  ,  .  .  Swami  Abhedftnanda  preaches  no  mushroom  creed 
and  no  Eurasian  hybrid  'theosophy.'  He  aims  to  give  us  a  co;n- 
f>endious  account  of  Yoga.  Clearly  and  admirably  he  performs  his 
task.  In  form  th^  littk  book  is  excellent,  and  its  English  style  is 
jood." — A'ew  York  Times  Saturday  Review  c/ Books,  Dec.  6,  190a. 

*' '  How  to  be  a  Yogi '  is  a  little  volume  that  makes  very  interest- 
ing reading.  The  book  contains  the  directions  that  must  be  fol- 
lowed in  physical  as  well  as  in  mental  training  by  one  who  wishes 
to  have  full  and  perfect  control  of  all  his  powers." — Record' 
Herald,  Chicago,  Feb.  28,  1903. 

*'  The  Swimi  writes  in  a  clear,  direct  manner.  His  chapter  oa 
Breath  will  elicit  more  than  ordinary  attention,  as  there  is  much  ia 
it  that  will  prove  helpful.  The  book  makes  a  valuable  addition  to 
Vedanta  Philosophy." — Mind,  June,  1903. 

*'  The  book  is  calculated  to  interest  the  student  of  Oriental 
thought  and  familiarize  the  unread  with  one  of  the  greatest  philo- 
sophical systems  of  the  world." — Buffalo  Courier,  Nov.  23,  1902, 

"  •  How  to  be  a  Yogi '  practically  sums  up  the  whole  science  of 
Vedanta  Philosophy.  Thie  term  Yogi  is  lucidly  defined  and  a  full 
analysis  is  given  of  the  science  of  breathing  and  its  bearing  on  the 
highest  spiritual  development.  The  methods  and  practices  of  Yoga 
are  interestingly  set  forth,  and  not  the  least  important  teaching  of 
the  book  is  the  assertion  of  how  g;reat  a  Yogi  was  Jesus  of  Naz- 
areth."—  The  Bookseller,  Newsdealer  and  Stationer,  Jan.  15,  1903. 

"  This  book  is  well  worth  a  careful  reading.  Condensed,  yet 
■  -"i-r  and  concise,  it  fills  one  with  the  desire  to  eoLUiate  these  Yogis 
t£i  attaixuag  qxritual  perfection." — UnUy,  Kansas  City,  Oec,  190a. 

Orders  received  by  and  checks  and  money 
orders  made  payable  to 

VEDANTA   ASHRAMA 

West   Cornwall,  Conn. 


Great  Saviors  of  the  World 

rvoi.  I.) 
A   NEW   BOOK 

BY 

SWAMI   ABHEDANANDA 

Cloth,  ^i.oo  net.     Postage,  6  cents.     Portrait 
of  each  Savior. 

CONTENTS. 

I.  Great  Saviors  of  the  World  (Introductory.) 
II.  Krishna  and  His  Teachings. 

III.  Zoroaster  and  His  Teachings. 

IV.  Lao-Tze  and  His  Teachings. 

"  These  studies  are  scholarly  and  comprehensive  reviews  of 
historic  fact.  They  are  also  broad  and  open  interpretations  of  moral 
and  spiritual  forces.  The  author's  attitude  is  reverent  toward  all. 
His  mind  is  free.  His  speech  is  peculiarly  impressive.  Surely,  it 
speaks  well  for  the  world  that  its  people  can  look  without  bitterness 
and  jealousy  upon  the  fact  that  God  has  sent,  and  will  send,  many 
Saviors  into  tne  world.  This  is  a  good  study,  htted  to  open  the 
heart  and  liberalize  mind.^'—  iVasAiHgten  Star.  June  39,  1913. 

"A  valuable  contribution  to  metaphysics."— /'(Or</a«<^C7r<'^o««a(». 
June  33,  1913. 

"The  work  is  taken  up  somewhat  in  chronological  order.  .  .  . 
The  teachings  of  the  thinkers  who  form  the  subject  of  the  lectures  are 
faithfully  reported.  The  author  holds  no  special  brief  for  any  of 
those  remarkable  men  but  endeavors  to  state  precisely  what  their 
ideas  were.  The  style  of  the  author  is  interesting  as  well  as  perfectly 
lucid."— ^«^a/»  Nttvs,  April  ai,  1912. 

Swami  Abhedananda  emphasizes  the  similarities  in  the  teachinfr 
of  these  great  men.  His  aim  is  "  10  show  that  the  fundamental  teach, 
ings  of  the  founders  of  the  great  religions  of  the  world  have  had  the 
same  spiritual  keynote  and  that  the  stories  connected  with  their  lives 
and  miraculous  deeds  are  similar  to  those  of  Jesus  Christ."— .S'/.  Pam/ 
Piotutr  Frtfty  August  4,  1919. 


Press  Notices. — Continued. 


"  He  (author)  attempts  to  explain  their  ideas  accurately  and  pays 
much  attention  to  the  legends  ot  the  east  relative  to  the  orig^in  of  the 
great  leaders  in  sacred  affairs.'"— Z?<rj  Moints  Ca/ital,  June  s,  191a. 

"  It  sets  forth  in  picturesque  language  the  principal  CTents  in  the 
lires  of  his  heroes  and  gives  a  good  concise  idea  of  their  teachings." 
—  The  Indianapolis  S/ar,  May  26,  1912. 

"Swami  Abhedjnanda's  discourses  point  to  the  essential  harmony 
of  religions  .  .  .  and  offer  an  unusual  opportunity  to  study  from 
conemporaneous  expressions  the  companion  viewpoints  of  faith  and 
pure  culture." — New  York  Worlds  May  25,  igia. 

"  The  life  and  teachings  of  three  great  Sages,  of  whom  the  West- 
ern world  knows  far  too  little,  is  treated  in  a  wonderfully  clear  and 
attractive  manner.  .  .  .  Their  illumined  efforts  in  lifting  up  a  new 
ensign  for  the  people  of  their  respective  countries  are  described  by  an 
Oriental  Scholar,  who  is  perfectly  titled  for  the  task,  and  has  familiar- 
ized himself  with  the  available  records  of  their  almost  superhuman 
labors.  Each  of  these  great  souls  is  made  to  live  again  in  the  respect- 
ive chapters  of  this  engrossing  work,  very  interesting  side  lights  are 
thrown  on  alleged  inaccuracies,  many  abscure  points  are  made  plain, 
and  the  underlying  principles  they  set  out  to  teach  are  conveyed  in 
simple,  but  scholarly  style." — Ihe  Column,  June,  1913. 

"  Swami's  book  will  do  infinitely  more  good  at  the  present  time 
in  the  west  than  any  book  he  could  have  written  upon  the  different 
schools  of  Vedanta."— JVi/aw/a  Universal  Messenger,  Dec,  iqu. 

*'  It  breathes  the  spirit  of  deep  vision  and  profound  learning  and 
one  sees  that  the  Swami  is  actuated  by  the  spirit  of  his  Master,  Sri 
Ramakrishna,  that  Synthesis  of  the  Religious  Cr-nsciousness.  .  .  . 
The  quotations  from  learned  authors,  bearing  relation  to  the  historical 
features  of  the  Avataras  wuh  which  the  book  is  replete,  shows  how 
diligently  the  Swami  has  prepared  himself  for  his  arduous  task.  He 
has  left  nothing  unsaid. — Awakened Inditi,  Nov.,  1913. 

"This  collection  of  lectures  by  the  well-known  Vedantist  con- 
stitutes the  first  of  a  series  of  three  volumes  dealing  with  the  same 
subject.  As  the  author  indicates  in  his  preface,  the  word  "  Saviour" 
is  jsed  by  him  in  the  broad  sense,  and  not  as  denoting  "a  Saviour 
who  saves  from  eternal  damnation."  The  present  volume  deals  with 
the  lives  and  teachings  of  Krishna,  Zoroaster,  and  Lao-Tze,  viewed 
in  the  unifying  light  of  the  Vedanta.  The  many  admirers  of  Swimi 
Abhedananda's  works  will  welcome  this  addition  to  the  list,  whilst 
those  who  have  not  yet  had  the  p'easure  of  becoming  acquainted 
with  the  grandeur  of  the  teachings  of  this  religio-philosophy,  through 
the  light  of  which  "the  Unity  of  the  Godhead  under  variety  of  names 
and  forms"  may  be  perceived,  will  assuredly  read  the  book  not  only 
with  interest,  but  come  from  its  perusal  with  the  conviction  that  the 
SwSmi  possesses  the  happy  gift  of  bringing  to  light  in  an  interesting 
and  attractive  manner  the  harmony  existing  between  the  leading 
world.rel:gions."— Of.w//  Review,  July,  1912,  London,  England. 


In  the  Press 

GREAT   SAVIORS   OF   THE   WORLD 
Vols.  II.  aod  III. 


Human   Affection  and 
Divine  Love 

BY 

SWAMI    ABHEDANANDA 
Flexible  cloth.     Price,  35  cents.     Postage,  3  cents. 

A  suitable  gift- book  full  of  inspiring  thoughts.  It  describes 
the  evolution  of  Love  in  its  various  stages — aninial,  human, 
and  divine  ;  and  shows  that  love  is  not  an  emotional  sentiment 
as  commonly  understood  but  an  attribute  of  our  Real  Self. 

"  Beautifully  expressed  sentences,  on  the  idealism  of  love,  reflected 
from  India." — Portland  Ore^ontan,  June  23,  1912. 

"Never  under  any  circumstances  is  divine  love  an  evil  thing,  but 
is  everlasting  in  its  beneficent  blessings.  In  this  little  book  the  author 
contrasts  the  endurinp  beauty  of  the  divine  love  with  that  of  human 
affections  which  if  misdirected  in  its  selfishness  results  in  murder, 
robbery  and  other  crimes.  His  book  is  divided  into  two  parts  and  the 
Later  inciudcs  numerous  quotations  to  prove  his  argument." — Des 
Moisnes  Capitate  June  s,  1913. 

"  It  is  written  simply  and  the  mysticism  in  it  is  somewhat  akin  to 
the  mysticism  of  Maeterlinck,  Kmerson  and  of  Thomas  i  Kempis— 
different  as  they  all  are." — St.  Paul  Pioneer  Pren,  Aug.  4,  tgta. 

"A  tiny  book  but  containing  a  volume  of  profound  thought  wis- 
dom and  beauty.  It  was  Flrummond  who  wrote  that  the  greatest 
thing  in  the  world  was  "  Love,"  and  since  then  love  hassomehow  had 
a  greater  significance  and  more  exalted  place  in  the  world  than  it  ever 
occupied  before.  But  even  Drummond  did  not  put  it  on  the  high 
plane  or  give  it  such  exquisite  meaning  .ts  this  writer  has.  He  casts 
away  the  material  and  shows  that  the  love  that  exalts,  the  love  that 
worketh  only  good  reaches  through  the  material  to  the  divine." — Or** 
goH  Journal,  April  a8,  1913. 


Press  Notices. — Continued. 

"  Human  affection  has  ever  been  manifested  in  attachment  to  some 
object,  and  the  enlightened  passages  in  this  practical  little  Tolume 
show  the  same  tendency  on  the  animal  plane  by  means  of  a  very  fine 
comparison.  The  nature  and  expression  of  Divine  Love  is  also  very 
skillfully  analysed,  and  a  nice  distinction  drawn,  between  it  and  the 
human  quality.  The  author  feelingly  portrays  an  ideal  behind  both, 
which  might  well  be  ii-i opted  by  the  individual,  and  typified  in  his 
relation  to  others  q  daily  life,  with  invaluable  results  to  all.  The 
words  of  the  Swami  on  "that  Divine  Love  that  knows  no  fear,"  but 
realizes  everything  comes  from  God  are  uttered  in  a  decisive  style  that 
will  appeal  to  an  army  of  souls,  who  to-day  feel  the  truth  of  such  a 
principle.  Those  will  be  greatly  helped  by  the  plain  and  highly  intell- 
igent explanation  of  a  great  truth,  in  which  the  vividness  of  Oriental 
expression  is  reproduced  in  Western  terms  by  a  master  of  both 
languages.  This  especially  applies  to  the  closing  chapter  where  aptly 
chosen  illustrations  so  dear  to  the  oriental  mind  elucidate  the  two 
characteristics  of  ecstatic  love,  the  three  states  of  consciousness  and 
their  correspondence  to  the  five  sheaths  of  the  soul,  beyond  which  is 
the  True  Self,  the  Absolute.  An  elevating  manual  quite  in  keeping 
with  the  Author's  previous  best  work."— 7"A#  Column,  June,  igia, 

"It  is  thoroughly  sound  and  happily  written  book,  a  fine  intro- 
duction to  Bhakti  Marga.  It  is  profitable  reading  to  every  person 
while  to  the  more  philosophically  inclined  it  affords  valuable  instruct- 
ion."—  The  Brakmavadin,  Madras  India,  Dec,  igia. 

"Carefully  does  the  Swami  draw  the  distinction,  showing  how 
human  love  attains  its  climax  in  directing  itself  to  GoA."— Awakened 
India,  Nov.,  1912. 

"  This  is  a  book  presenting  somewhat  of  the  old. Indian  phil- 
osophy, which  is  noble  and  pure.  It  is  in  no  sense  a  departure  from 
Western  thought,  as  one  might  be  led  to  suppose.  It  is  well  written 
aad  free  from  meuphysical  speculations."— .5ro<»-t/>i»  Eagle,  June  14, 
1911. 


Unity  and  Harmony 

A  New  Lecture  by 

SWAMI    ABHEDANANDA 
Price,  10  cents.     Postage,  i  cent. 


Divine  Heritage  of  Man. 

BY  SWAMI  ABHEDANANDA 

I3mo,  215   pages.      Portrait   of  »uthor,  frontispiece. 
Cloth,  ^i.oo.     Postage,  8  cents. 

Contents.  I.  Existence  of  God.  II.  Attributes  of  God. 
III.  Has  God  any  Form?  IV.  Fatherhood  and  Motherhood 
of  God.  V.  Relation  of  Soul  to  God.  VI.  What  is  an  Incar- 
nation of  God?  VII.  Son  of  God.  VIII.  Divine  Principle 
in  Man. 

"  The  SwSmi  Abhedinanda's  writings  are  also  companionable  and  read- 
able. .  .  .  The  Philosophy  of  India,  being  the  brinffing  together  of  the 
best  thoughts  and  reasonings  of  the  best  men  for  the  thousandsof  preced- 
ing years,  had  under  consideration  the  self-same  problems  that  are  to-day 
Texing^  the  souls  of  our  philosophers.  The  Swfimi's  book  is  therefore  not 
so  radical  »  departure  from  accepted  thought  as  might  at  first  be  imagined. 
...  It  is  not  meat  for  babes,  but  rather  will  it  give  new  liri  ••  of  thought 
to  the  brightest  intellects." — Transcript,  Boston,  Aug.  1903. 

"  His  method  of  dealing  with  these  fundamental  questions  is  peculiarly 
free  both  from  dogmatic  assertion  and  from  pure  metaphysical  specula- 
tion."— Inter-Ocean,  Chicago,  Aug.  1903. 

"  He  bases  his  arguments,  not  on  theological  hypotheses,  but  on  scientific 
facts." — Cleveland  Plain  Dealer,  Aug.  1903. 

"  It  is  written  in  a  plain  and  logical  style,  and  cannot  fail  to  interest  all 
who  are  anxious  for  information  concerning  the  philosophy  of  which  tho 
aathor  is  such  an  able  exponent.'' — Times   Pittsburg,  June,  1903. 

"  A  glance  over  a  few  of  its  pages  would  be  sufHcieiit  to  convince  the 
reader  that  he  is  in  the  presence  of  an  intellect  of  high  order,  more 
thoroughly  conversant  with  the  philosophies  and  sciences  of  the  Occi- 
dental world  than  most  Europeans  or  Americans.  .  .  .  The  "Divine 
Heritage  of  Man  "  gives  a  rare  insight  into  the  religious  views  of  educatt-d 
Hindoos  and  in  its  argumentation  furnishes  an  intellectual  treat."— 
Chronicle,  San  Francisco,  Aug.  1903. 

"  Fully  cognitant  of  modern  scientific  discoveries,  the  author  treats 
his  subject  broadly." — Bookseiler,  SeivsdeaUr,  and  Tuhtisher,  New 
York,  Aug.  1903, 

"The  student  of  religions  will  find  much  of  value  in  the  discourses, 
since  they  are  full  of  historical  information  concerning  the  origin  ana 
growth  of  certain  ideas  and  beliefs  dominant  in  Christianity." — Ktftvbli- 
can,  Denver,  July,  1903. 

"There  is  no  disposition  on  \\\<:  part  of  the  .luthor  to  as.sail  any  of  tha 
Christian  principles,  but  he  siniplv  presents  his  subject  with  calmness, 
not  attempting  to  reconcile  reli;.'i'on  and  science,  for  to  him  they  aa« 
one.''--U  asAi/tgton  J'eit,  June,  1^03 


Self-Knowledge  (Atma-Jnana). 

BY  SWAMI  ABHEDANANDA 

Qoth,  |i.oo.     Postage,  8  cents.     Portrait  of  author, 
frontispiece. 

Contents. 
I.  Spirit  and  Matter.  IV.  Search  after  the  Self. 

II.  Knowledge  of  the  Self.  V,   Realization  of  the  Self. 

III.  Prana  and  the  Self.  VI.  Immortality  and  the  Self. 

"  So  practically  and  exhaustively  is  each  phase  of  the  subject 
treated  that  it  may  well  serve  as  a  text-book  for  anyone  striving 
for  self-development  and  a  deeper  understanding  of  human  nature." 
—  Toronto  Saturday  Nighty  Dec.  1905. 

"  It  will  also  be  welcomed  by  students  of  the  Vedic  Scriptures, 
since  each  chapter  is  based  upon  some  one  of  the  ancient  Vedas 
known  as  the  Upanishads,  and  many  passages  are  quoted." — 
Chicago  Inter-Ocean,  Jan.  1906. 

"  The  book,  from  the  gifted  pen  of  the  head  of  the  Vedanta 
Society  of  New  York,  presents  in  a  clear  manner,  calculated  to 
arrest  the  attention  of  those  not  yet  famiUar  with  Vedic  literature, 
the  principles  of  self-knowledge  as  taught  by  the  leaders  of  that 
philosophy.  .  .  .  The  many  passages  quoted  prove  the  profound 
wisdom  and  practical  teaching  contained  in  the  early  Hindu  Scrip*- 
tures." — Washington  Evening  Star,  Dec.  1905. 

*'  A  new  book  which  will  be  welcome  to  students  of  Truth, 
Tvhether  it  be  found  in  the  Eastern  religions,  in  modern  thought 
or  elsewhere." — Unity,  Nov.  1905. 

"  The  book  is  very  well  written." — San  Francisco  Chronicle^ 
Dec.  1905. 

"In  forcefulness  and  clearness  of  style  it  is  in  every  way  equal 
to  the  other  works  by  the  Swami  Abhedananda,  who  has  always 
shown  himself  in  his  writings  a  remarkable  mcister  of  the  English 
language." — Mexican  Herald,  Dec.  1905. 

*'  The  volume  is  forcefully  written,  as  are  all  of  this  author's 
works,  and  cannot  fail  to  be  of  great  interest  to  all  who  have  entered 
this  field  of  thought.  A  fine  portrait  of  the  Swami  forms  th« 
frontispiece." — Toledo  Biade,  Nov.  1905. 


India  and  Her  People 

{Lectures  delivered  before  the  Brooklyn  Institute 

of  Arts  and  Sciences  during  the  season 

of  1905-1906.) 

BY 

SWAMI   ABHEDANANDA 

THIRD  EDITION 
Cloth,  $1.25.  Postage,  10  Cents 

Contents 

I.  Philosophy  of  India  To-day. 
II.  Religions  ci  India. 

III.  Social  Status  of  India:  Their  System  of  Caste.   , 

IV.  Political  Institutions  of  India. 
V.  Education  in  India. 

VL  The  Influence  of  India  on  Western  Civilization  and  the 
Influence  of  Western  Civilization  on  India. 


"This  book  has  more  than  usual  interest  as  coming  from  one  who 
knows  the  Occident  and  both  knows  and  loves  the  Orient.  ...  It 
is  decidedly  interesting.  .  .  .  The  book  has  two  admirable  qualities: 
breadth  in  scope  and  sugpestiveness  in  material." — Bulletin  o/ tk* 
A  merican  Geographical  Hociety,  Sept,  1906. 

"This  volume,  written  in  an  attractive  style  and  dealing  with  the 
life,  philusophy  and  reliy:ioa  of  India,  should  prove  a  useful  addition  to 
the  literature  of  a  fascinating  and  as  yet  largely  unknown  subject.  It 
is  designid  for  f^'opuUr  reading,  the  metaphysical  portions  being  so 
handled  that  the  reader  runs  little  risk  of  getting  beyond  his  depth." 
— Literary  Digest,  Feb.  16,  1907. 

"  The  Swami  possesses  the  exceptional  advantage  of  being  able  to 
look  upon  his  own  country  almost  from  the  standpoint  of  an  outsider 
and  to  handle  his  subject  free  from  both  foreign  and  native  prejudice." 

—  New  York  iyorlii,K\i^.  4,  1906. 

"  It  is  a  valuable  contribution  to  Western  knowledge  of  India,  con- 
taining precisely  what  the  American  wants  10  know  about  that  region.' 

—  IVajAington  JSvenin^  Star,  Aug.  4,  igo6. 

"  It  is  imposbible  lu  quarrel  with  his  book.  He  (Swami)  writes  too 
interestingly  and  be  is  a  man  with  a  mission." —  The  Sunday  Oregonian, 
Ang.  36,  1906. 


PRESS   NOTICES  OF  "INDIA  AND  HER  PEOPLE." 

"  The  views  set  forth  in  this  work  by  Swami  Abhedananda  ...  are 
interesting,  as  being  those  of  a  native  of  India  who  has  devoted  much 
time  and  attention  to  the  study  of  those  questions  which  aflect  the 

fovernmeni  and  general  administration  of  the  country.  The  author 
as  selected  a  wide  range  of  subjects  for  treatment,  embracing  the 
social,  political,  educational,  and  religious  conditionsas  they  now  exist, 
and,  speaking  generally,  has  invariably  exercised  sound  tact  and  judg- 
ment in  discussing  the  many  diflferent  questions  embraced  under  those 
headings." — Journal  ef  the  Royal  Colonial  Institute^  April,  igo7, 
London,  England. 

"  An  excellent  contribution  to  the  very  scanty  literature  on  India. 
.  .  .  All  chapters  are  instructive  to  any  one  aspiring  to  a  knowledg^e 
of  this  vast  country.  ...  It  is  a  book  which  every  non-Indian  visit- 
ing India  or  making  a  temporary  or  permanent  stay  therein,  and  also 
every  son  of  the  soil,  should  have  by  bis  side." — Tht  Arya,  February, 
zgo7,  Madras,  India. 


Reincarnation. 


(New  and  Enlarged  Edition^ 

I.  Reincarnation. 

II.  Heredity  and  Reincarnation. 

III.  Evolution  and  Reincarnation. 

IV.  Which  is  Scientific,  Resurrection  or  Reincarnation? 
V.  Theory  of  Transmigration. 

Paper,  45  cents.     Cloth,  60  cents.     Postage,  5  and  7  cents. 

"  In  these  discourses  the  Swami  Abhedananda  considers  the  questions 
of  evolution  and  the  resurrection  in  their  bearing  upon  the  ancient 
teaching  of  rebirth,  the  truth,  logic  and  justice  of  which  are  rapidly 
permeating  the  best  thought  of  the  Western  world.  For  the  preserva- 
tion of  this  doctrine  mankind  is  indebted  to  the  literary  storehouses  of 
India,  the  racial  and  geographical  source  of  much  of  the  vital  knowledge 
of  Occidental  peoples.  Remcarnation  is  shown  in  the  present  volume 
to  be  a  universal  solvent  of  life's  mysteries.  It  answers  those  questions! 
of  children  that  have  staggered  the  wisest  minds  who  seek  to  reconcile' 
Xj^f  law  of  evolution  and  the  existence  of  an  intelligent  and  just  Creator, 
wih  the  proposition  that  man  has  but  a  single  lifetime  in  which  to  de- 
velop spiritual  self-consciousness.  It  is  commended  to  every  thinker." 
—-Mind,  February,  IQOO- 

*'  It  IS  a  work  which  will  appeal  to  the  novice  for  its  simplicity  and 
definite  quality,  and  to  the  student  for  its  wealth  of  knowledge  aad 
suggestion," — Vedanta  Monthly  Bulletin,  Sept.,  1907. 

"The  book  should  prove  a  valuable  acquisition." — The  Evening 
Sun,  19.  v.,  Deceml'er  zi,  IQ07> 

"This  is  the  work  of  a  man  of  fine  education  and  of  fine  intellect. 
.  .  .  (Reincarnation)  as  expounded  by  Swami  Abhedananda  is  very 
plausible,  quite  scientific,  and  far  from  uncomforting.  'I  he  exposition 
contained  in  this  little  book  is  well  worth  reading  by  all  students  of 
metaphysics.  There  is  not  the  slighte»t  danger  of  its  converting  or 
perverting  any  one  to  a  new  and  strange  religion.  R'  'ncarnation  is 
not  religion,  it  is  science.  Science  was  never  known  to  aurt  anybody 
but  scientists." — Brooklyn  Eagle,  December  ij,  IQOJ. 


WORKS  BY  SWAMI  ABHEDANANDA. 


Philosophy  of  Work. 

I.     Philosophy  of  Work. 
II.     Secret  of  Work. 
111.     Duty  or  Motire  in  Work. 

Paper,  35  cents.     Cloth,  50  cents.     Postage,  a  and  6  cents. 

"In  this  volume  the  Vedanta  Society  presents  three  lectures  by  the 
leader  of  the  Hindu  religious  movement  that  is  making;  much  head* 
way  among  philosophic  minds  throughout  the  United  States.  The 
book  is  an  excellent  antidote  to  the  gospel  of  selfism  now  popular 
in  many  quarters,  and  a  copy  should  be  in  the  hands  especially  of 
every  ambitious  seeker  after  the  loaves  and  fishes  of  material  desire. 
It  shows  the  folly  of  slavery  to  sense  and  the  means  of  escape  from 
the  thraldom  of  egoism,  while  elucidating  the  Hindu  concept  o£ 
many  things  that  are  '  race  problems'  because  of  individual  igno- 
rance of  spiritual  principles.  These  discourses  merit  a  wide  circa!** 
lion  aBODg  unprejudiced  minds." — Mind,  February,  1903. 


Single  Lectures. 


Christian  Science  and  Vedanta. 

Cosmic  Evolution  and^^its  Purpose. 

Divine  Communion. 

Does  the  Soul  Exist  akter  Death  ? 

The  Motherhood  of  God. 

The  Philosophy  of  Good  and  Evil. 

The  Relation  of  Soul  to  God. 

Religion  of  the  Hindus. 

Scientific  Basis  of  Religion. 

Simple  Living. 

Spiritualism  and  Vedanta. 

The  Way  to  the  Blessed  Life. 

Who  is  the  Saviour  of  Souls  ? 

Why  a  Hindu  Accepts  Christ  and  Rejects  Churchianitt. 

Why  a  Hindu  is  a  Vegetarian. 

Woman's  Place  in  Hindu  Religion. 

The  Word  and  the  Cross  in  Ancient  India. 

10  cents  each.      Postage,  i  cent  each. 
Single  Lectures  Parts  I  &  H.    Bound  in  cloth,  each  $1.00. 
Postage,  8  cents. 


The  Sayings  of  Sri  Ramakrishna. 

COMPILED   BY 

SWAMI  ABHEDANANDA. 

234  pages.      Flexible  cloth,  gilt  top,  75c.  net.      Postage,  6c. 

R&makrishna  was  a  great  Hindu  saint  of  the  nineteenth  century 
who  has  already  had  an  influence  on  the  religious  thought  of 
America  and  England  through  the  teachings  of  his  disciples, 
Swfimi  Vivektnanda,  Swfimi  Abhedananda,  and  others.  His  Say- 
ings are  full  of  broad,  practical,  non-sectarian  instructions  concern- 
ing the  spiritual  life  which  cannot  but  give  help  and  inspiration 
to  the  followers  of  all  creeds.  The  present  volume  contains  a 
larger  number  of  Sayings  than  has  yet  appeared  in  any  one  English 
collection.  For  the  first  time  also  they  have  been  classified  into 
chapters  and  arranged  in  logical  sequence  under  marg^inal  head- 
ings, such  as  "All  creeds  paths  to  God,"  "Power  of  Mind  and 
Thought,"  "Meditation,"  "Perseverance."  As  an  exposition  of 
the  universal  truths  of  Religion  and  their  application  to  the  daily 
life  this  book  takes  its  place  among  the  great  scriptures  of  tb« 
■world. 


Spiritual  Unfoldment. 

BY  SWAMI  ABHEDANANDA 

I.     Self-contrcJ. 
n.     Concentration  and  Meditation. 
III.     God-consciousness. 

Paper,  35  cents.     Cloth,  50  cents.     Postage,  2  and  6  cents. 

"This  aitriictive  little  volume  comprises  three  lectures  on  the 
Vedanta  Philosophy.  The  discourses  will  be  found  vitally  helpful  even 
by  chose  who  know  liuie  and  care  less  about  the  spiritual  and  ethical 
teacLiings  of  which  the  Swami  is  an  able  and  popular  exponent.  As 
the  Vedanta  itself  is  largely  a  doctrine  of  universals  and  ulti mates,  <io 
also  is  this  bouk  of  common  utility  and  significance  among  all  races  of 
believers.  Its  precepts  are  susceptible  of  application  by  any  rational 
thinker,  regardless  of  religious  predilection  and  inherited  prejudices. 
The  principles  set  forth  by  this  teacher  are  an  excellent  corrective  of 
spiritual  bias  or  narrowness,  and  as  such  the  present  work  is  to  t)e  coir- 
mended.  It  has  already  awakened  an  interest  in  Oriental  literature  that 
augurs  well  for  the  cause  of  human  brotherhood,  and  it  merits  a  wide 
circulation  among  all  who  cherish  advanced  idealb."—i)/i»«f, /j/r<7, 
ZQOg. 


What  is  Vedanta  .r^ 


Pamphlet  printed  for  distribution  containing  a  short  exposition  of 
the  fundamenUl  teachings  of  the  Vedanta  Philosophy,  izmo,  8  pp. 
Price,  s  cent. 


The  Gospel  of  Ramakrishna. 

Authorized  Edition. 
WITH  AN  INTRODUCTION  BY 

swAmi  abhedananda. 

448  pages;  with  two  pictures,  maginal  notes,  and  index. 

Flexible  silk  cloth,  gilt  top,  $1.50  net.     Postage,  7  cents. 

Full  leather   binding,   flexible  cover,  circuit  edge  with  rea 

and  gold  in  the  style  of  "Teachers'  Bible." 

$3.00  net.     Postage,  8  cents. 

"The  sayings  of  a  mystic  who  has  much  influence  in  India 
and  who  has  been  made  known  to  the  Western  world  by  various 
missionary  'Swamis'  will  be  found  in  'The  Gospel  of  Rinia- 
krishna.'     They  have  been  translated  into  excellent  English." 

—  The  Sun,  New  York. 

<' '  The  Gospel  of  Rimakrishna '  contains  the  religious 
teachings  of  this  modern  Hindu  saint  whose  life  contained  so 
many  good  deeds  that  his  followers  thought  him  little  short  ot 
divine." —  77/1?  Boston  Globe,  Boston,  Mass. 

•'  During  his  lifetime  his  career  and  personality  attracted 
much  attention  from  Entr'ash  and  German  scholars  of  the  nine 
teenth  century." — The  Chicago  Inter-Ocean,  Chicago,  III. 

"The  book  is  filled  with  beautiful  thoughts  and  beauti- 
ful teachings,  which,  if  followed,  would  lead  to  a  perfect  life. 
One  cannot  marvel  that  the  sayings  of  RAmakrishna  made  a 
deep  impress  on  modern  Hindu  thought.  He  was  at  least  a 
great  and  wise  scholar,  and  gave  goodly  advice  to  his  followers." 

—  The  San  Francisco  Examiner,  San  Francisco,  Cat. 

"  It  is  a  remarkable  book  and  it  should  be  a  rare  privilege 
to  read  it." — The  Oregonian,  Portland,  Oregon. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


r 


DS  iibhedananda ,   Swami 

A23  India  and  her  people 

ii2